bts3900a installation guide for enhancing existing cabinets(06)(pdf)-en
DESCRIPTION
BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets(06)(PDF)-EnTRANSCRIPT
BTS3900A
Installation Guide for EnhancingExisting Cabinets
Issue 06
Date 2014-04-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
OverviewThe BTS3900A (with breathable film), (Ver.A), (Ver.B), and (Ver.C) cabinets can be enhancedto the same capacity as the BTS3900A (Ver.D). After being enhanced, the BTS3900A (withbreathable film) cabinets is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1), the BTS3900A (Ver.A) is named(Ver.D_A2), the BTS3900A (Ver.B) is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_B), and BTS3900A (Ver.C)is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).
This document describes the process for installing the cabinet, boards, modules, and cables inthe enhancement of BTS3900A. It also provides checklist for hardware installation.
Product VersionThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Product Version
BTS3900A WCDMA V200R013C00 and later versions
BTS3900A LTE V100R003C00 and later versions
BTS3900A GSM V100R013C00 and later versions
BTS3900A V100R004C00 and later versions
Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:
l Base station installation personnel
Organization1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets About This Document
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing ExistingCabinets.
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.C)to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.B)to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A(Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A (withbreathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).
ConventionsSymbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personalinjury.
Calls attention to important information, best practices andtips.NOTE is used to address information not related to personalinjury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
General Conventions
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets About This Document
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets About This Document
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets About This Document
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.............1
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)...................................................42.1 Installation Preparations.................................................................................................................................................62.1.1 Pre-upgrade Check......................................................................................................................................................62.1.2 Upgrade Preparations..................................................................................................................................................62.1.3 Documents...................................................................................................................................................................62.1.4 Tools and Instruments.................................................................................................................................................72.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel............................................................................................................82.2 Application Scenarios.....................................................................................................................................................82.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs Only.........................................................................82.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs and RRUs..............................................................202.3 Unpacking Check.........................................................................................................................................................292.4 Restructuring Process...................................................................................................................................................302.5 Powering Off the Base Station.....................................................................................................................................322.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet.............................................................................................................................352.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.......................................................................352.6.2 Replacing the Front Door..........................................................................................................................................462.6.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly.....................................................................................................................................512.6.4 Replacing the ELU....................................................................................................................................................542.6.5 Replacing the Power System.....................................................................................................................................572.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee........................................................................................................642.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.................................................................................................................................662.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.............................................................................................................................722.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.........................................................722.7.2 Replacing the Front Door..........................................................................................................................................832.7.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly.....................................................................................................................................882.7.4 Replacing the ELU....................................................................................................................................................902.7.5 Replacing the DCDU.................................................................................................................................................932.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.................................................................................................................................972.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................1002.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................100
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets Contents
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
2.8.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................1062.8.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................1082.8.4 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................1112.8.5 Replacing the RFU..................................................................................................................................................1152.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box..............................................................................................................1182.8.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................1202.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet..................................................................................................1252.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet...............................1252.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................1302.9.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................1352.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................1382.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables...................................................................................................1422.10.1 Installing the BBU Case........................................................................................................................................1422.10.2 Installing the BBU Components............................................................................................................................1472.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B....................................................................................................................1502.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................1542.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.C)...............................................................................1542.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................1672.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................1922.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................1992.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................2042.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................2252.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................2342.11.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................2392.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable......................................................................................................................2412.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable...............................................................................................2432.12 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................2452.13 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................2492.14 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................2602.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................2602.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets......................................................................................................................................2602.14.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................263
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)................................................2663.1 Installation Preparations.............................................................................................................................................2683.1.1 Pre-upgrade Check..................................................................................................................................................2683.1.2 Upgrade Preparations..............................................................................................................................................2683.1.3 Documents...............................................................................................................................................................2683.1.4 Tools and Instruments.............................................................................................................................................2693.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel........................................................................................................2703.2 Application Scenarios.................................................................................................................................................2703.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs Only.....................................................................270
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets Contents
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
3.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs and RRUs............................................................2823.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................2913.4 Restructuring Process.................................................................................................................................................2923.5 Powering Off the Base Station...................................................................................................................................2943.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................2973.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.....................................................................2973.6.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................3083.6.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................3133.6.4 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................3163.6.5 Replacing the Power System...................................................................................................................................3193.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee......................................................................................................3263.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................3283.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................3343.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.......................................................3343.7.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................3453.7.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................3503.7.4 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................3523.7.5 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................3553.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................3593.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................3623.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................3623.8.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................3683.8.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................3703.8.4 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................3733.8.5 Replacing the RFU..................................................................................................................................................3773.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box..............................................................................................................3803.8.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................3823.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet..................................................................................................3873.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet...............................3873.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................3923.9.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................3973.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................4003.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables...................................................................................................4043.10.1 Installing the BBU Case........................................................................................................................................4043.10.2 Installing the BBU Components............................................................................................................................4093.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B....................................................................................................................4123.10.4 Installing the Air Baffle.........................................................................................................................................4163.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................4173.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.B)...............................................................................4173.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................4313.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................456
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets Contents
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
3.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................4633.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................4683.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................4893.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................4983.11.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................5033.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable......................................................................................................................5053.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable...............................................................................................5073.12 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................5093.13 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................5133.14 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................5243.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................5243.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets......................................................................................................................................5243.14.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................527
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).............................................5304.1 Introduction to Upgrade..............................................................................................................................................5324.1.1 Restrcutured Cabinets Interior.................................................................................................................................5324.1.2 Restructuring Process..............................................................................................................................................5404.2 Installation Preparations.............................................................................................................................................5424.2.1 Pre-upgrade Check..................................................................................................................................................5424.2.2 Upgrade Preparations..............................................................................................................................................5434.2.3 Document Preparations............................................................................................................................................5434.2.4 Tools and Instruments.............................................................................................................................................5434.2.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel........................................................................................................5444.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................5454.4 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................5464.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.....................................................................5464.4.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................5514.4.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................5544.4.4 Installing an ELU.....................................................................................................................................................5564.4.5 Replacing the Power System...................................................................................................................................5574.4.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee......................................................................................................5634.4.7 (Optional) Installing the Filler Module...................................................................................................................5644.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................5644.5 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................5694.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H.....................................................................5694.5.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................5764.5.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................5794.5.4 Installing an ELU.....................................................................................................................................................5814.5.5 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................5824.5.6 (Optional) Installing the Filler Module...................................................................................................................5844.5.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................585
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets Contents
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
4.6 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................5884.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................5894.6.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................5924.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel...................................................................................................5934.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02.........................................................................................................................................5954.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFU.................................................................................................................................5974.6.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................6014.7 Restructuring the IBBS200T......................................................................................................................................6064.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200T...................................................................6064.7.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................6104.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................6144.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable.................................................................................................6174.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables.....................................................................................................6204.9.1 Installing a BBU Case.............................................................................................................................................6204.9.2 Installing the BBU Components..............................................................................................................................6244.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06......................................................................................................................6274.9.4 Installing the SLPU.................................................................................................................................................6364.10 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................6384.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two Cabinets...........................................................................................................6384.10.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................6524.10.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................6694.10.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................6774.10.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................6844.10.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................6964.10.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................7054.10.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................7094.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables........................................................................................................7124.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables...................................................................................................7134.11 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................7154.12 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................7204.13 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................7304.13.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................7304.13.2 Sealing Cable Holes...............................................................................................................................................7304.13.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................733
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).................7365.1 Introduction to Upgrade..............................................................................................................................................7385.1.1 Restructured Cabinets Interior.................................................................................................................................7385.1.2 Restructuring Process..............................................................................................................................................7465.2 Installation Preparations.............................................................................................................................................7485.2.1 Pre-upgrade Check..................................................................................................................................................7485.2.2 Upgrade Preparations..............................................................................................................................................749
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets Contents
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
5.2.3 Document Preparations............................................................................................................................................7495.2.4 Tools and Instruments.............................................................................................................................................7495.2.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel........................................................................................................7505.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................7515.4 Restructuring the APM30...........................................................................................................................................7525.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30........................................................................7525.4.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................7585.4.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................7615.4.4 Removing the APMI................................................................................................................................................7635.4.5 Replacing the AFMU...............................................................................................................................................7645.4.6 Replacing the Power System...................................................................................................................................7665.4.7 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee......................................................................................................7735.4.8 Installing the Filler Module and Filler Panel...........................................................................................................7745.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................7745.5 Restructuring the TMC...............................................................................................................................................7805.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC............................................................................7815.5.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................7855.5.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................7885.5.4 Removing the APMI................................................................................................................................................7905.5.5 Replacing the AFMU...............................................................................................................................................7915.5.6 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................7945.5.7 Installing the Filler Module and Filler Panel...........................................................................................................7965.5.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................7965.6 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................8025.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................8025.6.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................8065.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel...................................................................................................8075.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02.........................................................................................................................................8095.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFU.................................................................................................................................8115.6.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................8155.7 Restructuring the BBC................................................................................................................................................8205.7.1 Information You Need to Known Before Reconstructing the BBC........................................................................8205.7.2 Replacing the Wiring Terminals and Circuit Breakers............................................................................................8255.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................8285.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable.................................................................................................8315.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables.....................................................................................................8345.9.1 Installing a BBU Case.............................................................................................................................................8345.9.2 Installing the BBU Components..............................................................................................................................8375.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06......................................................................................................................8405.9.4 (Optional) Installing the Filler Module...................................................................................................................8505.9.5 Installing the SLPU.................................................................................................................................................851
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets Contents
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
5.10 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................8535.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two Cabinets...........................................................................................................8535.10.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................8625.10.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................8785.10.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................8865.10.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................8935.10.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................9015.10.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................9075.10.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................9115.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables........................................................................................................9145.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables...................................................................................................9155.11 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................9175.12 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................9225.13 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................9325.13.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................9325.13.2 Sealing Cable Holes...............................................................................................................................................9325.13.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................935
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets Contents
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xii
1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guidefor Enhancing Existing Cabinets
This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing ExistingCabinets.
06 (2014-04-30)This is the sixth commercial release.
Compared with 05 (2013-11-08), no topic is added or deleted from this issue.
Compared with 05 (2013-11-08), this issue incorporates the following change:
Topic Change Description
2.6.2 Replacing the Front Door Add the step of replacing an N-shaped fixing bracketof the door support lever.
05 (2013-11-08)This is the fifth commercial release.
Compared with 04 (2013-07-30), no topic is added or deleted from this issue.
Compared with 04 (2013-07-30), this issue incorporates the following change:
Topic Change Description
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A(Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)'schild topics.
The filler module in APM30H(Ver.D_B) andTMC11H(Ver.D_B) is replaced with air baffle.
04 (2013-07-30)This is the fourth commercial release.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for EnhancingExisting Cabinets
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
Compared with 03 (2013-04-28), this issue is added with the following topics:
l 2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C) and it's child topics.
Compared with 03 (2013-04-28), no information is modified or deleted.
03 (2013-04-28)
This is the third commercial release.
Compared with 02 (2012-12-30), no topic is added or deleted.
Compared with 02 (2012-12-30), this issue incorporates the following change:
Topic Change Description
The whole document Changed the document name from BTS3900AHardware Upgrade Guide to BTS3900A InstallationGuide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
l 2.11.7 (Optional) InstallingInter-BBU Signal Cables
l 4.10.7 (Optional) InstallingInter-BBU Signal Cables
l 5.10.7 (Optional) InstallingInter-BBU Signal Cables
Modified the steps of binding and routing the inter-BBU signal cable.
2.6.2 Replacing the Front Door Changed the steps of removing the front door.
02 (2012-12-30)
This is the second commercial release.
Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), this issue is added with the following topics:
l 4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) and it's child topics.
l 5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1) and it'schild topics.
Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), no information is modified.
Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), no information is deleted.
01 (2012-11-08)
This is the first commercial release.
Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), no topic is added.
Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for EnhancingExisting Cabinets
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
Topic Change Description
The whole document Renamed the BTS3900A (Ver.D2_B) BTS3900A(Ver.D_B).
2.10.1 Installing the BBU Case Added the attentions of installing BBU power cableson a running base station.
l (Optional) Installing the RRUPower Cable
l (Optional) Installing the RRUPower Cable
Added the attentions of installing RRU power cableson a running base station.
Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), this issue deletes the following topics:l "Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.D1) to BTS3900A (Ver.D2)" and it's child topics.
Draft B (2012-10-10)This is a draft.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), this issue is added with the following topics:l 3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B) and it's child topics.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), no information is changed.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), no information is deleted.
Draft A (2012-09-15)This is a draft.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for EnhancingExisting Cabinets
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_C)
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.C)to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).
2.1 Installation PreparationsThis chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It alsospecifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
2.2 Application ScenariosMultiple cabinets can be configured and installed for the BTS3900A to meet the requirementsfor different RF unit configurations, backup power capacity, and space for customer equipment.A BTS3900A can be configured with only RFUs or both RFUs and RRUs depending on differentscenarios.
2.3 Unpacking CheckUnpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
2.4 Restructuring ProcessThis section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade of BTS3900A(Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C).
2.5 Powering Off the Base StationThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for powering off the base station.
2.6 Restructuring the APM30H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30Hcabinet to be restructured.
2.7 Restructuring the TMC11H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11Hcabinet to be restructured.
2.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFCcabinet to be restructured.
2.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200Dor IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.
2.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their CablesThis chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting themodules to external devices.
2.11 Installing Cables Between Two CabinetsThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade.
2.12 Installation ChecklistAfter the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installationenvironment, and cable-related items.
2.13 Powering On a Base StationThis section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supplyto the components in a cabinet.
2.14 Subsequent OperationsThis section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgradedand checked.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
2.1 Installation PreparationsThis chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It alsospecifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
2.1.1 Pre-upgrade CheckThis section describes the operations that must be taken before the hardware upgrade.
You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:l Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properly
before the upgrade.l Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.
Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need tocontact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.
2.1.2 Upgrade PreparationsThis section describes the preparations needed for the upgrade.
Table 2-1 lists the requirements on the current software version of the base station before theupgrade.
Table 2-1 Versions before the upgrade
Product Name Version before Upgrade
SingleRAN7.0 series V100R007C00SPC240 and later
SingleRAN6.0 series V100R004C00SPC190 and later
2.1.3 DocumentsThis section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.
l Before the installation, familiarize yourself with related information in the followingdocuments:
– 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description– 3900 Series Base Station Cables– BBU3900 Hardware Description– RFU Hardware Description– BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Installation Guide– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide– BTS3900A (Ver.B) Site Maintenance Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Site Maintenance
Guide– Safety Precautions
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
l During the installation, refer to the following document:
– Installation Reference
2.1.4 Tools and InstrumentsThis section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation.
Marker Phillips screwdriver (M3 toM6)
Flat-head screwdriver (M3 toM6)
Diagonal pliers
32 mm (1.26 in.)combination wrench
Socket wrench Torque wrench
Power cable crimping tool RJ45 crimping tool Cable cutter
Rubber mallet Soldering iron Wire stripper
Hammer drill (Φ16) Heat gun Level
Multimeter Measuring tape Vacuum cleaner
ESD wrist strap ESD gloves Torque screwdriver
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
Gloves - -
2.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite PersonnelOnsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsitepersonnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.
Before the installation, pay attention to the following items:
l The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with theproper installation and operation methods.
l The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installationenvironment. Generally, only three to five onsite personnel are necessary.
2.2 Application ScenariosMultiple cabinets can be configured and installed for the BTS3900A to meet the requirementsfor different RF unit configurations, backup power capacity, and space for customer equipment.A BTS3900A can be configured with only RFUs or both RFUs and RRUs depending on differentscenarios.
2.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUsOnly
When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for theBTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and -48 V DC power supplyscenario.
Cabinet Configuration Principlesl A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.
l The maximum cabinet configuration of a BTS3900A site is 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. There must be a clearance of 40 mm (1.57 in.) betweenthe cabinets installed side by side.
l The RFC can only be stacked below the APM30H or TMC11H.
l The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, orTMC11H. The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can only be stacked below the TMC11H.
l When a site is configured with over six RFUs and only one IBBS200D or IBBS200T, theIBBS200D or IBBS200T must be configured with at least two groups of 92 Ah storagebatteries to avoid overcurrent of a single battery group during discharging.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
l If an auxiliary cabinet such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H is required duringinitial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basiccabinet. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinetis positioned on the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on thebattery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.
l During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in thefuture. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain inthe original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In aspecial scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets.
l When a BTS3900A is configured with two BBUs and both BBUs are connected to RFUs,the BBUs must be interconnected.
l A BTS3900A configured with one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU bydefault. It can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumptionof all BBU boards cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to a new or expansionscenario.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-mode Base StationA single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, and the BBU is installedin the APM30H or TMC11H. When seven to twelve RFUs need to be configured, two RFCs arerequired.
Table 2-2 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station withdifferent backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or220 V AC
No backuppower
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1TMC11H
≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1TMC11H
Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided byone batterycabinet
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1TMC11H
≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H
Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided bytwo batterycabinets
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H
≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H
-48 V DC - ≤ 9 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs 1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 20 U ≤ 6 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipmentand carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-1.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
Figure 2-1 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is nobackup power
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 2-1 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1 TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the originalconfiguration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H.
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-2 andFigure 2-3.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
Figure 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by an IBBS200D/IBBS200T
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
Figure 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by an IBBS700D/IBBS700T
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-4.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
Figure 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by two battery cabinets
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 2-4 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H is the initialconfiguration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode basestation in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurationsare shown in Figure 2-5.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
Figure 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 2-5 are two modes of configuring 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs. (A) indicates that 2TMC11Hs+2 RFCs is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the originalconfiguration of 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC.
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base StationTwo BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:l Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30H
and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the
BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
Table 2-3 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different backuppower capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or220 V AC
No backuppower
≤ 3 U ≤ 12 RFUs(1)
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1TMC11H
Backuppowerprovided bya singlebatterycabinet
≤ 3 U l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤ 14 U l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1TMC11H
Backuppowerprovided bytwo batterycabinets
≤ 3 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H
-48 V DC - ≤ 7 U 1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 18 U 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
NOTE
(1) A maximum of 12 RFUs are supported by a triple-mode base station. If there are more than 12 RFUs,an extra base station is required.
In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment areshown in Figure 2-6.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
Figure 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is notrequired
When a single cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station withdifferent space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-7.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby a single battery cabinet
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-8.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
Figure 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby two battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station areshown in Figure 2-9.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
Figure 2-9 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
2.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUsand RRUs
When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for theBTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and –48 V DC power supplyscenario.
Cabinet Configuration Principlesl A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and nine RRUs.
Therefore, more than one BTS3900As must be deployed if more than six RFUs and nineRRUs are required.
l When a BTS3900A is configured with both RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is needed tobe installed in RFC, the maximum configuration of RRUs is six RRUs of 2*60 W and threeRRUs of 2*40 W.
l When both the RFU and RRU support the GSM mode, the BBU3900 must be configuredwith a GTMUb. In addition, the RFUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to theGTMUb, and the RRUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the UBRI.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base StationA single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in theAPM30H or TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
Table 2-4 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station withdifferent backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or220 V AC
No backuppower
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs+9RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 16 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1TMC11H
Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided byone storagebatterycabinet
≤ 5 U l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤ 16 U l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1TMC11H
Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided bytwo storagebatterycabinets
≤ 5 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H
-48 V DC - ≤ 9 U 1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 20 U 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipmentand carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-10.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
Figure 2-10 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there isno backup power
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by one battery cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by two battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-modebase station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrierconfigurations are shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DCscenario
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30Hand transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, theBBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
Table 2-5 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different backuppower capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or220 V AC
No backuppower
≤ 3 U ≤ 6 RFUs+9RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1TMC11H
Backuppowerprovided bya singlebatterycabinet
≤ 3 U l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤ 14 U l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1TMC11H
Backuppowerprovided bytwo batterycabinets
≤ 3 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+4IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+4IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H
-48 V DC - ≤ 7 U 1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 18 U 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment andcarrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-14.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
Figure 2-14 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is notrequired
When a single battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure2-15 and Figure 2-16.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
Figure 2-15 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby one IBBS200D/IBBS200T
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
Figure 2-16 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby one IBBS700D/IBBS700T
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure2-17.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
Figure 2-17 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby two battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station inthe case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shownin Figure 2-18.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
Figure 2-18 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
2.3 Unpacking CheckUnpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
ContextNOTE
When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:
l Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.
l Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweat-soaked gloves, or dirty gloves.
NOTICEl Powered on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
If... Then...
The total number tallies with the packinglist
Go to Step 2.
The total number does not tally with thepacking list
Find out the cause and report any missingarticles to the local Huawei office.
Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case.
If... Then...
The exterior of the packing case is intact Go to Step 3.
The outer packing is severely damaged orsoaked
Find out the cause and report any missingarticles to the local Huawei office.
The mark on the shockwatch label is red. Do not open the case. Claim compensationfrom the transportation company.
Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list.
If... Then...
Types and quantity of the article tally withthose on the packing list
Sign the Packing List with the customer.
There are any goods missing, incorrectlydelivered, or damaged
Send feedback to the local Huawei office.
CAUTIONTo protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep theunpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment,packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file thephotos.
----End
2.4 Restructuring ProcessThis section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade of BTS3900A(Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
Restructuring Process in AC Scenarios
Figure 2-19 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied withAC power.
Figure 2-19 Restructuring process
Restructuring Process in DC Scenarios
Figure 2-20 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied withDC power.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
Figure 2-20 Restructuring process
2.5 Powering Off the Base StationThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for powering off the base station.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
Context
From MBTS V100R009C00 onwards, the name of the element management system (EMS) ischanged from M2000 to U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If a replaced RFU is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking for TXchannels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
NOTE
l If a replaced RFU is faulty, its maximum output power locking for TX channels does not need to bedisabled.
l If the maximum output power has not been set for the RFU, the maximum output power for TX channelsis the maximum transmit power of the hardware.
1. Check the maximum output power has been locked for TX channels of the new RFU, andrecord the result.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinetnumber, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU. Run theDSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number,and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum output power forTX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has been locked.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query thecabinet number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU.Run the DSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number,slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximumoutput power for TX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power hasbeen locked.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site MaintenanceTerminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-clickLock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Query Config tab. On the displayed tab page,select the target RFU.
If... Then...
The maximum output power has beenlocked for TX channels
Go to Step 1.2.
The maximum output power has not beenlocked for TX channels
Go to 2.
NOTE
The maximum output power of some RFUs cannot be queried by running the DSP TXBRANCHcommand. If the value of the maximum output power invalid in the query result for an RFU, the RFUdoes not support the maximum output power locking.
2. Set the maximum output power of the RFU to 0 to disable the maximum output powerlocking.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable themaximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to reset
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum outputpower of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disablethe maximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command toreset the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximumoutput power of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site MaintenanceTerminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-clickLock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Config tab. On the displayed tab page, setthe parameters to disable the maximum output power locking for TX channels, and clickSet. Reset the RFU to make the configuration take effect.
NOTE
If there is more than one RFU, reset the TX channels of each RFU separately. If RFUs are cascaded,perform the operations from the lowest-level RFU to the highest-level RFU to minimize the impacton services carried by the RFUs.
Step 2 Ask the M2000/U2000 administrator to block the RFU.
l On the NodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the eNodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the BSC, run the SET GTRXADMSTAT command and set ADMSTAT to LOCK toblock all carriers of the RFU.
NOTE
l Block the RFU before replacing the module or separately replacing the RF jumper.
l If RFU to be replaced works in multiple modes, block the RFU in all modes it supports.
l An RFU working in GSM mode cannot be blocked, and therefore you can block only the carriers ofthe RFU in GSM mode.
Step 3 Verify that TX channels of the RFU are disabled. In this case, the ACT indicator on the RFUpanel is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).
Step 4 Power off the RFC.
If... Then...
RFC(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 in the RFC.
RFC(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11A in the RFC.
Step 5 Power off the TMC.
If... Then...
TMC11H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C in theTMC.
TMC11H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C in theTMC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
Step 6 Switch off all circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200T or IBBS200D.
Step 7 Power off the APM30H.
If... Then...
APM30H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPS in the APM30H.
APM30H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPU in the APM30H.
Step 8 Turn off the switch on the external power equipment for the BTS3900A.
----End
2.6 Restructuring the APM30H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30Hcabinet to be restructured.
2.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theAPM30H
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the APM30H.
Component Changes in the APM30HFigure 2-21 shows component changes in the APM30H.
Figure 2-21 Components in the APM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 FAN 02A To bereplaced
The FAN 02A needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D toenhance the heat dissipation capability.
2 SLPU Reused -
3 ELU To bereplaced
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.
4 PSU (AC/DC)
To bereplaced
The PSUs need to be replaced to enhance the powerdistribution capability.
5 Door statussensor
Reused -
6 EPS 01subrack
To bereplaced
The EPS 01 subrack needs to be replaced with anEPU05A to meet higher requirements for the powersystem.
7 BBU3900 Reused -
8 GATM To beremoved
-
9 EMUA Reused -
10 AC heater Reused -
11 SOU Reused -
12 Front door To bereplaced
The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heatdissipation capacity of the cabinet.
13 Junctionbox
Reused -
14 PMU To bereplaced
The PMU needs to be replaced to enhance the powerdistribution capability.
15 FAN 02B To bereplaced
The FAN 02B needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D toenhance the heat dissipation capability.
16 EPU03Asubrack
To bereplaced
The EPS 03A subrack needs to be replaced with anEPU05A to meet higher requirements for the powersystem.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
No. Component
Change Type
Description
17 Front door To bereplaced
The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heatdissipation capacity of the cabinet.
Cable Changes in the APM30HFigure 2-22 lists the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the APM30H.
Figure 2-22 Equipotential cable and power cables in the APM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
No.
Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P1
Inputpowercable forajunctionbox
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto the L1and N1terminalsin the ACOUTPUTterminalbox of theEPS.
l The otherendconnectsto the Land Nterminalsin thejunctionbox.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to theL1 and N1terminals in theAC OUTPUTterminal box ofthe EPU.
l The other endconnects to theL and Nterminals in thejunction box.
Reused
P2
Powercable forthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnectsto theLOAD0port onthe EPS.
l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton the fanassemblyin theAPM30H.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD5 port onthe EPU.
l The other endconnects to thePWR port onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.
Tobereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
No.
Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P3
BBUpowercable
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnectsto theLOAD1port onthe EPS.
l The otherendconnectsto the-48V porton theUPEU inthe BBU.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theBBU_0 orBBU_1 port onthe EPU.
l The other endconnects to the-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU.
Tobereplaced
P4
EMUApowercable
l Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype)
l The otherend iscord endterminals.
l One endconnectsto theLOAD7port onthe EPS.
l The otherendconnectsto thePWR1port ontheEMUA.
l Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype)
l The otherend iscord endterminals.
l One endconnects to theLOAD4 port onthe EPU.
l The other endconnects to thePWR1 port onthe EMUA.
Theycanbeusedcontinuouslyandtheirconnectorsneedto bereplacedonsite.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
No.
Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P5
SOUpowercable
l One endis OTterminals.
l The otherend is aC13connector.
l One endconnectsto the M4groundscrew,L1, andN1terminals(ACOUTPUT) on theEPS.
l The otherendconnectsto the ACINPUTport onthe SOU.
l One endis OTterminals.
l The otherend is aC13connector.
l One endconnects to theM4 groundscrew, L1, andN1 terminals(AC OUTPUT)on the EPU.
l The other endconnects to theAC INPUT porton the SOU.
Reused
P6
Heaterpowercable
l One endis OTterminals.
l The otherend is aC13connector.
l One endconnectsto the ACoutputwiringterminalin the ACjunctionbox andthegroundbar in theAPM30Hcabinet
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerinput porton theheater.
l One endis OTterminals.
l The otherend is aC13connector.
l One endconnects to theAC outputwiring terminalin the ACjunction boxand the groundbar in theAPM30Hcabinet
l The other endconnects to thepower inputport on theheater.
Reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
No.
Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P7
Equipotentialcable forthe frontdoor
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.
l The otherendconnectsto thegroundpoint onthebottomleft of thecabinet.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to theground point onthe front door.
l The other endconnects to theground point onthe bottom leftof the cabinet.
Tobereplaced
Figure 2-23 shows the signal cable changes in the APM30H.
Figure 2-23 Signal cable changes in the APM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
No. Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S1 Environment monitoringsignal cable
Both endsare DB50maleconnectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOMport onthePMU.
l Theotherendconnectsto thePMU_DB50 porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.
Both endsare DB50maleconnectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOMport onthePMU.
l Theother endconnectsto thePMU_DB50 porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.
Removed
S2 Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatussensor in theAPM30H
l One endis a 2-pinconnector.
l Theotherend isbarewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.
l Theotherendconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
l One endis a 2-pinconnector.
l Theotherend isbarewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H.
l Theother endconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
Reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
No. Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S3 Monitoringsignaltransfercable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN porton thePMU.
l Theotherendconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN port onthePMU.
l Theother endconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.
To bereplaced
S4 CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.
l Theotherendconnectsto theMON0port ontheUPEU intheBBU.
- - To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
No. Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S5 ELU signalcable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELU.
l Theotherendconnectsto theELUport onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELU.
l Theother endconnectsto theELU porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.
Reused
S6 Monitoringsignal cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor
Both endsare 4-pinconnectors.
l One endconnectsto thetransferbox inthe frontdoor oftheAPM30H.
l Theotherendconnectsto theFAN_EXT porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.
Both endsare 4-pinconnectors.
l One endconnectsto thetransferbox inthe frontdoor oftheAPM30H.
l Theother endconnectsto theFAN_EXT porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.
To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
No. Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S7 EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
l One endis a DB9maleconnector.
l Theother isan RJ45connector.
l One endconnectsto theRS-485port ontheEMUA.
l Theotherendconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thePMU.
l One endis a DB9maleconnector.
l Theother isan RJ45connector.
l One endconnectsto theRS-485port ontheEMUA.
l Theother endconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thePMU.
Reused
S8 Surgeprotectiontransfercable for themonitoringsignals
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theOUT0port ontheUSLP2in theSLPU.
l Theotherendconnectsto theEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEU intheBBU.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theOUT0port ontheUSLP2in theSLPU.
l Theother endconnectsto theEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEU inthe BBU.
Reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
No. Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S9 GPS clocksignal cable
l One endis anSMAmaleconnector.
l Theotherend is anN-typefemaleconnector.
l One endconnectsto theGPS porton theUSCU intheBBU.
l Theotherendconnectsto a GPSsurgeprotector.
l One endis anSMAmaleconnector.
l Theotherend is anN-typefemaleconnector.
l One endconnectsto theGPS porton theUSCU inthe BBU.
l Theother endconnectsto a GPSsurgeprotector.
Reused
S10 CMUE-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
- - Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN port onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H.
l Theother endconnectsto theMON0port ontheUPEU inthe BBU.
To bereplaced
2.6.2 Replacing the Front DoorThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door. The front doorsof the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures for removingthe front doors of the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Turn off the fan in the front door.
If... Then...
AnAPM30H(Ver.B) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
ATMC11H(Ver.B) isused
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker controlspower supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
AnAPM30H(Ver.C) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
ATMC11H(Ver.C) isused
Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breaker controlspower supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
Step 3 Remove the front door to be replaced.1. Remove the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door from the transfer box, as
shown in Figure 2-24.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
Figure 2-24 Removing the connector from the monitoring signal cable for the fan in thefront door
2. Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown
in Figure 2-25.
Figure 2-25 Removing the equipotential cable for the door of the cabinet
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two hinges from the front door, and remove thefront door, as shown in Figure 2-26.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
Figure 2-26 Removing the front door
Step 4 Install the new front door.
NOTE
l When installing the front door, use new removable pins.
l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the front door before delivery.
1. Install the new front door and insert the removable pins.2. Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on an inner wall.
Step 5 Replace an N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever.1. Remove the two M4 screws on the left N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever
and pull out the door support lever from the right N-shaped fixing bracket. Then move theleft N-shaped fixing bracket to the right part of the door support lever and remove the leftN-shaped fixing bracket, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
Figure 2-27 Remove an N-shaped fixing bracket
2. Take out and slide a new N-shaped fixing bracket onto the right part of the door supportlever and move it to the left part of the lever. Use two M4 screws to secure the new N-shaped fixing bracket, with a torque of 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), and place the right part ofthe door support lever in its original position, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-28 Install a new N-shaped fixing bracket
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the number onthe barcode label starts from 212102, as shown by 1 in Figure 2-29.
If... Then...
There is a barcode label in the indicatedposition
Proceed with the next step.
There is no barcode label in the indicatedposition
Record the barcode (shown by 2 in Figure2-29) on the front door, and stick a barcodelabel carrying the same barcode to theindicated position.
Figure 2-29 Positions of the barcode labels
(1) Position of the barcode label on an inner wall of thecabinet
(2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of thecabinet
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.6.3 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The fanassemblies in the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the proceduresfor removing the fan assemblies from the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Optional: Remove the power cable for the fan assembly to power off the fan assembly. Skipthis step if this cable has been disconnected during the replacement of the front door.
If... Then...
An APM30H(Ver.B) is used
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
A TMC11H(Ver.B) is used
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breakercontrols power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
An APM30H(Ver.C) is used
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
A TMC11H(Ver.C) is used
Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breakercontrols power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fan
assembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 2-30.
NOTE
The procedure for removing a fan assembly from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H(Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) are the same. Figure 2-30 uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
Figure 2-30 Removing the fan assembly
DANGERWhen removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fanassembly.
Step 4 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position and tightenthe four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown inFigure 2-31. The recommended torque is 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
NOTE
When installing the new fan assembly, ensure that the air exhaust vent of the fan assembly is on the top.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
Figure 2-31 Installing the new fan assembly
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.6.4 Replacing the ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit(ELU).
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
The ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32 Position of the ELU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1. Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.
2. Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,as shown in Figure 2-33.
Figure 2-33 Opening the housing of the ELU
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown inFigure 2-34.
Figure 2-34 Removing the ELU
Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new ELU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
NOTE
l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure2-35. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 2-6.
Figure 2-35 Position of the barcode label
(1) Barcode label on the ELU (2) BOM code
Table 2-6 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed basestation
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macrobase station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmissionequipment
l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 anduses the -48 V DC power supply
l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395
RFC (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113818l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113819l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113820l Ver.C: 02113397
1. Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. Therecommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.
3. Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic labelinformation of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplatein the upgrade package.l If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.l If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.6.5 Replacing the Power SystemThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power system.
PrerequisitesBefore replacing the power system, ensure that the entire base station has been powered off.
Contextl Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.l The procedure for replacing the power system of the APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H
(Ver.C) is the same. The figures in this section uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.l Figure 2-36 shows component changes in the AC/DC power system.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
Figure 2-36 Component changes in the AC/DC power system
(1) PMU 01B (2) PSU(EPW30-48A)
(3) EPS 01subrack
(4) PSU(PSU4850A)
(5) EPU03Asubrack
(6) PMU 11A (7) PSU(R4850G2)
(8) EPU05Asubrack
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove cables from the EPS or EPU.1. Disconnect the ground cable for the EPS or EPU from the ground bar on the inner left wall
of the cabinet.2. Loosen the two captive screws on the metal protective cover on the left side of the EPS or
EPU, and then remove the protective cover.3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the plastic protective covers from the AC input and
output wiring terminal blocks on the left side of the EPS or EPU.4. Record the connections of the AC input power cable and AC output power cable, and then
remove the cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
5. Reinstall the two plastic protective covers, and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M4screws to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
6. Record the connections of the DC power cables on the EPS or EPU panel, and then removethe DC power cables.
7. Record the connections of the DC power cables that are connected to the power cables onthe right side of the EPS or EPU, and then remove the DC power cables.
Step 3 Remove the PMU and all PSUs from the EPS or EPU.
NOTICEThe original EPS or EPU contains one PMU and three PSUs and therefore is heavy. You areadvised to remove the PMU and PSUs before removing the EPS or EPU.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of eachPSU.
2. Pull the handle slightly to slide each PSU out of the subrack and remove each PSU fromthe subrack, as shown in Figure 2-37.
Figure 2-37 Removing the PSUs
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of the
PMU.4. Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU out of the subrack and remove the PMU from the
subrack, as shown in Figure 2-38.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
Figure 2-38 Removing the PMU
Step 4 Remove the plate for the power series 120 connector from the right side of the EPS or EPU, asshown in Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-39 Removing the plate for the power series 120 connector
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the remaining seven screws from both sides of the EPS orEPU, and remove the EPS or EPU from the cabinet along the guide rails slowly, as shown inFigure 2-40.
NOTICEThe EPS or EPU subrack is heavy. Therefore, you need to hold the subrack with one hand andsupport the bottom with the other hand to slowly pull the subrack out of the cabinet. This preventsthe subrack from falling and ensures personal safety.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
Figure 2-40 Removing the EPS or EPU
Step 6 Remove the metal support from the left side of the EPS or EPU.
1. Loosen the two captive screws on the cover plate of the metal support.
2. Remove the two screws from the metal support and remove the metal support, as shown inFigure 2-41.
Figure 2-41 Removing the metal support
Step 7 Place the removed EPS or EPU subrack, PSUs, PMU, and metal support into an ESD box orbag.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
Step 8 Optional: Install the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall ofthe cabinet. Only an APM30H (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an APM30H(Ver.C) is used, skip this step.
CAUTIONIf a guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature willincrease by 2°C to 3°C at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will reportovertemperature alarms if the environmental temperature is high.
1. Remove the guide rails on the left side of the position where the EPS or EPU is originallyinstalled, as shown by a in Figure 2-42. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve the screws.
2. Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mountingbar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton paddingcontacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in Figure 2-42.
3. Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 8.1 to secure the guide rails and tighten the screwsto 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown by c in Step 8.1.
Figure 2-42 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner leftside of the cabinet
Step 9 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet. If there areother modules installed at the bottom of the cabinet, skip this step.1. Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton
padding for about 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in Figure 2-43.2. Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completely
strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of thecabinet, as shown by b and c in Figure 2-43.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
Figure 2-43 Installing windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet
Step 10 Install the windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet, as shown in Figure2-44.
CAUTIONIf a guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature willincrease by 2°C to 3°C at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will reportovertemperature alarms if the environmental temperature is high.
1. Remove the M6 screw at the bottom of the right mounting bar.2. Place the windproof cotton padding next to the inner right wall of the cabinet, use two M6
screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
Figure 2-44 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet
Step 11 Install a new EPU.1. Place the new EPU on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the power system
into the cabinet.2. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven panel screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.) and one
hex screw to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.) so that the EPU subrack is secured.3. Use M6x12 screws to secure the ground cable for the new EPU to the ground bar. The
recommended torque is 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
----End
2.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-TeeThis section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.
Prerequisitesl The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. When
DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.l If the BTS3900A has two GATMs, remove the upper one before the lower one.
Procedure
Step 1 Power off the GATM. The following table lists the terminals that can be used by a GATM powercable, which may differ from the actually used terminal.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
If... Then...
AnAPM30H(Ver.B) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATMpower cable from the LOAD4 port on the EPS.
If anAPM30H(Ver.C) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATMpower cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPU.
Step 2 Remove the GATM.
1. Remove the monitoring signal cable from the GATM panel.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the ground cable for the GATM. Then use a wrenchto remove the RF jumper from the GATM.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, remove theGATM, and secure the removed screws on their original positions on the mounting bar, asshown in Figure 2-45.
NOTE
The method of removing the GATM from an APM30H (Ver.B) is the same as the method of removing itfrom an APM30H (Ver.C). The following figure uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.
Figure 2-45 Removing the GATM
Step 3 Remove the Bias-Tee.
1. Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable and PGND cable.
2. Remove the Bias-Tee.
3. Use a wrench to connect the jumper and the feeder to 25 N·m to 35 N·m (221.25 lbf·in. to309.75 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 2-46.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
Figure 2-46 Connecting the jumper and the feeder
(1) Feeder (2) Jumper
----End
2.6.7 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30H cabinetafter you restructure the APM30H.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 2-7 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 2-7 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe APM30H
EPC4connector
LOAD2 porton the EPU
3V3connector
PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe APM30H
A 1.1 m (3.61ft) cable isnewlydelivered.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
Input powercable for thejunction box
OT terminals(M4)
M4 groundscrew aswell as L1,and N1terminalsnear the ACOUTPUTsilkscreen onthe EPU intheAPM30H
OT terminals L and Nterminals inthe junctionbox
To be reused
EMUApower cable
EPC4connector
LOAD5 porton the EPU
Cord endterminals
PWR1 porton theEMUA
To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.
BBU powercable
EPC4connector
LOAD0 orLOAD6 porton the EPU
3V3connector
-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU
A cable isnewlydelivered.
Table 2-8 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 2-8 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
InstallationPosition
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensorin theAPM30H
2-pinconnector
GATE porton the PMU
Bare wire Door statussensor
To be reused
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU RJ45connector
ELU port inthe CMUEA
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor
Interconnection terminal
Power cablefor the fan inthe front doorof theAPM30H
4-pinconnector
FAN_EXTport on thefan assembly
A cable isnewlydelivered.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
Cable Connectorat One End
InstallationPosition
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA
RJ45connector
MON1 porton the UPEUin the BBU
A 1.1 m(3.61 ft)cable isnewlydelivered.
Monitoringsignaltransfercable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thePMU
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe fanassembly ofthe APM30H
A 1.1 m(3.61 ft)cable isnewlydelivered.
EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
DB9 maleconnector
RS-485 porton theEMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on thePMU
To be reused
Procedurel Remove related cables in the cabinet.
Remove the related cables listed in Table 2-7 and Table 2-8. If the cables have beenremoved during the module replacement, skip this step.
l Install power cables in the APM30H.
1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the APM30H, as shown by P1 in Figure2-47.
a. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD2 port on the panel of the EPU.
b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD2 porton the EPU.
c. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe fan assembly in the APM30H, and use a torque wrench to tighten the screwson the 3V3 connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).
2. Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-47.
a. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For detailed operations, seeAssembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling theEPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD5 port on the panel of the EPU.
c. Connect the one end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD5port on the EPU.
d. Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 porton the EMUA.
3. Install input power cable for the junction box, as shown by P3 in Figure 2-47.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
a. Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L1 and N1terminals near the AC OUTPUT silkscreen on the EPU, and tighten the terminalsto 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L andN terminals in the junction box, and tighten the terminals to 1.2 N·m (10.62lbf·in.).
4. Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P4 in Figure 2-47.
a. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to theinstructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
b. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD0 or LOAD1 port on the panel ofthe EPU.
c. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD0 orLOAD1 port on the EPU.
d. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on theUPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).
Figure 2-47 Installing power cables in the APM30H
5. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind the cable.
6. Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the APM30H.
1. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-48.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
a. Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on thetop of the ELU.
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU porton the fan assembly.
2. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure2-48.
a. Connect one end of the signal cable to the GATE port on the PMU.b. Connect the other end of the signal cable to the door status sensor.
3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door, as shown by S3 inFigure 2-48.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door toits transfer terminal.
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with a 4-pin connector to the FAN_EXTport on the fan assembly.
4. Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S4 in Figure 2-48.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to theCOM_IN port on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector tothe MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
5. Install the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 2-48.
a. Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_INport on the PMU.
6. Optional: Install the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, as shown by S6 in Figure2-48.
a. Connect the end of the signal cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS485 porton the EMUA, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the PMU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
Figure 2-48 Installing signal cables in the APM30H
7. Optional: Install the surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals.
a. Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of theSLPU.
b. Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in theBBU.
c. Connect the other three surge protection transfer cables, as shown in Figure2-49.
Figure 2-49 Connections of surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals
8. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind the cable.
9. Label the installed cables according to Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
2.7 Restructuring the TMC11H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11Hcabinet to be restructured.
2.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theTMC11H Cabinet
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the TMC11H cabinet.
Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Components in the TMC11HCabinet
There are two types of TMC11Hs:l One type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration A in
Figure 2-50.l The other type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as
shown in illustration B in Figure 2-50.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
Figure 2-50 Exterior and configurations of the TMC11H
No. Component
Change Type
Remarks
1 Fanassembly
To bereplaced
The fan assembly needs to be replaced to enhance theheat dissipation capacity.
2 SLPU To bereused
-
3 ELU To bereplaced
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.
4 DCDU-03C
To bereplaced
It needs to be replaced with the DCDU-12B orDCDU-12C.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
No. Component
Change Type
Remarks
5 BBU3900 To bereused
-
6 Door statussensor
To bereused
-
7 Environmentmonitoringunit type A(EMUA)
To bereused
-
8 AC heater To bereused
-
9 Front door To bereplaced
The heat exchanger in the cabinet needs to be replacedto enhance the heat dissipation capacity of the cabinet.
10 Junctionbox
To bereused
-
11 DCDU-11B, orDCDU-11C
To bereplaced
It needs to be replaced with the DCDU-12B orDCDU-12C.
Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Cables in the TMC11HCabinet
Figure 2-51 shows the power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet that housesthe BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power.
Figure 2-51 Power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
Installation Position
Connector
Installation Position
P1 Powercable forthe fanassembly intheTMC11H
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD8port ontheDCDU-03C.
l Theotherendconnects to thePWRport onthe fanassembly in theTMC11H.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD9port ontheDCDU-12C.
l Theotherendconnects to thePWRport onthe fanassembly in theTMC11H.
To bereplaced
P2 BBU powercable
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD6port ontheDCDU-03C.
l Theotherendconnects to the-48Vport ontheUPEUin theBBU.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD6orLOAD7port ontheDCDU-11C.
l Theotherendconnects to the-48Vport ontheUPEUin theBBU.
To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
Installation Position
Connector
Installation Position
P3 EMUApowercable
l One endis tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend iscordendterminals.
l One endconnects to theLOAD7port ontheDCDU-03C.
l Theotherendconnects to thePWR1port ontheEMUA.
l One endis tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend iscordendterminals.
l One endconnects to theLOAD8port ontheDCDU-11C.
l Theotherendconnects to thePWR1port ontheEMUA.
They can beusedcontinuously and theirconnectorsneed to bereplacedonsite.
P4 Equipotential cable forgroundingof the frontdoor
Both endsare OTterminals.
l One endconnects to thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.
l Theotherendconnects to thegroundpoint onthebottomleft ofthecabinet.
Both endsare OTterminals.
l One endconnects to thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.
l Theotherendconnects to thegroundpoint onthebottomleft ofthecabinet.
To bereplaced
Figure 2-52 shows the signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses the BBU3900 and issupplied with -48 V DC power.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
Figure 2-52 Signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S1 Monitoring signalcable forthe doorstatussensor
l Oneend is a2-pinconnector.
l Theotherend isbarewires.
l Oneendconnects totheGATEport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Theotherendconnects tothedoorstatussensor.
l Oneend is a2-pinconnector.
l Theotherend isbarewires.
l Oneendconnects totheGATEport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Theotherendconnects tothedoorstatussensor.
To bereused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S2 CMUA-BBUmonitoring signalcable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Oneendconnects totheCOM_IN porton thefanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Theotherendconnects totheMON0port ontheUPEUin theBBU.
- - To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S3 ELUsignalcable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Theotherendconnects totheELUport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Oneendconnects totheELU.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Theotherendconnects totheELUport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Oneendconnects totheELU.
To bereused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S4 Monitoring signalcable forthe fan inthe frontdoor
Both endsare 4-pinconnectors.
l Theotherendconnects totheFAN_EXTport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Oneendconnects tothetransfer box inthefrontdoor oftheTMC11H.
Both endsare 4-pinconnectors.
l Theotherendconnects totheFAN_EXTport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Oneendconnects tothetransfer box inthefrontdoor oftheTMC11H.
To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S5 EMUAmonitoring signalcable
l Oneend is aDB9maleconnector.
l Theother isanRJ45connector.
l Theotherendconnects totheCOM_OUTport onthe fanassembly.
l Oneendconnects totheRS-485 porton theEMUA.
l Oneend is aDB9maleconnector.
l Theother isanRJ45connector.
l Theotherendconnects totheCOM_OUTport onthe fanassembly.
l Oneendconnects totheRS-485 porton theEMUA.
To bereused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S6 Surgeprotectiontransfercable forthemonitoring signals
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Oneendconnects totheOUT0port ontheUSLP2in theSLPU.
l Theotherendconnects totheEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEUin theBBU.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Oneendconnects totheOUT0port ontheUSLP2in theSLPU.
l Theotherendconnects totheEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEUin theBBU.
To bereused
S7 GPS clocksignalcable
l Oneend isanSMAmaleconnector.
l Theotherend isan N-typefemaleconnector.
l Oneendconnects totheGPSport ontheUSCUin theBBU.
l Theotherendconnects to aGPSsurgeprotector.
l Oneend isanSMAmaleconnector.
l Theotherend isan N-typefemaleconnector.
l Oneendconnects totheGPSport ontheUSCUin theBBU.
l Theotherendconnects to aGPSsurgeprotector.
To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S8 CMUE-BBUmonitoring signalcable
- - Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Oneendconnects totheCOM_IN porton thefanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Theotherendconnects totheMON0port ontheUPEUin theBBU.
To bereplaced
2.7.2 Replacing the Front DoorThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door. The front doorsof the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures for removingthe front doors of the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Turn off the fan in the front door.
If... Then...
AnAPM30H(Ver.B) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
ATMC11H(Ver.B) isused
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker controlspower supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
AnAPM30H(Ver.C) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
ATMC11H(Ver.C) isused
Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breaker controlspower supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
Step 3 Remove the front door to be replaced.1. Remove the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door from the transfer box, as
shown in Figure 2-53.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
Figure 2-53 Removing the connector from the monitoring signal cable for the fan in thefront door
2. Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown
in Figure 2-54.
Figure 2-54 Removing the equipotential cable for the door of the cabinet
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two hinges from the front door, and remove thefront door, as shown in Figure 2-55.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
Figure 2-55 Removing the front door
Step 4 Install the new front door.
NOTE
l When installing the front door, use new removable pins.
l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the front door before delivery.
1. Install the new front door and insert the removable pins.2. Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on an inner wall.
Step 5 Replace an N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever.1. Remove the two M4 screws on the left N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever
and pull out the door support lever from the right N-shaped fixing bracket. Then move theleft N-shaped fixing bracket to the right part of the door support lever and remove the leftN-shaped fixing bracket, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
Figure 2-56 Remove an N-shaped fixing bracket
2. Take out and slide a new N-shaped fixing bracket onto the right part of the door supportlever and move it to the left part of the lever. Use two M4 screws to secure the new N-shaped fixing bracket, with a torque of 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), and place the right part ofthe door support lever in its original position, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-57 Install a new N-shaped fixing bracket
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the number onthe barcode label starts from 212102, as shown by 1 in Figure 2-58.
If... Then...
There is a barcode label in the indicatedposition
Proceed with the next step.
There is no barcode label in the indicatedposition
Record the barcode (shown by 2 in Figure2-58) on the front door, and stick a barcodelabel carrying the same barcode to theindicated position.
Figure 2-58 Positions of the barcode labels
(1) Position of the barcode label on an inner wall of thecabinet
(2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of thecabinet
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.7.3 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 (Optional) Turn off the circuit breaker LOAD8 on the DCDU-03C. Skip this step if the fanassembly has been powered off during replacement of the front door.
Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.
1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fanassembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 2-59.
NOTE
The procedure for removing a fan assembly from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H(Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) are the same. Figure 2-59 uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.
Figure 2-59 Removing the fan assembly
DANGERWhen removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fanassembly.
Step 4 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
Step 5 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position and tightenthe four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown inFigure 2-60. The recommended torque is 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
NOTE
When installing the new fan assembly, ensure that the air exhaust vent of the fan assembly is on the top.
Figure 2-60 Installing the new fan assembly
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.7.4 Replacing the ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit(ELU).
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
ContextThe ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-61.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
Figure 2-61 Position of the ELU
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1. Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.
2. Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,as shown in Figure 2-62.
Figure 2-62 Opening the housing of the ELU
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown inFigure 2-63.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
Figure 2-63 Removing the ELU
Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE
l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure2-64. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 2-9.
Figure 2-64 Position of the barcode label
(1) Barcode label on the ELU (2) BOM code
Table 2-9 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed basestation
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macrobase station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmissionequipment
l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 anduses the -48 V DC power supply
l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113818l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113819l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113820l Ver.C: 02113397
1. Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. Therecommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.3. Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.
Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic labelinformation of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplatein the upgrade package.
l If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.
l If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.7.5 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDUs in an TMC11H.These DCDUs include the DCDU-03B, DCDU-03C, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-11C.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
The following table helps you determine whether a DCDU needs to be replaced with aDCDU-12B or DCDU-12C.
Cabinet Base Station ApplicationScenarios
DCDU ModelBeforeReplacement
DCDU ModelAfterReplacement
TMC11H(Ver.B)
DBS3900 It providestransmissionspace.
DCDU-03C DCDU-12C
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
Cabinet Base Station ApplicationScenarios
DCDU ModelBeforeReplacement
DCDU ModelAfterReplacement
It houses theBBU3900 and issupplied with-48 V DCpower.
DCDU-03B DCDU-12B
BTS3900A It providestransmissionspace.
DCDU-03C DCDU-12C
It houses theBBU3900 and issupplied with-48 V DCpower.
DCDU-03C DCDU-12C
TMC11H(Ver.C)
DBS3900 It providestransmissionspace.
DCDU-11C DCDU-12C
It houses theBBU3900 and issupplied with-48 V DCpower.
DCDU-11B DCDU-12B
BTS3900A It providestransmissionspace.
DCDU-11C DCDU-12C
It houses theBBU3900 and issupplied with-48 V DCpower.
DCDU-11C DCDU-12C
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
Step 2 Power off the DCDU according to the following table.
If... Then...
A DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B needs to bepowered off
Switch off the external power supply.
A DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C in a TMC11Hneeds to be powered off, and the TMC11H onlyprovides transmission space
Turn off the TMC circuit breaker on theEPS in the APM30H.
At a BTS3900A site, a DCDU-03C in aTMC11H needs to be powered off, and theTMC11H houses BBU3900 and is suppliedwith -48 V DC power
Turn off the SPARE2 circuit breaker on theDCDU-01 in the RFC.
A DCDU-11C in a TMC11H needs to bepowered off, and the TMC11H housesBBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power
Switch off the external power supply.
At a DBS3900 site, a DCDU-03C or DCDU-11Cin a TMC11H needs to be powered off, and theTMC11H houses BBU3900 and is suppliedwith -48 V DC power
Switch off the external power supply.
Step 3 Remove the DCDU.1. Remove all cable connectors from the DCDU.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal
block from the DCDU, as shown in Figure 2-65.3. Record the connection of the input power cables, and then remove the power cables.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from both sides of the DCDU, and
pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as shown in Figure 2-66.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
Figure 2-65 Removing the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block from theDCDU
Figure 2-66 Removing the DCDU
Step 4 Place the removed DCDU and protective covers in an ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install a new DCDU-12B.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
1. Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting earson both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.
2. Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.7.6 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC11H cabinetafter restructuring the TMC11H cabinet.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 2-10 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 2-10 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe TMC11H
EPC4connector
LOAD9 porton theDCDU-12C
3V3connector
PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe TMC11H
The cable isnewlydelivered.
BBU powercable
EPC4connector
LOAD6 orLOAD7 porton theDCDU-12Cin theTMC11H
3V3connector
-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU ofthe TMC11H
The cable isnewlydelivered.
EMUApower cable
EPC4connector
LOAD8 porton theDCDU-12C
Cord endterminals
PWR1terminal onthe EMUA
To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.
Table 2-11 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
Table 2-11 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensor
Bare wire GATE porton the fanassembly
Bare wire Door statussensor
Reused
CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assembly
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBU
The cable isnewlydelivered. Itis 1.1 m (3.61ft) long.
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU RJ45connector
ELU port onthe fanassembly
Reused
Monitoringsignaltransfercable for thefan in thefront door
Interconnection terminal
Power cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor of theTMC11Hcabinet
4-pinconnector
FAN_EXTport on thefan assembly
Newlydeliveredcable
EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
DB9 maleconnector
RS485 porton theEMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on thefan assembly
Reused
Procedurel Install power cables in the TMC11H cabinet.
1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the TMC11H cabinet, as shown by P1in Figure 2-67.
a. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD9 porton the DCDU-12C.
b. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).
2. Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-67. If a BBU isnot installed in the cabinet, skip this step.
a. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to theinstructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 orLOAD7 port on the DCDU-12C.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
c. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on theUPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).
3. Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P3 in Figure 2-67.
a. Replace the OT terminals at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4connector, as described in Table 2-10. For details about how to replace theterminals, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD8 porton the DCDU-12C.
c. Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 porton the EMUA.
Figure 2-67 Installing power cables in the TMC11H cabinet
4. Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then usecable ties to bind the cables.
5. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to the GATEport on the fan assembly, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-68.
2. Optional: Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S2 inFigure 2-68. If a BBU is not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to theCOM_IN port on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector tothe MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
3. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S3 in Figure 2-68.
a. Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on thetop of the ELU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU porton the fan assembly.
4. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly in the front door, as shown byS4 in Figure 2-68.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door toits transfer terminal.
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with a 4-pin connector to the FAN_EXTport on the fan assembly.
5. Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 2-68.
a. Connect the end of the signal cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS485 porton the EMUA, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.
Figure 2-68 Installing signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet
6. Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then usecable ties to bind the cables.
7. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
2.8 Restructuring the RFC CabinetThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFCcabinet to be restructured.
2.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFCThis section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
Component Changes in the RFCFigure 2-69 shows component changes in the RFC.
Figure 2-69 Components in the RFC
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 DCDU-01 To bereplaced
The DCDU-01 needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A toenhance the power distribution capability.
2 ELU To bereplaced
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.
3 Door statussensor
Reused -
4 FAN 01A To bereplaced
The FAN 01A needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C toenhance the heat dissipation capability.
5 RFU To bereplaced
The original RFUs are replaced by new RFUs withenhanced capacities.
6 DCDU-11A
To bereplaced
The DCDU-11A needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12Ato enhance the power distribution capability.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
No. Component
Change Type
Description
7 FAN 01B To bereplaced
The FAN 01B needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C toenhance the heat dissipation capability.
8 DCJunctionBox
- l The DC junction box in an RFC (Ver.B) uses one ortwo DC power inputs and provides two DC poweroutputs.
l The original DC junction box will be used in the RFC(Ver.C).
Cable Changes in the RFCFigure 2-70 shows the power cable changes in the RFC.
Figure 2-70 Power cables in the RFC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
No.
Cable RFC (Ver.B) RFC (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P0
DCDU-11Apowercable
- - Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to theRTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals on theDCDU-11A.
l The other endconnects to theDC junctionbox.
Reused
P1
Powercable forthe fanassemblyin theRFC
l One endis aparallelterminal.
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnectsto theFAN porton theDCDU-01.
l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton the fanassemblyin theRFC.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD6 port ontheDCDU-11A.
l The other endconnects to thePWR port onthe fanassembly in theRFC.
Tobereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
No.
Cable RFC (Ver.B) RFC (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P2toP7
RFUpowercables
l One endis aparallelterminal.
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnectsto one ofthe RFU0to RFU5ports ontheDCDU-01.
l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton anRRUamongRFU 0 toRFU 5.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to oneof the LOAD0to LOAD5ports on theDCDU-11A inthe RFC.
l The other endconnects to thePWR port on anRRU amongRFU 0 to RFU5.
Tobereplaced
P8
Equipotentialcable forthe frontdoor
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.
l The otherendconnectsto thegroundpoint onthebottomleft of thecabinet.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to theground point onthe front door.
l The other endconnects to theground point onthe bottom leftof the cabinet.
Reused
Figure 2-71 shows the signal cable changes in the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
Figure 2-71 Signal cable changes in the RFC
No. Cable RFC (Ver.B) RFC (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S1 MonitoringSignalCable forthe DoorStatusSensor
Both endsare barewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.
l Theotherendconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
Both endsare barewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassemblyin theRFC.
l Theother endconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
Reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
No. Cable RFC (Ver.B) RFC (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S2 ELU signalcable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELUport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.
l Theotherendconnectsto theELU.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELU porton thefanassemblyin theRFC.
l Theother endconnectsto theELU.
Reused
S3 Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in theRFC
l One endis a 4-pinconnector.
l Theotherend is atemperaturesensor.
l One endconnectsto theTEMport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.
l Theotherend isboundnearbythe airintakevent atthebottomof theRFC.
l One endis a 4-pinconnector.
l Theotherend is atemperaturesensor.
l One endconnectsto theTEMport onthe fanassemblyin theRFC.
l Theother endis boundnearbythe airintakevent atthebottomof theRFC.
Reused
2.8.2 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. Theprocedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C) is the same as the procedure forreplacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Power off the fan assembly.
If... Then...
An RFC (Ver.B)is used
Turn off the FAN circuit breaker on the DCDU-01.
An RFC (Ver.C)is used
Turn off the SW6 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11A.
Step 3 Remove the original fan assembly.1. Record all cable connections on the panel of the fan assembly.2. Remove all the cables from the front panel of the fan assembly.3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears on both sides
of the fan assembly, and pull the box out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 2-72.
NOTE
The procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B) is the same as the procedure for replacinga fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C). Figure 2-72 uses an RFC (Ver.C) as an example.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
Figure 2-72 Removing the fan assembly
4. Place the removed fan assembly into an ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four screws on the mounting ears on both sides to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.8.3 Replacing the ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit(ELU).
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
ContextThe ELU is on the inner right side of the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-73.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
Figure 2-73 Position of the ELU
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1. Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.
2. Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,as shown in Figure 2-74.
Figure 2-74 Opening the housing of the ELU
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown inFigure 2-75.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
Figure 2-75 Removing the ELU
Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE
l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure2-76. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 2-12.
Figure 2-76 Position of the barcode label
(1) Barcode label on the ELU (2) BOM code
Table 2-12 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed basestation
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macrobase station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmissionequipment
l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 anduses the -48 V DC power supply
l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113818l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113819l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113820l Ver.C: 02113397
1. Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. Therecommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.3. Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.
Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic labelinformation of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplatein the upgrade package.l If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.l If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.8.4 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-01 or DCDU-11Ain an RFC.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
ContextAs shown by Figure 2-77, a DCDU-01 is located in the top 1 U space of an RFC (Ver.B). TheDCDU-11A in an RFC (Ver.C) is in the same position as the DCDU-01.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
Figure 2-77 Position of the DCDU-01
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESDgloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 2 Switch off all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU to power off the fan assembly and RFUs.
Step 3 Power off the DCDU.
If... Then...
An RFC (Ver.B)is installed in anAC powersupply scenario
Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPS.
An RFC (Ver.B)is installed in aDC powersupply scenario
Switch off the external power supply.
An RFC (Ver.C)is installed in anAC powersupply scenario
Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
If... Then...
An RFC (Ver.C)is installed in aDC powersupply scenario
Switch off the external power supply.
Step 4 Remove the old DCDU.1. Record the positions of all connectors on the DCDU, and remove the connectors.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal
block from the DCDU, as shown in Figure 2-78.3. Record the connection of the input power cables, and then remove the power cables.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from both sides of the DCDU, and
pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as shown in Figure 2-79.
NOTE
The procedure for removing a DCDU-01 is the same as that for removing a DCDU-11A. Figure 2-78 and Figure2-79 use a DCDU-11A as an example.
Figure 2-78 Removing the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block from theDCDU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
Figure 2-79 Removing the DCDU
Step 5 Place the removed DCDU and protective covers in an ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Install a new DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 2-81.1. Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 2-80.
Figure 2-80 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A
(1) Double-sided tape
2. Place the new DCDU-12A on the guide rails of the installation position and slide theDCDU-12A into the cabinet.
3. Tighten the two screws on each side of the DCDU-12A to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
Figure 2-81 Installing the DCDU-12A
(1) DCDU-12A (2) Cable claw
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.8.5 Replacing the RFUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the RFU.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or a pairof ESD gloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.
Contextl RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU
V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, and LRFU.
l If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) is not faulty, disable its maximum output power lockingfor TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
l Replacing an RFU interrupts services carried by the RFU.
l Replacing an RFU takes about 6 to 10 minutes.
l The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. WhenDRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced. For details abouthow to remove the GATM and Bias-Tee, see 2.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM andBias-Tee.
l A handle is used during the replacement. The handle is placed on the lower left side of thedocument holder on the cabinet door, as shown in Figure 2-82.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
Figure 2-82 Position of the handle
NOTE
The handle is only for pulling an RFU outwards horizontally.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, to preventelectrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the RFU to be replaced.1. Turn off the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to power off the
RFU.2. Label the power cable for the RFU to be replaced, and disconnect the cable.3. Label the RF jumper for the RFU to be replaced, loosen the DIN 7/16 male elbow connector
on the RF jumper, and disconnect the RF jumper.4. Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the fiber.5. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws at the four corners of the RFU, and then
pull the RFU handle to move the RFU outwards 50 mm (1.97 in.) to 100 mm (3.94 in.), asshown in Figure 2-83. Hold the RFU with one hand, and remove the RFU from the cabinetwith the other hand.
CAUTIONThe RFU is heavy. Therefore, handle it with caution.
6. Place the handle in its original position.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
Figure 2-83 Removing the RFU
Step 3 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC, as shown inFigure 2-84. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) isused, skip this step.
1. Strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton padding, and adhere the windproof cottonpadding to the position of "1" in Figure 2-84.
2. Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of theRFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure2-84, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.
3. Strip all pieces of windproof cotton padding left on the cabinet wall after removing thewindproof cotton padding.
Figure 2-84 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC
(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom rightside of the RFC
Step 4 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC, as shown in Figure2-85. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is used, skipthis step.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
1. Strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton padding, and adhere the windproof cottonpadding to the position of "1" in Figure 2-85.
2. Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom left side of theRFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure2-85, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.
3. Strip all pieces of windproof cotton padding left on the cabinet wall after removing thewindproof cotton padding.
Figure 2-85 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC
(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottomleft side of the RFC
Step 5 Install the new RFU.
1. Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the rails until it snaps into place.
2. Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners of the RFU panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.) tosecure the RFU to the subrack.
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction BoxThe DC junction box in an RFC converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.Skip this section if an RFC (Ver.C) is used, which has already been configured with a DC junctionbox.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
Contextl In AC scenarios, the RFC power terminals in the EPU are connected to the DCDU-12A,
which then distributes DC power to the RFC, the DC junction box is not configured.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
l In DC scenarios, the external power supply is directly connected to the DC junction box,which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the DC junction box, as shown in Figure 2-86.1. Remove the screw from the protective cover for the DC junction box and then remove
protective cover.2. Remove the two screws from the DC junction box and then remove the DC junction box.
Figure 2-86 Removing the DC junction box
Step 3 Install the DC junction box in the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-87.1. Remove the two M6 screws from the left wall of the RFC.2. Align the two holes on the right side of the installation plate with the two holes left in Step
3.1, and secure them with the two removed M6 screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).3. Place the DC junction box on the installation plate, and secure them with two M4 screws
to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
Figure 2-87 Installing the DC junction box
NOTE
It is recommended that the protective cover be reinstalled after all required cables are connected to the DCjunction box.
----End
2.8.7 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC cabinetafter you restructure the RFC.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 2-13 describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
Table 2-13 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe RFC
EPC4connector
LOAD6 porton theDCDU-12A
3V3connector
PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe RFC
The cable isnewlydelivered. Itis 1.1 m (3.61ft) long.
Input powercable fromthe DCjunction boxto theDCDU-12Ain the RFC
OT terminal(M6)
DC junctionbox in theRFC
OT terminals DCDU-12Ain the RFC
l A 0.3 m(0.98 ft)cablewith ablue wireand ablackwire isnewlydeliveredfor anRFC(Ver.B).
l Theoriginalcable isused in anRFC(Ver.C).Thenewlydeliveredcable canbedisposedof.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
RFU powercables
EPC4connector
One ofLOAD0 toLOAD5ports on theDCDU-12A
3V3connector
PWR port onone of RFU 0to RFU 5
Six RFUpower cablesare newlydelivered.Power cablesfor RFU 0 toRFU 2 are1.5 m (4.92ft) and powercables forRFU 3 toRFU 5 are1.1 m (3.61ft).
Table 2-14 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 2-14 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensor
Bare wire GATE porton the fanassembly
Bare wire Door statussensor
Reused
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU port onthe fanassembly
RJ45connector
ELU Reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in theRFC
4-pinconnector
TEM port onthe fanassembly inthe RFC
Temperaturesensor
Air intakevent at thebottom of anRFC
Reused
Procedurel Install power cables in the RFC.
1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the RFC, as shown by P1 in Figure2-88.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
a. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 porton the DCDU-12A.
b. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).
2. Optional: Install the input power cable for the RFC (from the DC junction box to theDCDU-12A), as shown by P2 in Figure 2-88. If the cabinet is an RFC (Ver.B) in anAC power supply scenario, skip this step.
a. Optional: Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+)and NEG(-) terminals in the DC junction box on an inner wall of the RFC, andtighten the terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.). In an RFC (Ver.C), one end ofthe power cable has been connected to the DC junction box. Therefore, skip thisstep for an RFC (Ver.C).
b. Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN+ andNEG- terminals on the DCDU-12A, and tighten the terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48lbf·in.).
3. Install the RFU power cables, as shown by P3 to P8 in Figure 2-88.
a. Connect the end of the power cables with an EPC4 connector to one of theLOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12A.
b. Connect the end of the power cables with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe corresponding RFU, and tighten the screws on the connectors to 0.4 N·m(3.54 lbf·in.).
Figure 2-88 Installing power cables in the RFC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
4. Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then usecable ties to bind the cables.
5. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the RFC.
1. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-89.
a. Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on thetop of the ELU.
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU porton the fan assembly in the RFC.
2. Connect one end of the door status monitoring signal cable with bare wires to theGATE port on the fan assembly, as shown by S2 in Figure 2-89.
3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the RFC, as shownby S3 in Figure 2-89.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the temperature sensor nearthe air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.
b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEM port on the fan assembly in the RFC.
Figure 2-89 Installing signal cables in the RFC
4. Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then usecable ties to bind the cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
5. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
2.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200Dor IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.
2.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theIBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet
This section describes the changes to be made on the components and cables in an IBBS200Dor IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.
Component Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet
The component changes in the IBBS200D cabinet are the same as those in the IBBS200T cabinet.This section uses the IBBS200D as an example. Figure 2-90 shows component changes in theIBBS200D cabinet.
Figure 2-90 Components in the IBBS200D cabinet
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 ELU To bereplaced
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.
2 Storagebattery
Reused -
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
No. Component
Change Type
Description
3 Door statussensor
Reused -
4 Powerdistributionbox
To bereplaced
The power distribution box needs to be replaced toenhance the power backup capacity.
5 Junctionterminal forthe inputpowercable of theheatingfilm
Reused -
- Batterytemperature sensor
Reused -
Cable Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T CabinetFigure 2-91 shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the IBBS200T.
Figure 2-91 Equipotential cable and power cables in the battery cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
No.
Cable IBBS200D (Ver.B) orIBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T(Ver.C)
ChangeTypeConnector Installation
PositionConnector Installation
Position
P1
Powertransfercable forthe fan orTEC inthe frontdoor
l One endis a 3V3connector.
l The otherend is anOTterminal.
l One endconnectsto theCMUA.
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerdistribution box.
l One endis a 3V3connector.
l The otherend is anOTterminal.
l One endconnects to thePWR port onthe CMUE.
l The other endconnects to thepowerdistributionbox.
Tobereplaced
P2
RTN(+)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thestoragebatteries.
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerdistribution box.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to thestoragebatteries.
l The other endconnects to thepowerdistributionbox.
Tobereplaced
P3
NEG(-)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thestoragebatteries.
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerdistribution box.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to thestoragebatteries.
l The other endconnects to thepowerdistributionbox.
Tobereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
No.
Cable IBBS200D (Ver.B) orIBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T(Ver.C)
ChangeTypeConnector Installation
PositionConnector Installation
Position
P4
RTN(+)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thestoragebatteries.
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerdistribution box.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to thestoragebatteries.
l The other endconnects to thepowerdistributionbox.
Tobereplaced
P5
NEG(-)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thestoragebatteries.
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerdistribution box.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to thestoragebatteries.
l The other endconnects to thepowerdistributionbox.
Tobereplaced
P6
Equipotentialcable forthe frontdoor
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.
l The otherendconnectsto thegroundpoint onthebottomleft of thecabinet.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to theground point onthe front door.
l The other endconnects to theground point onthe bottom leftof the cabinet.
Tobereused(replacement oftheterminalsnotrequired)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
Figure 2-92 shows signal cable changes in the cabinet.
Figure 2-92 Signal cable changes in the battery cabinet
No. Cable IBBS200D (Ver.B) orIBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) orIBBS200T (Ver.C)
ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S1 Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatussensor
Both endsare barewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theRFcabinet(RFC).
l Theotherendconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
Both endsare barewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassemblyin theRFC.
l Theother endconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
Reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
No. Cable IBBS200D (Ver.B) orIBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) orIBBS200T (Ver.C)
ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S2 ELU signalcable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELUport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.
l Theotherendconnectsto theELU.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELU porton thefanassemblyin theRFC.
l Theother endconnectsto theELU.
Reused
2.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution BoxThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power distribution boxin the battery cabinet.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
DANGERWhen replacing batteries, prevent short circuits or reverse connections between the positive andnegative poles of the storage batteries. All tools used for installation must be insulated to preventthe batteries from burning and to ensure personal safety.
ContextBefore replacing the power distribution box, remove all storage batteries from the cabinet.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Power off the battery cabinet.
If... Then...
An IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T(Ver.B) is used
1. Remove the tool-less female connector(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on theEPS.
2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker onthe EPS.
3. Turn off the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1circuit breakers on the power distributionbox.
4. Turn off the BAT circuit breaker on the EPS.
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C) 1. Remove the tool-less female connector(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on theEPU.
2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker onthe EPU.
3. Turn off the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1circuit breakers on the power distributionbox.
4. Turn off the FAN/TEC_SW2 circuit breakeron the power distribution box.
Step 3 Remove the storage batteries.
1. Remove the terminal covers from the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 2-93.
Figure 2-93 Removing the terminal covers from the storage batteries
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
2. Use temporary labels to mark the input power cables for the positive and negative poles on
the storage batteries and the serial connection copper bars between the storage batteries,and remove the input power cables and copper bars, as shown in Figure 2-94.
Figure 2-94 Removing the power cables for storage batteries
3. Reinstall the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.4. Hold the slings on the storage batteries and pull the storage batteries out. Then use both
hands to remove the storage batteries at the same layer, and place the storage batteries ina safe position.
NOTE
l Remove the baffle plate and storage batteries layer by layer from top down. After removing thebaffle plate at one layer, you must remove all storage batteries at this layer before removing thebaffle plate at the lower layer.
l Use both hands to hold each storage battery to avoid falling.
l When placing the storage batteries outdoors, do not expose them to the sunlight.
Step 4 Remove the storage battery power cables and power transfer cable for the TEC or fan in thefront door from the power distribution box.
Step 5 Remove the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 2-95.1. Remove the two screws from the left cover plate of the power distribution box and remove
the cover plate.2. Remove the four screws from the interior of the power distribution box.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
Figure 2-95 Removing the power distribution box
3. Take the power distribution box out and use insulation tape to wrap the OT terminals onthe cables connected to the power distribution box.
4. Place the power distribution box into an ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Install rubber protective caps onto the screws for the earthquake-proof support on the top of thebattery cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-96.
Figure 2-96 Installing rubber protective caps
(1) Screws for the earthquake-proof support (2) Rubber protective caps
Step 7 Install cables in the power distribution box.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
1. Remove the cover plate from the new power distribution box.2. Install cables in the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 2-97.
Figure 2-97 Installing cables in the power distribution box
(1) NEG(-) cable for theupper storage batteries
(2) RTN(+) cable for theupper storage batteries
(3) NEG(-) cable for thelower storage batteries
(4) RTN(+) cable for thelower storage batteries
NOTE
The power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the battery cabinet has been connectedto the new power distribution box before delivery.
Step 8 Install the power distribution box in the battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-98.1. Place the new power distribution box in the battery cabinet.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the four M4x8 screws in the power distribution box
to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).3. Install the cover plate on the left side of the power distribution box and tighten the two
M3x6 screws on the cover plate to 0.55 N·m (4.87 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
Figure 2-98 Installing the power distribution box
----End
2.9.3 Replacing the ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit(ELU).
Prerequisitesl The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves,
a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
ContextThere is an ELU on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet, as shown inFigure 2-99.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
Figure 2-99 Position of the ELU in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1. Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.
2. Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,as shown in Figure 2-100.
Figure 2-100 Opening the housing of the ELU
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown inFigure 2-101.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
Figure 2-101 Removing the ELU
Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE
l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure2-102. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 2-15.
Figure 2-102 Position of the barcode label
(1) Barcode label on the ELU (2) BOM code
Table 2-15 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed basestation
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macrobase station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmissionequipment
l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 anduses the -48 V DC power supply
l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113818l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113819l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113820l Ver.C: 02113397
1. Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. Therecommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.3. Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.
Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic labelinformation of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplatein the upgrade package.l If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.l If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing storage batteries and cablesin the battery cabinet after you restructure the battery cabinet.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 2-16 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
Table 2-16 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
Powertransfercable for theTEC or fan inthe frontdoor
3V3connector
PWR port onthe CMUEA
OT terminals(M4, 2.5mm2 or0.004 in.2)
PowerDistributionBox
Deliveredwith thepowerdistributionbox
RTN(+)cable for theupperstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal PowerDistributionBox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
NEG(-)cable for theupperstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal PowerDistributionBox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
RTN(+)cable for thelowerstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal PowerDistributionBox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
NEG(-)cable for thelowerstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal PowerDistributionBox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Table 2-17 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 2-17 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU port inthe CMUEA
RJ45connector
ELU To be reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensor
Bare wire GATE porton theCMUEA
Bare wire Door statussensor
To be reused
Procedurel Install storage batteries and power cables in the battery cabinet.
1. Install the power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the cabinet, asshown by P1 in Figure 2-103.
2. Place power cables for the storage batteries. The NEG(-) cables are black and RTN(+) cables are red. P2 and P3 in Figure 2-103 show the routing of these power cables.
Figure 2-103 Installing copper bars and power cables in the battery cabinet
3. Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown inFigure 2-104.
NOTE
The battery cell should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reservedbetween battery cells.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
Figure 2-104 Installing the storage batteries
4. Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 2-105.
a. Remove terminal covers from the storage batteries.
b. Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for seriesconnections.
c. Install the NEG(-) cables and then RTN(+) cables for the storage batteries, andtighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
Figure 2-105 Installing copper bars and power cables in the battery cabinet
5. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind the cable.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
6. Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.l Install signal cables in the battery cabinet.
1. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-106.
a. Connect the ELU signal cable to the port on the ELU.b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU
port on the CMUEA.2. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure
2-106.
a. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the door status sensor.b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on the
CMUEA.
Figure 2-106 Installing signal cables in the battery cabinet
3. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind the cable.
4. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
2.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their CablesThis chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting themodules to external devices.
2.10.1 Installing the BBU CaseThis section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in anAPM30H or TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and a torque screwdriver.
ContextTwo BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the
BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.l When a second BBU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that the second BBU
be installed right above or below the original BBU without removing the guide rails.
Figure 2-107 shows the position for installing the BBU case in the APM30H and TMC11H.
Figure 2-107 Position for installing the BBU case
ProcedureStep 1 Optional: Remove the filler module from the position where the BBU case is to be installed, as
shown in Figure 2-108. If no filler module is installed in this position, skip this step.1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting ear on each
side of the filler module.2. Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.
NOTE
Install removed filler modules in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top to bottom. Redundantfiller modules can be discarded.
Figure 2-108 Removing the filler module
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
Step 2 Record the ESN on the BBU case and report it to the base station commissioning personnel. Fordetails, see Obtaining the ESN.
Step 3 Install cable claws on the BBU, as shown in Figure 2-109.1. Align the two cable claws with the holes on either side of the BBU case.2. Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw with a torque of 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
Figure 2-109 Installing cable claws on the BBU
Step 4 Install the BBU case, as shown in Figure 2-110.1. Place the BBU on the guide rails and slowly slide the BBU into the cabinet.2. Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ears on either side of the BBU to 2 N·m (17.70
lbf·in.).
Figure 2-110 Installing the BBU case
Step 5 Install the BBU power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-111.1. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructions
in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connectormust be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
2. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.
3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on theEPU in the APM30H.
CAUTIONWhen installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connectthe BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the EPU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
NOTE
Figure 2-111 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30H. When the BBU case is installed in a TMC11H, thecable connections are the same.
Figure 2-111 Installing the BBU power cable in AC scenarios
Step 6 Install the BBU power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-112.
1. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructionsin Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connectormust be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
2. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.
3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD8 port on theDCDU-12C in the TMC11H.
CAUTIONWhen installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connectthe BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
NOTE
Figure 2-112 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC11H. When the BBU case is installed in an extensionTMC11H, the cable connections are the same.
Figure 2-112 Installing the BBU power cable in DC scenarios
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
Step 7 Install inter-BBU signal cables. For details, see 2.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU SignalCables.
Step 8 Install the transmission cables. For details, see 2.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables.
----End
2.10.2 Installing the BBU ComponentsThis section describes how to install the boards into the BBU and SLPU.
Context
NOTE
This chapter only describes the procedure for installing components in the BBU. For details about the slotswhere the BBU components are installed, see the BBU configuration information.
CAUTIONTake correct ESD prevention measures, such as wearing an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, toavoid static damage to boards, modules, and electronic components.
Operation Rulesl When moving a board, hold the board with both hands, as shown in Figure 2-113.
Figure 2-113 Incorrect and correct operations for moving a board
l When installing a board, hold the front panel with one hand and support the edge of the
board with the other hand to insert it into the slot. Do not use only one hand to hold theboard or apply pressure to the edge of the board. Figure 2-114 shows correct and incorrectoperations.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
Figure 2-114 Incorrect and correct operations for supporting a board for installation
l When inserting a board into a slot, keep the board on the same plane as the slot. Do notbend the board or insert it at an angle. Figure 2-115 shows correct and incorrect operations.
Figure 2-115 Incorrect and correct operations for inserting a board
CAUTIONl Exercise cautions when holding and placing boards to avoid collision or scratches. Do not
stack or deform boards after they are unpacked.
l When inserting a board, ensure that it does not collide with the subrack and is properlyinstalled.
Installing the boards into the BBU
Figure 2-116 uses the WMPT and UPEU as examples to illustrate how to install boards in theBBU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
1. Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the fillerpanels from the slots.
2. If there are ejector levers on the panel, raise them.
3. Gently slide the board into the slot.
4. If there are ejector levers on the panel, close them.
5. Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
Figure 2-116 Installing the boards into the BBU
Installing the boards into the SLPU
Figure 2-117 uses the UELP as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the SLPU.
1. Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the fillerpanels from the slots.
2. Gently slide the board into the slot.
3. Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
Figure 2-117 Installing the boards into the SLPU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
2.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12BThis section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the DCDU-12B.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
When RFUs and RRUs are configured in the BTS3900A, a DCDU-12B must be installed in theRFC to supply power to RRUs.
Figure 2-118 shows the position of the DCDU-12B in the RFC.
Figure 2-118 Position of the DCDU-12B
Table 2-18 lists the specifications of DCDU-12B power cables in AC and DC scenarios.
Table 2-18 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables
Cable Color
Cross-SectionalArea ofthe Cable
One End The Other End
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
DCDU-12Binputpowercable(in AC
RTN(+)
Black
25 mm2 or0.039 in2,one group
OTterminal(M6)
RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals inthe INPUTpart of theDCDU-12B inthe RFC
OTterminal(M6)
RFC2terminal onthe EPU intheAPM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
Cable Color
Cross-SectionalArea ofthe Cable
One End The Other End
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
scenarios)
NEG(-)
Blue
DCDU-12Binputpowercable(in DCscenarios)
RTN(+)
Black
l 35mm2 or0.054in.2(lowsmokezerohalogen), onegroup
l 16mm2 or0.025in2, twogroups
OTterminal(M6)
RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals inthe INPUTpart of theDCDU-12B inthe RFC
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Externalpowerequipment
NEG(-)
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B.
Step 2 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 2-119.1. Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on the DCDU-12B contact the columns.2. Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as
shown in Figure 2-119.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
Figure 2-119 Installing the DCDU-12B
(1) DCDU-12B (2) Cable claw
Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-120. Skip thisstep in DC scenarios.1. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For details, see Assembling the OT
Terminal and the Power Cable.2. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal RFC2
on the EPU in the APM30H.3. Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the
DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input wiringterminals on the DCDU-12B. Then reinstall the protective cover.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
Figure 2-120 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in AC scenarios
Step 4 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-121.1. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For how to add a connector to the power
cable on the DCDU-12B side, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. Thetype of the connector at the other end depends on the onsite conditions.
2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cable to external power equipment.3. Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the
DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input wiringterminals on the DCDU-12B. Then reinstall the protective cover.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
Figure 2-121 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in DC scenarios
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cables.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
2.11 Installing Cables Between Two CabinetsThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade.
2.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.C)This section describes the changes of power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables,transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between cabinets duringthe upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).
Power Cables, PGND Cables, and Equipotential CablesTable 2-19 lists the changes of power cables, PGND cables, and equipotential cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
Table 2-19 Changes of power cables, PGND cables, and Equipotential cables
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theAPM30H (inACscenarios)
To bereplaced (anewcableneedsto bepreparedonsite)
OTterminal(M6)
ACINPUT porton theEPU
Dependingon theexternalpowerequipment
Externalpowerequipment
OTterminal(M6)
ACINPUT porton theEPU
Dependingon theexternalpowerequipment
Externalpowerequipment
Inputpowercablefor theTMC11H (inACscenarios)
To bereused, andtheconnector atoneendneedsto bereplacedonsite.
Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfit type)
TMCport ontheEPU
OTterminal(M6, 4mm2
or0.006in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-11C
EPC4connector
LOAD7 porton theEPU
OTterminal (M6,4 mm2
or0.006in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-12C
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Powercablefor thejunction boxin theTMC11H
To bereused
OTterminal(M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L3 andN3terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart onthejunction boxin theAPM30H
OTterminal(M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L andNterminalsneartheACOUTPUTparton thejunctionbox intheTMC11H
OTterminal (M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L3 andN3terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart onthejunction boxin theAPM30H
OTterminal (M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L andNterminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart onthejunction boxin theTMC11H
Inputpowercablefor theTMC11H(whentheTMC11HusesDCpowersupplied bytheRFCcabinet)
To bereplaced
OTterminal(M6,25mm2
or0.039in.2)
Junction boxin theRFC
OTterminal(M6,25mm2
or0.039in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-11C
OTterminal(M6)
Junction boxin theRFC
OTterminal (M6,25mm2
or0.039in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-12C
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theRFC(in DCscenarios)
To bereplaced
Dependingon theexternalpowerequipment
Dependingon theexternalequipment
OTterminal(M6)
Junctionbox intheRFC
Dependingon theexternalpowerequipment
Dependingon theexternalequipment
OTterminal(M6)
Junction boxin theRFC
Inputpowercablefor theRFC(in ACscenarios)
To bereplaced
Powerseries120connector(blue)
Powerseries120connector(blue)on theEPU
OTterminal
Junctionbox intheRFC
OTterminal(M6)
RFC1terminal ontheEPUin theAPM30H
OTterminal
Junction boxin theRFC
RRUpowercable
To bereused(1)
Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfit type)
One ofLOAD8 toLOAD13portson theEPU
Dependingon theRRUport
- EPC5orEPC4connector
One ofLOAD0 toLOAD8 portson theDCDU-12B
Dependingon theRRUport
PWRport ontheRRU
Inputpowercablefor theheater(in ACscenarios)
To bereused
OTterminal(M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L1 andN1terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart ontheEPU
C13connector
Heater/powerinputport
OTterminal (M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L1 andN1terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart ontheEPU
C13connector
Heater/powerinputport
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Powercablesfor abatterycabinet
To bereplaced (anewcableneedsto bepreparedonsite)
Powerseries120connector(grey)
Powerseries120connector(grey)on theEPU
OTterminal(M6,16mm2
or0.025in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalson theBATin thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200DorIBBS200T
OTterminal (M8,35mm2
or 0.05in.2)
BATterminal ontheEPUin theAPM30H
OTterminal (M8,35mm2
or 0.05in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminals ontheBATin thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T
Powercablesfor thefan inanIBBS200D
To bereplaced (anewcableneedsto bepreparedonsite)
Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfit type)
LOAD3 porton theEPUin theAPM30H
OTterminal(M4,2.5mm2
or0.004in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalson thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D
EPC4connector
LOAD8 porton theEPUin theAPM30H
EPC4connector
FAN/TEC_INPUTport onthepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Powercablefor theheating filmin theIBBS200D
To bereused
OTterminal(M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L1 andN1terminals orL2 andN2terminals onthejunction box
OTterminal(M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L andNterminalson thejunctionboxfor theheating filmin theIBBS200D
OTterminal (M8,35mm2
or 0.05in.2)
L1 andN1terminals orL2 andN2terminals onthejunction box
OTterminal (M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L andNterminals onthejunction boxfor theheating filmin theIBBS200D
Powercablefor theTECin theIBBS200T
To bereplaced (anewcableneedsto bepreparedonsite)
Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfit type)
LOAD3 porton theEPU
OTterminal(M4,2.5mm2
or0.004in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheFANsilkscreenon thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T
EPC4connector
LOAD8 porton theEPU
EPC4connector
FAN/TEC_INPUTport onthepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T
Equipotential cable
To bereused
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin theuppercabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin thelowercabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin theuppercabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin thelowercabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
PGNDcable
To bereused
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barfor thecabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Groundbusbaroutside thecabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barfor thecabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Groundbusbaroutside thecabinet
NOTE
(1) The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length requirementsof the new RRU.
Signal CablesTable 2-20 lists the signal cable changes.
Table 2-20 Signal cable changes
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
MonitoringsignalcablebetweencascadedCMUEAs
Tobereused
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport ontheupper-levelCMUA
RJ45connector
COM_INport onthelower-levelCMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport ontheupper-levelCMUEA
RJ45connector
COM_INport onthelower-levelCMUEA
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Monitoringsignalcablefor abatterycabinet
Tobereused
RJ45connector
COM_INport ontheCMUA intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port onthePMU
RJ45connector
COM_INport ontheCMUEA intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port onthePMU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignalcable
Tobereused
RJ45connector
l COM_INport ontheCMUAintheRFC
l COM_INport ontheCMUAintheAPM30H
RJ45connector
l MON0port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheAPM30H
l MON1port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheAPM30H
RJ45connector
l COM_INport ontheCMUEAintheRFC
l COM_INport ontheCMUEAintheAPM30H
RJ45connector
l MON0port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheRFC
l MON1port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheAPM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
BBUinterconnectioncable
Tobereused
DLCconnector
One ofthe M0to M4portson theUCIUin theBBU
DLCconnector
l CIport ontheUMPTintheBBU
l S0port ontheUCIUintheBBU
DLCconnector
One ofthe M0to M4portson theUCIUin theBBU
DLCconnector
l CIport ontheUMPTintheBBU
l S0port ontheUCIUintheBBU
BBUalarmcable
Tobereused
RJ45connector
EXT_ALM0orEXT_ALM1port ontheUPEUorUEIUin theBBU
RJ45connector
Externalalarmdevice
RJ45connector
EXT_ALM0orEXT_ALM1port ontheUPEUorUEIUin theBBU
RJ45connector
Externalalarmdevice
Cablebetweentwocombined basestations
Tobereused
DB15maleconnector
GCKport ontheUCIUin theBBU
MD36orDB15maleconnector
DGLUb ontheDCTB
DB15maleconnector
GCKport ontheUCIUin theBBU
MD36orDB15maleconnector
DGLUb ontheDCTB
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
External drycontactmonitoringsignalcable
Tobereused
Barewire
SLPU Dependingon theexternaltransmissionequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
Barewire
SLPU Dependingon theexternaltransmissionequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
Adapterused forlocalmaintenance
Tobereused
USB3.0connector
USBport ontheUMPTin theBBU
Ethernetconnector
Ethernetcable
USB3.0connector
USBport ontheUMPTin theBBU
Ethernetconnector
Ethernetcable
Transmission Cables and CPRI Electrical CablesTable 2-21 lists the changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables.
Table 2-21 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
E1/T1cable
To bereused
DB26 maleconnector
OUTSIDE porton the UELP inthe SLPU
Depending onthe externaltransmissionequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
FE/GEEthernet cables
To bereused
RJ45 connector FE electricalport in theOUTSIDE parton the UFLP inthe SLPU
RJ45 connector Router that isconnected tothe BSC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
FE/GEfiberopticcable
To bereused
LC connector l FE opticalport on theGTMU,WMPT,UMPT, orUTRP inthe BBU
l FE opticalport on theLMPT orUMPT inthe BBU
l FCconnector
l SCconnector
l LCconnector
Router that isconnected tothe BSC
E1/T1surgeprotectiontransfercable
To bereused
DB25connector
INSIDE porton the UELP inthe SLPU
DB26connector
E1/T1 port onthe GTMU,WMPT,UMPT, orUTRP in theBBU
FE/GEsurgeprotectiontransfercable
To bereused
RJ45 connector l FEelectricalport on theGTMU,WMPT, orUMPT inthe BBU
l FEelectricalport on theLMPT orUMPT inthe BBU
RJ45 connector FE electricalport in theINSIDE part onthe UFLP in theSLPU
Interconnection cablebetween FEopticalports
To bereused
LC connector FE optical porton the GTMU,WMPT/UMPT, orLMPT/UMPTin the BBU
LC connector FE optical porton the WMPT/UMPT, LMPT/UMPT, orGTMU in theBBU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
Interconnection cablebetween FEelectrical ports
To bereused
RJ45 connector FE electricalport on theGTMU,WMPT/UMPT, orLMPT/UMPTin the BBU
RJ45 connector FE electricalport on theWMPT/UMPT,LMPT/UMPT,or GTMU in theBBU
CPRIelectricalcables
To bereused
SFP20 maleconnector
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5ports on theGTMU inthe BBU
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5 (orCPRI0 toCPRI2)ports on theWBBP inthe BBU
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5ports on theLBBP in theBBU
SFP20 maleconnector
l CPRI0 orCPRI1 porton one ofMRFU 0 toMRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofGRFU 0 toGRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofWRFU 0 toWRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofLRFU 0 toLRFU 5
RF CablesTable 2-22 lists the RF cable changes.
Table 2-22 RF cable changes
Cable ChangeType
Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
RF jumper To be reused DIN straightmaleconnector
Antennafeeder
DIN elbowmaleconnector
ANT_TX/RXA andANT_RXBports on theRFU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
Cable ChangeType
Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Inter-RFURF signalcable
To be reused QMA elbowmaleconnector
RX_OUTAport on theRFU
QMA elbowmaleconnector
RX_INBport on anRFU
2.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC CabinetsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for variouscabinets when AC power is supplied.
Installing Input Power Cable for the APM30HThe input power cable for the APM30H connects the external power equipment to the inputwiring terminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the cabinets in the BTS3900A.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
The cabinets used by the BTS3900A in AC scenarios support the power supplies of 220 V ACthree-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire. Table 2-23 lists the inputpower cables that are delivered for the APM30H supplied with different type of power.
Table 2-23 Specifications of input power cables for the APM30H
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V AC three-phase power
L1wire
Brown OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l Preparedonsite
l Black cablewith dualinsulation
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
L2wire
layers andfour corewires
Black OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
L3wire
Gray OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Nwire
Blue OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V ACsingle-phasepower
L wire Brown OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l Preparedonsite
l Two wires (Land N), eachwith a singlecore and twoinsulationlayers
Nwire
Blue OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with110 V AC dual-live-wire power
L1wire
Black OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l Preparedonsite
l Three wires(L1, L2, andN), each witha single coreand twoinsulationlayers
L2wire
Red OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Nwire
White OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the APM30H.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add an OT terminal to each end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling
the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the APM30H, as shown in Figure 2-122, Figure 2-123, orFigure 2-124.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover for the ACinput terminals, and open the protective cover.
2. Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting barfrom the L1, L2, and L3 terminals.
NOTE
When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110 V ACdual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.
3. Route the power cable into the cabinet along the left side, connect each wire to thecorresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screw on the protectivecover to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).
Figure 2-122 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V ACthree-phase)
(1) Short-circuiting bar
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
Figure 2-123 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V ACsingle-phase)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
Figure 2-124 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (110 V ACdual-live-wire)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H
The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H include the input power cable for theTMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed powerfrom the APM30H into the TMC11H and other equipment. You need to reuse the power cablesfrom the APM30H to the TMC11H with replacing the connectors at both ends.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables arepurchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 2-24 lists the specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H.
Table 2-24 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H
Cable Color One End The Other End Remarks
Input powercable for theTMC11H
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector OT terminal(M6, 4 mm2 or0.006 in.2)
To be reused, andthe connectors atboth ends need tobe replaced.
NEG(-)wire
Blue EPC4 connector OT terminal(M6, 4 mm2 or0.006 in.2)
Power cablefor thejunction boxin theTMC11H
L wire Brown
OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002in.2)
OT terminal(M4, 1.5 mm2 or0.002 in.2)
To be reused
N wire Blue OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002in.2)
OT terminal(M4, 1.5 mm2 or0.002 in.2)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in theTMC11H.
1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
2. Add a connector to each end of the input power cable for the TMC11H and the power cablefor the junction box in the TMC11H according to the instructions in Table 1. For details,see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connectorand the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-125.
1. Remove the protective cover from the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminalLOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30H.
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminalsto 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
4. Reinstall the protective cover onto the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.
Figure 2-125 Installing the input power cable for the TMC11H
Step 3 Install the power cable for the junction box of the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-126.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L3 and N3 terminals in the junction
box of the APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the AC input terminals L and N in the junction
box of the TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
Figure 2-126 Installing power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the RFCsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from theAPM30H to the RFCs.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 2-25 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs.
Table 2-25 Power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercable for theRFC(between theAPM30Hand the RFCright belowtheAPM30H)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6, 25mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal(M6, 25 mm2 or0.039 in.2)
A cable is newlydelivered.
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Input powercable for theRFC(between theAPM30Hand the RFCon the lowerright side)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6, 25mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal(M6, 25 mm2 or0.039 in.2)
A cable is newlydelivered.
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower side),as shown in Figure 2-127.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC1 terminals on the EPUin the APM30H.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the DC junction box inthe RFC on the lower side.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
Figure 2-127 Installing input power cables for the RFC
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower rightside), as shown in Figure 2-128.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC2 terminals on the EPUin the APM30H.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the DC junction box inthe RFC on the lower right side.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
Figure 2-128 Installing the input power cable for the RFC
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (OneIBBS200D or IBBS200T Configured)
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from theAPM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T when one IBBS200D or IBBS200T is configured inthe initial configuration.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Table 2-26 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Table 2-26 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Power cablesfor the fan inanIBBS200D
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Power cablefor the TECin theIBBS200T
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Power cablefor a batterycabinet
RTN(+)wire
Red OT terminal (M8, 35mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal(M8, 35 mm2 or0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Black
Power cablefor theheating filmin theIBBS200D
L wire Brown
OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.2)
OT terminal(M4, 1.5 mm2 or0.002 in.2)
To be reused
Nwire
Blue
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the cable.
1. Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS200D or IBBS200T) to be configured anddetermine the cable to be prepared and installed according to Table 1.
2. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
3. Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:
l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable
l Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable
Step 2 Install the power cable for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 2-129.
1. Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreenon the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Figure 2-129 Installing the power cable for the battery cabinet
Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 2-130.
NOTE
If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 onthe right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.
Figure 2-130 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly in the IBBS200D
Step 4 Install the power cable for the heating film in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 2-131.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L2 and N2 terminals in the junctionbox on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
Figure 2-131 Installing the power cables for the heating films in the IBBS200Ds
NOTICEWhen installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do notconnect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 2-132.
l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.
l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from thetop, not from the bottom.
Figure 2-132 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes ofthe IBBS200Ds
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
Step 5 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 2-133.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 onthe right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.
Figure 2-133 Installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T
Step 6 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
NOTE
When routing cables along the right side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cablesthat are routed in front of the power distribution box. For easy maintenance in the future, do not bind the cablesthat are routed in front of the power distribution box.
Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
Step 8 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts(Two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts Configured)
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from theAPM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts when two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts are configuredin the initial configuration.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables arepurchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Table 2-27 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Table 2-27 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Power cablefor the fanassembly intheIBBS200D
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Cascadingpower cablefor the fanassembly intheIBBS200D
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector The power cableis reused withconnectors atboth endreplaced.NEG
(-)wire
Blue
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Power cablefor the TECin theIBBS200T
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Cascadingpower cablefor the TECin theIBBS200T
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector The power cableis reused withconnectors atboth endreplaced.NEG
(-)wire
Blue
Power cablefor batteries
RTN(+)wire
Red OT terminal (M8, 35mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal(M8, 35 mm2 or0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Black
Cascadingpower cablefor thebatteries
RTN(+)wire
Red OT terminal (M8, 35mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal(M8, 35 mm2 or0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Black
Power cable(two wires)for theheating filmin theIBBS200D
L wire Brown
OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.2)
OT terminal(M4, 1.5 mm2 or0.002 in.2)
To be reused
Nwire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the cable.
1. Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS200D or IBBS200T) to be configured anddetermine the cable to be prepared and installed according to Table 1.
2. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
3. Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:
l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
l Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable
Step 2 Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P1 in Figure 2-134.1. Connect the OT terminal (M8) at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen
on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals near the BAT silkscreen in the lower part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Step 3 Install cascading power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-134.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the upper part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)wiring terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution boxin the upper IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Figure 2-134 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the storage batteries
Step 4 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure 2-135.
NOTE
If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 onthe right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen on the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
Step 5 Install the cascading power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure2-135.
NOTE
If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.
Figure 2-135 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the fan in theIBBS200D
Step 6 Install the power cable for the heating film in the upper IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure2-136.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L1 and N1 terminals in the junctionbox on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the upper IBBS200D.
Step 7 Install the power cable for the heating film in the lower IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure2-136.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L2 and N2 terminals in the junctionbox on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the lower IBBS200D.
Figure 2-136 Installing the power cables for the heating films in the IBBS200Ds
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
NOTICEWhen installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do notconnect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 2-137.l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from the
top, not from the bottom.
Figure 2-137 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes ofthe IBBS200Ds
Step 8 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P1 in Figure 5.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 onthe right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the FAN/TEC port near theINPUT silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
Step 9 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-138.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
Figure 2-138 Installing the power cable and cascading power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T
Step 10 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
NOTE
When routing cables along the right side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cablesthat are routed in front of the power distribution box. For easy maintenance in the future, do not bind the cablesthat are routed in front of the power distribution box.
Step 11 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 12 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
(Optional) Installing the RRU Power CableWhen the BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRUs are powered by theDCDU-12B in the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length
requirements of the new RRU.
l The colors and structures of the power cables are for reference only, which may differ fromthose of the cables onsite.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of theRRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installationguide.
l Table 2-28 lists the specifications of RRU power cables when a DCDU-12B suppliespower.
Table 2-28 Specifications of the RRU power cable
Cable Color One End The Other End Remarks
RRUpowercable
RTN(+)
Black EPC5 or EPC4connector
Depending onthe RRU port
l If theoriginalRRU powercable can bereused, youneed toreplace theconnector ontheDCDU-12Bside.
l If theoriginalRRU powercable mustbe replaced,you need toadd newconnectorsto both endsof the newRRU powercable onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
Procedure
Step 1 Route the RRU power cable into the cabinet through the cable hole.
Step 2 Remove the ground clip in the cabinet, and put the removed ground clip into the ESD bag orbox.
Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 2-139.1. Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC to expose the shield layer.2. Strip the shield layer to expose the two core wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC.3. Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m(10.62 lbf·in.).
Figure 2-139 Installing the ground clip
4. Install the PGND cables with the ground clips onto the two self-clinching studs on the right
wall of the RFC. Then tighten the self-clinching studs to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
Step 4 Add an EPC5 or EPC4 connector to the RRU power cable on the DCDU-12B side. For detailsabout how to add the connector, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable orAssembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Stick a temporary label onto the RRU power cable to be installed.
Step 6 Connect the one end of the cable to the RRU.
Step 7 Connect the EPC5 or EPC4 connector on the RRU power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD8ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 2-140.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
CAUTIONWhen installing the RRU power cable for an RRU that is added to a running base station, connectthe RRU power cable first to the RRU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
Figure 2-140 Installing the RRU power cable
Step 8 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
2.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC ScenariosThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for variouscabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
Installing Input Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theRFC and TMC11H when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables arepurchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
As listed in Table 2-29, power cables for the RFC have two specifications: 35 mm2 (0.05 in.2)and 16 mm2 (0.02 in.2).
Table 2-29 Input power cables for the RFC
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercable for theRFC
(35 mm2 or0.05 in.2, onegroup)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6,35 mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
Depending onthe externalequipment
The powercable is madeonsite.
NEG(-) wire
Blue
Input powercable for theRFC
(16 mm2 or0.02 in.2, twogroups)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6,16 mm2 or 0.02 in.2)
NEG(-) wire
Blue
Input powercable for theTMC11H(theTMC11H ispowered bythe RFC)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
OT terminal(M6, 25 mm2 or0.039 in.2)
The powercable is madeonsite.
NEG(-) wire
Blue
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the RFC.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cable for the RFC according to Table 1.
For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-141.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals
in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the external power supply.
Figure 2-141 Installing the input power cable for the RFC
Step 3 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-142.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals
in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the input power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG
(-) terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
Figure 2-142 Installing the input power cable for the TMC11H
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
(Optional) Installing the RRU Power CableWhen the BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRUs are powered by theDCDU-12B in the RFC.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of theRRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installationguide.
l Table 2-30 lists the specifications of the RRU power cable when a DCDU-12B suppliespower.
Table 2-30 Specifications of the RRU power cable
Cable Color One End The Other End Remarks
RRUpowercable
RTN(+)
Black EPC5 or EPC4connector
Depending onthe RRU port
l If theoriginalRRU powercable can bereused, youneed toreplace theconnector ontheDCDU-12Bside.
l If theoriginalRRU powercable mustbe replaced,you need toadd newconnectorsto both endsof the newRRU powercable onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
NOTE
If the RRU is to be placed at a longer distance, replace the original RRU power cable with a longerone.
Procedure
Step 1 Route an RRU power cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
Step 2 Remove the ground clip in the cabinet, and put the removed ground clip into the ESD bag orbox.
Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 2-144.1. Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC to expose the shield layer.2. Strip the shield layer to expose the two core wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC.3. Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
NOTE
When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules:
l When one to three RRU power cables are installed, put all the RRU power cables on one side of theground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-143.
l When four or six RRU power cables are installed, put two or three RRU power cables on each side ofthe ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-143.
l When five RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread three cablesthrough one ground clip and two cables through the other group clip, or thread four cables throughone ground clip or one cable through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 3 in Figure2-143.
l When seven to ten RRU power cables or twelve RRU power cables are installed, use two ground clipsand comply with the preceding rules.
l When eleven RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread fivecables through one ground clip and six cables through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration4 in Figure 2-143.
Figure 2-143 Installing the ground clips (side elevation view)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
Figure 2-144 Installing the ground clips
Step 4 Add an EPC5 or EPC4 connector to the RRU power cable on the DCDU-12B side. For detailsabout how to add the connector, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable orAssembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Stick a temporary label onto the RRU power cable to be installed.
Step 6 Connect the one end of the cable to the RRU.
Step 7 Connect the EPC5 or EPC4 connector on the RRU power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD8ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 2-145.
CAUTIONWhen installing the RRU power cable for an RRU that is added to a running base station, connectthe RRU power cable first to the RRU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
Figure 2-145 Installing the RRU power cable
Step 8 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
2.11.4 Installing Transmission CablesThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing transmission cables betweena cabinet and the external transmission equipment.
Installing the E1/T1 CableThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the E1/T1 cable.
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the
E1/T1 cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in the APM30Hthat is shown in Figure 2-146.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on the UELP, as shown in Figure2-146.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
Figure 2-146 Installing the E1/T1 cable
Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable outlet on the bottom left side of thecabinet.
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 4 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cable
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable.
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l An FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable.l When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the
FE/GE Ethernet cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing inthe APM30H that is shown in Figure 2-148.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE cable in a proper position within 1 m from the cable outletof the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-147.1. Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE cable, and strip the sheath off the cable
for about 40 mm to expose the shield layer.2. Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.3. Make the shield layer of the FE/GE cable in full contact with the ground clip, and tighten
the M4 screws on the clip until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 N·m.
Figure 2-147 Installing a grounding clip
Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) portnear the OUTSIDE label on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 2-148.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
Figure 2-148 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable
Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 5 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing the FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable.
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
l Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeledas MM.
l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multi-mode opticalmodule is black or gray.
l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
l An FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SCconnector, or LC connector at the other end.
l SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are notused simultaneously.
l SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they arenot used simultaneously.
l The method of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H is the same as the methodof installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in a TMC11H. The following describes the procedurefor installing an FE/GE fiber optic cable in an APM30H.
NOTICEAn optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore,you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 2-149.
1. Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the correspondingBBU board.
2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.
3. Lower the puller on the optical module.
4. Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.
5. Raise the puller on the optical module.
Figure 2-149 Installing the optical module
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
Step 2 Insert the optical module into the corresponding FE/GE optical port, as shown in Figure2-150.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
Step 3 Stick a temporary label to the FE/GE fiber optic cable to be installed.
Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in Figure2-150.
Figure 2-150 Installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable
Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 6 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 7 Replace the temporary label on the FE/GE fiber optic cable with an engineering label. Fordetailed operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
2.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in ACScenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cablesbetween cabinets when AC power is supplied.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 2-31 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable changes.
Table 2-31 Specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 APM30H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 2-151.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
Figure 2-151 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200TThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 2-32 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cables between twocabinets after the cable changes.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
Table 2-32 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Batterycabinetmonitoringsignal cable(between theIBBS200DorIBBS200TandAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA intheIBBS200DorIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port on thePMU in theAPM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 2-152.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
Figure 2-152 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T andAPM30H), as shown in Figure 2-153.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
Figure 2-153 Installing the battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200Dor IBBS200T and APM30H)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 2-33 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cables between twocabinets after the cable changes.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
Table 2-33 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe TMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 2-154.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
Figure 2-154 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),as shown in Figure 2-155.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
Figure 2-155 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC11H and RFC)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 2-34 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
Table 2-34 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe TMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe RFC
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor a batterycabinet
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA intheIBBS200DorIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port on thePMU in theAPM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 2-156.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
Figure 2-156 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T andAPM30H), as shown in Figure 2-157.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
Figure 2-157 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),as shown in Figure 2-158.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
Figure 2-158 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC11H and RFC)
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 2-35 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
Table 2-35 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector InstallationPosition
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theupperIBBS200D/IBBS200Tand lowerIBBS200D/IBBS200T)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe upperIBBS200D
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe lowerIBBS200D
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor a batterycabinet(between theAPM30Hand lowerbatterycabinet)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe lowerIBBS200DorIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port on thePMU in theAPM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 2-159.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
Figure 2-159 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T), as shown in Figure 2-160.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the upper
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA on the door of
the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
Figure 2-160 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between theupper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery cabinet and theAPM30H), as shown in Figure 2-161.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the lower
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
Figure 2-161 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower batterycabinet and the APM30H)
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 2-36 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
Table 2-36 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor a batterycabinet(between theAPM30Hand lowerbatterycabinet)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe lowerIBBS200DorIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port on thePMU in theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe TMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe RFC
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theupperIBBS200D/IBBS200Tand lowerIBBS200D/IBBS200T)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe upperIBBS200D
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe lowerIBBS200D
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 2-162.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly ofthe RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of theAPM30H.
Figure 2-162 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T), as shown in Figure 2-163.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the upper
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA on the door of
the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
Figure 2-163 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery cabinet and theAPM30H), as shown in Figure 2-164.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the lower
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
Figure 2-164 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lowerbattery cabinet and the APM30H)
Step 4 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),as shown in Figure 2-165.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
Figure 2-165 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC11H and RFC)
Step 5 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
2.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48V DC Scenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cablesbetween cabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 2-37 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
Table 2-37 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(betweenthe RFC andTMC11H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefanassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU of theTMC11H
To bereused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown inFigure 2-166.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
Figure 2-166 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC11H)
Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs.
ContextMonitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of thecabinet. Table 2-38 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinetsafter the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
Table 2-38 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andTMC11H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theTMC11H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theextensionTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe extensionTMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown inFigure 2-167.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
Figure 2-167 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC11H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the extension TMC11Hand RFC), as shown in Figure 2-168.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the extension TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
Figure 2-168 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe extension TMC11H and RFC)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 2-39 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
Table 2-39 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenarioof 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs
Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(betweenthe RFC andTMC11H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefanassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU of theTMC11H
To bereused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweentheextensionTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA intheextensionTMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe RFC
To bereused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweentwo RFCs)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe rightRFC
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe left RFC
To bereused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown inFigure 2-169.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
Figure 2-169 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC11H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the extension TMC11Hand RFC), as shown in Figure 2-170.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the right RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the extension TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
Figure 2-170 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe extension TMC11H and RFC)
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between two RFCs), as shownin Figure 2-171.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the left RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the right RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
Figure 2-171 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweentwo RFCs)
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
2.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal CablesThis section describes the procedure for installing inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or single-mode base station.
Prerequisitesl The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.
l The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.
l The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable.
Optical modules can be divided into single- and multimode optical modules, which can bedistinguished as follows:
l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode opticalmodule is black or gray.
l The transmission mode is displayed as "SM" on the label of a single-mode optical moduleand "MM" on the label of a multimode optical module.
There is a label on each optical module, which provides information such as the rate, wavelength,and transmission mode, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
Figure 2-172 Label on an optical module
(1) Rate (2) Wavelength (3) Transmission mode
ContextThe following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBUsignal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU SignalCable Connections.
Table 2-40 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected
InterconnectionMode
Installation Position
BBU 0 BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT M0 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_U
M1 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_L
HEI port on the WBBPf HEI port on the WBBPf
NOTE
BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20minutes.
The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBUsignal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU SignalCable Connections.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
Table 2-41 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected
InterconnectionMode
Installation Position
BBU 0 BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT M0 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_U
M1 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_L
HEI port on the WBBPf HEI port on the WBBPf
UMPT+UMPT CI port on the UMPT CI port on the UMPT
NOTICEA color-coding tape marked Master is attached to one end of an inter-BBU cable that connectstwo UMPTs in different BBUs. When installing the cable, connect the end marked Master tothe CI port on the UMPT in BBU 0 and the other end to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 1.
NOTE
BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the opticalmodules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.1. Lower the puller of the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the port.3. Raise the puller of the optical module.
Figure 2-173 Installing the optical module
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 2-174.
Figure 2-174 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable
Step 3 Install one or two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT. The followingfigure shows the installation of two inter-BBU signal cables.
NOTE
l You need to install two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+UL mode.
l You need to install only one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+L or GL+Umode.
1. Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0.2. Connect the other end of the cables to the CI ports on the UMPT_U and UMPT_L in BBU
1.
Step 4 Install one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the WBBPf to the WBBPf, as shown in thefollowing figure. The inter-BBU signal cable is installed only to interconnect the WBBPf in aBBU to the WBBPf in another BBU.1. Connect one end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 0.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1.
NOTE
l When two BBUs are installed in the APM30H, connect the signal cables, as shown in Figure 2-175. WhenBBU 0 is installed in the APM30H and BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H, connect the signal cables, asshown in Figure 2-176.
l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the sametype as those on BBU 0.
l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1Aand 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1.
l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
Figure 2-175 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (1)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
Figure 2-176 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (2)
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic patchcord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBUinterconnection signal cable before using cable ties to secure it. If another type of cable is usedas a BBU interconnection signal cable, directly use cable ties to secure it.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
2.11.8 Installing the RF JumperThe RF jumper transmits signals between the RFU and antenna system.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a cable cutter, PVC insulation tape, and an open-end wrench or torque wrench.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the RF jumper into the cabinet through the cable outlet in the cabinet according to one ofthe manners shown in Figure 2-177. Lay out the installed RF jumper according to the instructionsin Cabling Requirements.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
Figure 2-177 Routing of the RF jumper
Step 2 Install the RF jumper, as shown in Figure 2-179 and Figure 2-178.
NOTICEConnect each RF jumper securely to prevent RF signal leakage.
Figure 2-178 Installing RF jumpers for interconnected RFUs
NOTE
Inter-RFU RF signal cables have been installed in the cabinet before delivery. You only need to check whetherthe cables are securely connected.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
Figure 2-179 Installing RF jumpers for independent RFUs
1. Connect the DIN connector on the RF jumper to the ANT port on the RFU panel.2. Use a 32 mm (1.26 in.) open-end wrench or torque wrench to tighten the two DIN
connectors from bottom to top. Ensure that the tightening torque reaches 25 N·m to 35 N·m(221.27 lbf·in. to 309.78 lbf·in.).
Figure 2-180 Tightening the DIN connectors
Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumper according to the instructions in Attaching the Color Ring.
Step 4 Connect the DIN straight male connector at the other end of the jumper to the connector on thefeeder.
----End
2.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical CableThe CPRI electrical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RFU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
Procedure
Step 1 Insert the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables into the CPRI ports on thecorresponding board in the BBU.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D) HardwareDescription.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing CPRI Cables.
Step 2 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cable through the cable hole on the inner left side ofthe power cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the correspondingRFU, as shown in Figure 2-181.
Figure 2-181 Installing the CPRI electrical cable
Step 3 Connect the SFP connector on the CPRI electrical cable to the CPRI0 port on the panel of theRFU, as shown in Figure 2-181.
Step 4 Route the cables by referring to Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind the cables.
NOTE
l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cable at the top of the DCDU-12A in the RFC or in thebase of the RFC.
l Lay out the cable according to the manners in Figure 2-181. Ensure that the cable is routed to the RFUthrough the cable bridge above the RFUs.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
Step 5 Attach labels to the installed cables. For details, see Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
2.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic CableThe CPRI fiber optic cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RRU.
Contextl Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeled
as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multi-mode optical
module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.l For details about the connections of CPRI fiber optic cables, see "CPRI Cable Connections"
in the BTS900A Hardware Description.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes maybe abnormal. Therefore, you must insert an fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical modulewithin 20 minutes.
For the details about the cable connections,l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base
Station Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 2-182.1. Lower the puller on the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU/WBBP/LBBP. Then insert an
optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU.
NOTE
Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.
3. Raise the puller on the optical module.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
Figure 2-182 Installing the optical module
Step 2 Install a CPRI fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 2-183.1. Stick a temporary label to the CPRI fiber optic cable to be installed.2. Remove the dustproof cap from the connector on the fiber optic cable.3. Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into
the optical modules in the WBBPLBBPGTMU, WBBP, or LBBPGTMU or WBBP, andthen insert the DLC connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical modulein the RF module.
NOTICEl When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the break-out fiber optic
cables on the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.03 m (1.18in.), respectively.
l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX port on the BBU must be connected to theTX port on the RF module, and the RX port on the BBU must be connected to the RXport on the RF module.
Figure 2-183 Installing the CPRI fiber optic cable
Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cable along the left of the cabinet, and then lead it out of the cabinetfrom the cable hole on the left of the bottom. For details, see Cabling Requirements.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
Step 4 Replace the temporary label on the CPRI fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
2.12 Installation ChecklistAfter the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installationenvironment, and cable-related items.
Cabinet Installation ChecklistTable 2-42 describes the cabinet installation checklist.
Table 2-42 Cabinet installation checklist
No. Item
1 The installation position of the cabinet strictly complies with the engineeringdesign.
2 The base is securely installed.
3 All the bolts, including those for electrical connections, are tightened. The springwashers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.
4 The cabinet is neat and clean.
5 The paint on the surface is satisfactory. The damaged paint is repaired. For details,see 2.14.3 Repainting.
6 Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.
Installation Environment ChecklistTable 2-43 describes the installation environment checklist.
Table 2-43 Installation environment checklist
No. Item
1 No excessive straps or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.
2 No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around the cabinet.
3 Antirust powder on the door of the cabinet is cleared.
Electrical Connection ChecklistTable 2-44 describes the electrical connection checklist.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
Table 2-44 Electrical connection checklist
No. Item
1 All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters. Thereshould not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed.
2 The PGND cable is securely connected and the AC input power cable and cablesin the cabinet are correctly connected according to the electrical design of the powersystem. The screws are tightened. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not short-circuited.
3 The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off rather than coiled.
4 The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are securely solderedor crimped.
5 The bare wires and the terminal handles at the wiring terminals are coated with heatshrink tubing.
6 The flat washer and the spring washer are well mounted on all OT terminals.
7 The exterior of the battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.
8 The shell of the battery is clean without any leakage trace.
9 The wiring post on the battery stands properly without any damage, and the post isnot covered with any acid substances.
10 The pressure relief valve of the battery is not deformed, and no liquid leaks.
11 The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positiveand negative poles.
12 The voltage of the battery is normal.l The voltage of a 2 V battery cell ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.l The voltage of a 12 V battery cell ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.l The total voltage of the batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.
13 The circuit breakers for the batteries are set to OFF.
Cable Installation ChecklistTable 2-45 describes the cable installation checklist.
Table 2-45 Cable installation checklist
No. Item
1 All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are securelyconnected. All cable connectors at the bottom of the cabinet are securely installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
No. Item
2 The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and facethe same direction.
3 Different types of power cables are bound separately when being routed, forexample, the power cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber optic cables, and E1/T1/FE cables.
4 The layout of all cables facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion. Forexample, the maintenance transfer cable is bound to the outside of the BBU cableclaw, as shown in Figure 2-184.
5 Legible labels are attached to both ends of all cables.
6 The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are smoothwithout sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.2 in.) of theoutdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.
7 The port that no cable is connected to is properly protected.
8 The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid false connection that will causean abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).
Figure 2-184 Checking the maintenance transfer cable
Checklist for the Hardware UpgradeTable 2-46 describes the checklist for the hardware upgrade.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
Table 2-46 Checklist for the hardware upgrade
No.
Cabinet Type Item
1 APM30H/TMC11H
The ground cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 2.6.5 Replacing the Power System.
2 APM30H/TMC11H
The vacant customer space in the cabinet has been configured withthe filler module.
3 APM30H/TMC11H
The ELU has been replaced, For detailed operations, see 2.7.4Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
4 APM30H The input power cable for the APM30H has been replaced. Fordetailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cable for theAPM30H.
5 APM30H The input power cable for the junction box has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
6 APM30H The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
7 APM30H The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
8 APM30H The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 2.10.1 Installingthe BBU Case.
9 APM30H The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
10 APM30H The monitoring signal transfer cable and CMUEA-BBUmonitoring signal cable have been installed. For detailedoperations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
11 APM30H The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
12 TMC11H The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
13 TMC11H The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
14 TMC11H The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 2.10.1 Installingthe BBU Case.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
No.
Cabinet Type Item
15 TMC11H The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
16 TMC11H The CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable has been installed.For detailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in theCabinet.
17 TMC11H The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
18 RFC The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 2.8.3Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
19 RFC The monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor,monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, and ELU signalcable have been installed. For detailed operations, see 2.8.7Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
20 RFC In DC scenarios, the junction box has been installed. For detailedoperations, see 2.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC JunctionBox.
21 RFC In AC scenarios, the input power cable for the RFC has beenreplaced. For detailed operations, see Installing Power Cablesfrom the APM30H to the RFCs.
22 RFC The shield layer of the RRU power cable has been grounded. Fordetailed operations, see (Optional) Installing the RRU PowerCable or (Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable.
23 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 2.9.3Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
2.13 Powering On a Base StationThis section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supplyto the components in a cabinet.
Prerequisitesl Input power cables for the BTS3900A are correctly connected.
l The power supply to the BTS3900A meets the requirements of the power system.
l The external power supply to the BTS3900A has been shut off.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
l All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.l All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been set to OFF.l All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T have
been set to OFF.l Switch on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T has been set to OFF.l Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.l Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.
Context
DANGERExercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves some high voltageoperations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact with the input voltage usinga damp object may be fatal.
NOTICEl Power on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it. If you power off a cabinet or
BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU for
maintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
Table 2-47 Circuit breakers in BTS3900A base stations
BaseStation
Power Device(1) Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A(Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,DCDU-03C, or powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A or EPS 01Cl BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2
circuit breakers on the power distribution boxin an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU0 toRFU5 circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 (Thecircuit breakers control the power input to theBBU, fan assembly, and RFUs.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control thepower input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fanassembly, and customer transmissionequipment.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control thepower input to the BBU, fan assembly, andcustomer transmission equipment.)
BTS3900A(Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 orEPU03A-04,DCDU-11A,DCDU-11B,DCDU-11C, and powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02 orEPU03A-04
l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2circuit breakers on the power distribution boxin an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11A (SW0 to SW8 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,FAN 01B, and BBU 0 and BBU 1. The SW9circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA, and FAN 02B. TheSW9 circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11C (SW0 to SW5 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the transmissionequipment. SW6 to SW9 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to BBU 0 and BBU 1,EMUA, and FAN 02B.)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
BaseStation
Power Device(1) Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A(Ver.D)
EPU05A-02 orEPU05A-04,DCDU-12A,DCDU-12B,DCDU-12C, and powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02 orEPU05A-04
l BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers onthe power distribution box in an IBBS200D orIBBS200T
l Switch on the power distribution box in anIBBS700D or IBBS700T
NOTE
(1) In this section, EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 and EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 are shortened to EPU, EPS 01Aor EPS 01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.
ProcessThe following figure shows the power-on check process.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
Figure 2-185 Power-on check process
Procedurel Power on an AC base station.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
1. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply andthe ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.
2. Optional: If the base station is configured with a battery cabinet, set the BAT circuitbreaker on the EPU or EPS to ON and set the circuit breaker on the power distributionbox in the battery cabinet to ON. Otherwise, skip this substep.
3. Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and batterycabinet.
4. Set the circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS for the corresponding components to ON,and check the power supply status of each component.
Table 2-48 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU or EPS
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
APM30H PMU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
PSU l The power indicator is steady green.l The fault indicator is steady off.
Fanassembly
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
IBBS200DorIBBS200T
Fan or TECin the frontdoor
The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the RUNindicator on the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA isblinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1sand off for 1s).
IBBS700D Fan in thefront doorandCMUEA
The fan is working properly, and the RUN indicatoron the CMUEA is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
IBBS700T TEC andCMUF
The TEC is working properly, and the RUN indicatoron the CMUF is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
5. Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on each DCDU
in the RFC and TMC11H to ON. Skip this substep if there is no circuit breaker on theDCDU, such as the DCDU-12A, DCDU-12B, and DCDU-12C.
6. Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.7. Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
Table 2-49 Normal status of components in the cabinet
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
APM30H BBU l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and offfor 1s). The indicators indicating the status of theCPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.
TMC11H FAN 02A/FAN 02B/FAN 02D
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
RFC RFU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
FAN 01A/FAN 01B/FAN 01C
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
- RRU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, checkwhether the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.
NOTE
The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other indicators, seeBBU Hardware Description.
8. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
Table 2-50 Troubleshooting
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to allcomponents in thecabinet
Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit
breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.
Failure in the powersupply to a board inthe BBU
Check as follows:1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the
slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the statusof indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove theboard, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards ofthe same type, and check the status of the indicators.l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to othercomponents in thecabinet
Check as follows:1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skipthis step and go to step 2 if this component does not useany fuse terminal block.l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse accordingto the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, goto step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to thecomponent.l If the input power is normal, replace the component.l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connectedsecurely. If the power cable is not securelyconnected, turn off the circuit breaker for thecomponent (if there is no circuit breaker for thecomponent, remove the connector from the powerunit) and reconnect the power cable. If the powercable is securely connected, the protector (such ascircuit breaker or fuse) on the component may bedamaged. In this case, replace the damagedprotector. If the protector cannot be replaced,replace the upper-level power distributioncomponent.
l Power on a DC base station.
1. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply andthe ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.
2. Turn on the external power switch to power on the RFC cabinet. Power on theTMC11H if it is configured as a transmission cabinet.
3. Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the RFC to ON.Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as DCDU-12Aand DCDU-12B.
4. Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the TMC11Hto ON. Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such asDCDU-12C.
5. Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.6. Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
Table 2-51 Normal status of components in the cabinet
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
TMC11H BBU l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and offfor 1s).
FAN 02A/FAN 02B/FAN 02D
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
RFC RFU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
FAN 01A/FAN 01B/FAN 01C
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
- RRU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
7. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,
handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.
Table 2-52 Troubleshooting
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to allcomponents in thecabinet
Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit
breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to a board inthe BBU
Check as follows:1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the
slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the statusof indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove theboard, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards ofthe same type, and check the status of the indicators.l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.
Failure in the powersupply to othercomponents in thecabinet
Check as follows:1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skipthis step and go to step 2 if this component does not useany fuse terminal block.l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse accordingto the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, goto step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to thecomponent.l If the input power is normal, replace the component.l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connectedsecurely. If the power cable is not securelyconnected, turn off the circuit breaker for thecomponent (if there is no circuit breaker for thecomponent, remove the connector from the powerunit) and reconnect the power cable. If the powercable is securely connected, the protector (such ascircuit breaker or fuse) on the component may bedamaged. In this case, replace the damagedprotector. If the protector cannot be replaced,replace the upper-level power distributioncomponent.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
2.14 Subsequent OperationsThis section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgradedand checked.
2.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet DoorThe barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label on the cabinetdoor need to be replaced after the upgrade.
ContextThe front door of the cabinet has been replaced during restructuring of the APM30H andTMC11H cabinets. You only need to replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card,and power distribution label.
Procedure
Step 1 Stick the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to theAPM30H and TMC11H cabinets. Their positions are shown in Figure 2-186.
Figure 2-186 Positions of labels for the cabinet
(1) Barcode label (2) Qualification card (3) Power distribution label (4) Nameplate
Step 2 Replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label in the RFCand IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinets.1. Take out the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label
for the cabinet.2. Stick the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to
the same positions as the original labels in the cabinet.
----End
2.14.2 Sealing the Cable OutletsAfter all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable outlets on the cabinet and base.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
Procedure
Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes on both sides of the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC,IBBS200T, or IBBS200D cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-187 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, IBBS200T, orIBBS200D cabinet
(1) Fireproof mud
Step 2 Seal the RF cable holes in the RFC, as shown in the following figure.1. Route the cables through the corresponding cable holes, and install the cable outlet module
on the bottom of the cabinet.2. Use rubber caps to seal the unused cable holes in the cable outlet module.3. Tighten the screw on the cable outlet module.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
Figure 2-188 Sealing the cable holes in the RFC
(1) Cable holes for thepower cables
(2) Cable holes for CPRIelectrical cables
(3) Cable hole for themonitoring signal cable
(4) Cable hole for theequipotential cable
(5) Cable hole for themonitoring signal cable
(6) Screw - -
Step 3 Use baffle plates to block redundant space in the cable outlets and tighten the two screws oneach baffle plate, as shown in Figure 2-189.
Figure 2-189 Sealing the cable outlets on the base
(1) Baffle plate on the right (2) Baffle plate at the rear (3) Baffle plate on the left
Step 4 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in Figure 2-190.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
Figure 2-190 Sealing cable outlets on the base using fireproof mud
(1) Fireproof mud (2) PVC corrugated pipe
Step 5 Tighten the three screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate.
----End
2.14.3 RepaintingThe paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept satisfactory. Therefore, any damaged paintmust be repaired.
PrerequisitesBefore repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to Table 2-53.
Table 2-53 Color codes
Applied to Color Huawei Code International Code
Cabinet RAL7035 YB026 RAL7035
Base 3010 light gray YB030 Pantone 422U
Procedure
Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, rub the area with sandpaperslightly to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in Figure 2-191.
Figure 2-191 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or dust from therubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with another clean cloth, as shown inFigure 2-192.
Figure 2-192 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol
Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color.
Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the paint. Then applythe paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be observed, as shown in Figure 2-193.
NOTICEThe paint coating should be as thin as possible. No drops are allowed on the paint coating, andthe surface should be smooth.
Figure 2-193 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
Step 5 Perform subsequent operations after the repaired paint coating is exposed in the air for 30minutes.
NOTE
The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the surrounding areas, withoutobvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no longer be distinguishable. In addition, thereshould be no paint peeled off.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_B)
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.B)to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).
3.1 Installation PreparationsThis chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It alsospecifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
3.2 Application ScenariosMultiple cabinets can be configured and installed for the BTS3900A to meet the requirementsfor different RF unit configurations, backup power capacity, and space for customer equipment.A BTS3900A can be configured with only RFUs or both RFUs and RRUs depending on differentscenarios.
3.3 Unpacking CheckUnpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
3.4 Restructuring ProcessThis section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade of BTS3900A(Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C).
3.5 Powering Off the Base StationThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for powering off the base station.
3.6 Restructuring the APM30H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30Hcabinet to be restructured.
3.7 Restructuring the TMC11H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11Hcabinet to be restructured.
3.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFCcabinet to be restructured.
3.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200Dor IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.
3.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their CablesThis chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting themodules to external devices.
3.11 Installing Cables Between Two CabinetsThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade.
3.12 Installation ChecklistAfter the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installationenvironment, and cable-related items.
3.13 Powering On a Base StationThis section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supplyto the components in a cabinet.
3.14 Subsequent OperationsThis section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgradedand checked.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
3.1 Installation PreparationsThis chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It alsospecifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
3.1.1 Pre-upgrade CheckThis section describes the operations that must be taken before the hardware upgrade.
You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:l Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properly
before the upgrade.l Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.
Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need tocontact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.
3.1.2 Upgrade PreparationsThis section describes the preparations needed for the upgrade.
Table 3-1 lists the requirements on the current software version of the base station before theupgrade.
Table 3-1 Versions before the upgrade
Product Name Version before Upgrade
SingleRAN7.0 series V100R007C00SPC240 and later
SingleRAN6.0 series V100R004C00SPC190 and later
3.1.3 DocumentsThis section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.
l Before the installation, familiarize yourself with related information in the followingdocuments:
– 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description– 3900 Series Base Station Cables– BBU3900 Hardware Description– RFU Hardware Description– BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Installation Guide– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide– BTS3900A (Ver.B) Site Maintenance Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Site Maintenance
Guide– Safety Precautions
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
l During the installation, refer to the following document:
– Installation Reference
3.1.4 Tools and InstrumentsThis section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation.
Marker Phillips screwdriver (M3 toM6)
Flat-head screwdriver (M3 toM6)
Diagonal pliers
32 mm (1.26 in.)combination wrench
Socket wrench Torque wrench
Power cable crimping tool RJ45 crimping tool Cable cutter
Rubber mallet Soldering iron Wire stripper
Hammer drill (Φ16) Heat gun Level
Multimeter Measuring tape Vacuum cleaner
ESD wrist strap ESD gloves Torque screwdriver
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
Gloves - -
3.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite PersonnelOnsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsitepersonnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.
Before the installation, pay attention to the following items:
l The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with theproper installation and operation methods.
l The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installationenvironment. Generally, only three to five onsite personnel are necessary.
3.2 Application ScenariosMultiple cabinets can be configured and installed for the BTS3900A to meet the requirementsfor different RF unit configurations, backup power capacity, and space for customer equipment.A BTS3900A can be configured with only RFUs or both RFUs and RRUs depending on differentscenarios.
3.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUsOnly
When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for theBTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and -48 V DC power supplyscenario.
Cabinet Configuration Principlesl A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.
l The maximum cabinet configuration of a BTS3900A site is 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. There must be a clearance of 40 mm (1.57 in.) betweenthe cabinets installed side by side.
l The RFC can only be stacked below the APM30H or TMC11H.
l The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, orTMC11H. The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can only be stacked below the TMC11H.
l When a site is configured with over six RFUs and only one IBBS200D or IBBS200T, theIBBS200D or IBBS200T must be configured with at least two groups of 92 Ah storagebatteries to avoid overcurrent of a single battery group during discharging.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
l If an auxiliary cabinet such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H is required duringinitial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basiccabinet. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinetis positioned on the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on thebattery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.
l During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in thefuture. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain inthe original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In aspecial scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets.
l When a BTS3900A is configured with two BBUs and both BBUs are connected to RFUs,the BBUs must be interconnected.
l A BTS3900A configured with one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU bydefault. It can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumptionof all BBU boards cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to a new or expansionscenario.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-mode Base StationA single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, and the BBU is installedin the APM30H or TMC11H. When seven to twelve RFUs need to be configured, two RFCs arerequired.
Table 3-2 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station withdifferent backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 3-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or220 V AC
No backuppower
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1TMC11H
≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1TMC11H
Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided byone batterycabinet
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1TMC11H
≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H
Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided bytwo batterycabinets
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H
≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H
-48 V DC - ≤ 9 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs 1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 20 U ≤ 6 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipmentand carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-1.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
Figure 3-1 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is nobackup power
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 3-1 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1 TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the originalconfiguration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H.
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-2 andFigure 3-3.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
Figure 3-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by an IBBS200D/IBBS200T
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
Figure 3-3 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by an IBBS700D/IBBS700T
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-4.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
Figure 3-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by two battery cabinets
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 3-4 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H is the initialconfiguration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode basestation in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurationsare shown in Figure 3-5.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
Figure 3-5 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 3-5 are two modes of configuring 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs. (A) indicates that 2TMC11Hs+2 RFCs is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the originalconfiguration of 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC.
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base StationTwo BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:l Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30H
and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the
BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
Table 3-3 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different backuppower capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 3-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or220 V AC
No backuppower
≤ 3 U ≤ 12 RFUs(1)
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1TMC11H
Backuppowerprovided bya singlebatterycabinet
≤ 3 U l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤ 14 U l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1TMC11H
Backuppowerprovided bytwo batterycabinets
≤ 3 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H
-48 V DC - ≤ 7 U 1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 18 U 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
NOTE
(1) A maximum of 12 RFUs are supported by a triple-mode base station. If there are more than 12 RFUs,an extra base station is required.
In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment areshown in Figure 3-6.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
Figure 3-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is notrequired
When a single cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station withdifferent space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 3-7.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
Figure 3-7 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby a single battery cabinet
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 3-8.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
Figure 3-8 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby two battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station areshown in Figure 3-9.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
Figure 3-9 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
3.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUsand RRUs
When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for theBTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and –48 V DC power supplyscenario.
Cabinet Configuration Principlesl A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and nine RRUs.
Therefore, more than one BTS3900As must be deployed if more than six RFUs and nineRRUs are required.
l When a BTS3900A is configured with both RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is needed tobe installed in RFC, the maximum configuration of RRUs is six RRUs of 2*60 W and threeRRUs of 2*40 W.
l When both the RFU and RRU support the GSM mode, the BBU3900 must be configuredwith a GTMUb. In addition, the RFUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to theGTMUb, and the RRUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the UBRI.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base StationA single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in theAPM30H or TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
Table 3-4 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station withdifferent backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 3-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or220 V AC
No backuppower
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs+9RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 16 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1TMC11H
Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided byone storagebatterycabinet
≤ 5 U l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤ 16 U l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1TMC11H
Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided bytwo storagebatterycabinets
≤ 5 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H
-48 V DC - ≤ 9 U 1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 20 U 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipmentand carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-10.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
Figure 3-10 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there isno backup power
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by one battery cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by two battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-modebase station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrierconfigurations are shown in Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DCscenario
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30Hand transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, theBBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
Table 3-5 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different backuppower capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 3-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
PowerSupply
BackupPowerCapacity
Space forCustomerEquipment
CarrierConfiguration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or220 V AC
No backuppower
≤ 3 U ≤ 6 RFUs+9RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1TMC11H
Backuppowerprovided bya singlebatterycabinet
≤ 3 U l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤ 14 U l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1TMC11H
Backuppowerprovided bytwo batterycabinets
≤ 3 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+4IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+4IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H
-48 V DC - ≤ 7 U 1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 18 U 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment andcarrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-14.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
Figure 3-14 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is notrequired
When a single battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure3-15 and Figure 3-16.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
Figure 3-15 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby one IBBS200D/IBBS200T
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
Figure 3-16 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby one IBBS700D/IBBS700T
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure3-17.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
Figure 3-17 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby two battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station inthe case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shownin Figure 3-18.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
Figure 3-18 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
3.3 Unpacking CheckUnpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
ContextNOTE
When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:
l Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.
l Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweat-soaked gloves, or dirty gloves.
NOTICEl Powered on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
If... Then...
The total number tallies with the packinglist
Go to Step 2.
The total number does not tally with thepacking list
Find out the cause and report any missingarticles to the local Huawei office.
Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case.
If... Then...
The exterior of the packing case is intact Go to Step 3.
The outer packing is severely damaged orsoaked
Find out the cause and report any missingarticles to the local Huawei office.
The mark on the shockwatch label is red. Do not open the case. Claim compensationfrom the transportation company.
Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list.
If... Then...
Types and quantity of the article tally withthose on the packing list
Sign the Packing List with the customer.
There are any goods missing, incorrectlydelivered, or damaged
Send feedback to the local Huawei office.
CAUTIONTo protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep theunpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment,packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file thephotos.
----End
3.4 Restructuring ProcessThis section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade of BTS3900A(Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
Restructuring Process in AC Scenarios
Figure 3-19 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied withAC power.
Figure 3-19 Restructuring process
Restructuring Process in DC Scenarios
Figure 3-20 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied withDC power.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
Figure 3-20 Restructuring process
3.5 Powering Off the Base StationThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for powering off the base station.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
Context
From MBTS V100R009C00 onwards, the name of the element management system (EMS) ischanged from M2000 to U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If a replaced RFU is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking for TXchannels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
NOTE
l If a replaced RFU is faulty, its maximum output power locking for TX channels does not need to bedisabled.
l If the maximum output power has not been set for the RFU, the maximum output power for TX channelsis the maximum transmit power of the hardware.
1. Check the maximum output power has been locked for TX channels of the new RFU, andrecord the result.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinetnumber, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU. Run theDSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number,and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum output power forTX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has been locked.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query thecabinet number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU.Run the DSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number,slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximumoutput power for TX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power hasbeen locked.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site MaintenanceTerminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-clickLock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Query Config tab. On the displayed tab page,select the target RFU.
If... Then...
The maximum output power has beenlocked for TX channels
Go to Step 1.2.
The maximum output power has not beenlocked for TX channels
Go to 2.
NOTE
The maximum output power of some RFUs cannot be queried by running the DSP TXBRANCHcommand. If the value of the maximum output power invalid in the query result for an RFU, the RFUdoes not support the maximum output power locking.
2. Set the maximum output power of the RFU to 0 to disable the maximum output powerlocking.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable themaximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to reset
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum outputpower of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disablethe maximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command toreset the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximumoutput power of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site MaintenanceTerminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-clickLock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Config tab. On the displayed tab page, setthe parameters to disable the maximum output power locking for TX channels, and clickSet. Reset the RFU to make the configuration take effect.
NOTE
If there is more than one RFU, reset the TX channels of each RFU separately. If RFUs are cascaded,perform the operations from the lowest-level RFU to the highest-level RFU to minimize the impacton services carried by the RFUs.
Step 2 Ask the M2000/U2000 administrator to block the RFU.
l On the NodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the eNodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the BSC, run the SET GTRXADMSTAT command and set ADMSTAT to LOCK toblock all carriers of the RFU.
NOTE
l Block the RFU before replacing the module or separately replacing the RF jumper.
l If RFU to be replaced works in multiple modes, block the RFU in all modes it supports.
l An RFU working in GSM mode cannot be blocked, and therefore you can block only the carriers ofthe RFU in GSM mode.
Step 3 Verify that TX channels of the RFU are disabled. In this case, the ACT indicator on the RFUpanel is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).
Step 4 Power off the RFC.
If... Then...
RFC(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 in the RFC.
RFC(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11A in the RFC.
Step 5 Power off the TMC.
If... Then...
TMC11H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C in theTMC.
TMC11H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C in theTMC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
Step 6 Switch off all circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200T or IBBS200D.
Step 7 Power off the APM30H.
If... Then...
APM30H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPS in the APM30H.
APM30H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPU in the APM30H.
Step 8 Turn off the switch on the external power equipment for the BTS3900A.
----End
3.6 Restructuring the APM30H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30Hcabinet to be restructured.
3.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theAPM30H
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the APM30H.
Component Changes in the APM30HFigure 3-21 shows component changes in the APM30H.
Figure 3-21 Components in the APM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 FAN 02A To bereplaced
The FAN 02A needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D toenhance the heat dissipation capability.
2 SLPU Reused -
3 ELU To bereplaced
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.
4 PSU (AC/DC)
To bereplaced
The PSUs need to be replaced to enhance the powerdistribution capability.
5 Door statussensor
Reused -
6 EPS 01subrack
To bereplaced
The EPS 01 subrack needs to be replaced with anEPU05A to meet higher requirements for the powersystem.
7 BBU3900 Reused -
8 GATM To beremoved
-
9 EMUA Reused -
10 AC heater Reused -
11 SOU Reused -
12 Front door To bereplaced
The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heatdissipation capacity of the cabinet.
13 Junctionbox
Reused -
14 PMU To bereplaced
The PMU needs to be replaced to enhance the powerdistribution capability.
15 FAN 02B To bereplaced
The FAN 02B needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D toenhance the heat dissipation capability.
16 EPU03Asubrack
To bereplaced
The EPS 03A subrack needs to be replaced with anEPU05A to meet higher requirements for the powersystem.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
No. Component
Change Type
Description
17 Front door To bereplaced
The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heatdissipation capacity of the cabinet.
Cable Changes in the APM30HFigure 3-22 lists the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the APM30H.
Figure 3-22 Equipotential cable and power cables in the APM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
No.
Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P1
Inputpowercable forajunctionbox
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto the L1and N1terminalsin the ACOUTPUTterminalbox of theEPS.
l The otherendconnectsto the Land Nterminalsin thejunctionbox.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to theL1 and N1terminals in theAC OUTPUTterminal box ofthe EPU.
l The other endconnects to theL and Nterminals in thejunction box.
Reused
P2
Powercable forthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnectsto theLOAD0port onthe EPS.
l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton the fanassemblyin theAPM30H.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD5 port onthe EPU.
l The other endconnects to thePWR port onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.
Tobereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
No.
Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P3
BBUpowercable
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnectsto theLOAD1port onthe EPS.
l The otherendconnectsto the-48V porton theUPEU inthe BBU.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theBBU_0 orBBU_1 port onthe EPU.
l The other endconnects to the-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU.
Tobereplaced
P4
EMUApowercable
l Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype)
l The otherend iscord endterminals.
l One endconnectsto theLOAD7port onthe EPS.
l The otherendconnectsto thePWR1port ontheEMUA.
l Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype)
l The otherend iscord endterminals.
l One endconnects to theLOAD4 port onthe EPU.
l The other endconnects to thePWR1 port onthe EMUA.
Theycanbeusedcontinuouslyandtheirconnectorsneedto bereplacedonsite.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
No.
Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P5
SOUpowercable
l One endis OTterminals.
l The otherend is aC13connector.
l One endconnectsto the M4groundscrew,L1, andN1terminals(ACOUTPUT) on theEPS.
l The otherendconnectsto the ACINPUTport onthe SOU.
l One endis OTterminals.
l The otherend is aC13connector.
l One endconnects to theM4 groundscrew, L1, andN1 terminals(AC OUTPUT)on the EPU.
l The other endconnects to theAC INPUT porton the SOU.
Reused
P6
Heaterpowercable
l One endis OTterminals.
l The otherend is aC13connector.
l One endconnectsto the ACoutputwiringterminalin the ACjunctionbox andthegroundbar in theAPM30Hcabinet
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerinput porton theheater.
l One endis OTterminals.
l The otherend is aC13connector.
l One endconnects to theAC outputwiring terminalin the ACjunction boxand the groundbar in theAPM30Hcabinet
l The other endconnects to thepower inputport on theheater.
Reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
No.
Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P7
Equipotentialcable forthe frontdoor
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.
l The otherendconnectsto thegroundpoint onthebottomleft of thecabinet.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to theground point onthe front door.
l The other endconnects to theground point onthe bottom leftof the cabinet.
Tobereplaced
Figure 3-23 shows the signal cable changes in the APM30H.
Figure 3-23 Signal cable changes in the APM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
No. Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S1 Environment monitoringsignal cable
Both endsare DB50maleconnectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOMport onthePMU.
l Theotherendconnectsto thePMU_DB50 porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.
Both endsare DB50maleconnectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOMport onthePMU.
l Theother endconnectsto thePMU_DB50 porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.
Removed
S2 Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatussensor in theAPM30H
l One endis a 2-pinconnector.
l Theotherend isbarewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.
l Theotherendconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
l One endis a 2-pinconnector.
l Theotherend isbarewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H.
l Theother endconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
Reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
No. Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S3 Monitoringsignaltransfercable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN porton thePMU.
l Theotherendconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN port onthePMU.
l Theother endconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.
To bereplaced
S4 CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.
l Theotherendconnectsto theMON0port ontheUPEU intheBBU.
- - To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
No. Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S5 ELU signalcable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELU.
l Theotherendconnectsto theELUport onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELU.
l Theother endconnectsto theELU porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.
Reused
S6 Monitoringsignal cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor
Both endsare 4-pinconnectors.
l One endconnectsto thetransferbox inthe frontdoor oftheAPM30H.
l Theotherendconnectsto theFAN_EXT porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.
Both endsare 4-pinconnectors.
l One endconnectsto thetransferbox inthe frontdoor oftheAPM30H.
l Theother endconnectsto theFAN_EXT porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.
To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
No. Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S7 EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
l One endis a DB9maleconnector.
l Theother isan RJ45connector.
l One endconnectsto theRS-485port ontheEMUA.
l Theotherendconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thePMU.
l One endis a DB9maleconnector.
l Theother isan RJ45connector.
l One endconnectsto theRS-485port ontheEMUA.
l Theother endconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thePMU.
Reused
S8 Surgeprotectiontransfercable for themonitoringsignals
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theOUT0port ontheUSLP2in theSLPU.
l Theotherendconnectsto theEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEU intheBBU.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theOUT0port ontheUSLP2in theSLPU.
l Theother endconnectsto theEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEU inthe BBU.
Reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
No. Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S9 GPS clocksignal cable
l One endis anSMAmaleconnector.
l Theotherend is anN-typefemaleconnector.
l One endconnectsto theGPS porton theUSCU intheBBU.
l Theotherendconnectsto a GPSsurgeprotector.
l One endis anSMAmaleconnector.
l Theotherend is anN-typefemaleconnector.
l One endconnectsto theGPS porton theUSCU inthe BBU.
l Theother endconnectsto a GPSsurgeprotector.
Reused
S10 CMUE-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
- - Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN port onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H.
l Theother endconnectsto theMON0port ontheUPEU inthe BBU.
To bereplaced
3.6.2 Replacing the Front DoorThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door. The front doorsof the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures for removingthe front doors of the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
308
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Turn off the fan in the front door.
If... Then...
AnAPM30H(Ver.B) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
ATMC11H(Ver.B) isused
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker controlspower supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
AnAPM30H(Ver.C) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
ATMC11H(Ver.C) isused
Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breaker controlspower supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
Step 3 Remove the front door to be replaced.1. Remove the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door from the transfer box, as
shown in Figure 3-24.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
Figure 3-24 Removing the connector from the monitoring signal cable for the fan in thefront door
2. Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown
in Figure 3-25.
Figure 3-25 Removing the equipotential cable for the door of the cabinet
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two hinges from the front door, and remove thefront door, as shown in Figure 3-26.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
Figure 3-26 Removing the front door
Step 4 Install the new front door.
NOTE
l When installing the front door, use new removable pins.
l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the front door before delivery.
1. Install the new front door and insert the removable pins.2. Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on an inner wall.
Step 5 Replace an N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever.1. Remove the two M4 screws on the left N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever
and pull out the door support lever from the right N-shaped fixing bracket. Then move theleft N-shaped fixing bracket to the right part of the door support lever and remove the leftN-shaped fixing bracket, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
Figure 3-27 Remove an N-shaped fixing bracket
2. Take out and slide a new N-shaped fixing bracket onto the right part of the door supportlever and move it to the left part of the lever. Use two M4 screws to secure the new N-shaped fixing bracket, with a torque of 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), and place the right part ofthe door support lever in its original position, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-28 Install a new N-shaped fixing bracket
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
312
Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the number onthe barcode label starts from 212102, as shown by 1 in Figure 3-29.
If... Then...
There is a barcode label in the indicatedposition
Proceed with the next step.
There is no barcode label in the indicatedposition
Record the barcode (shown by 2 in Figure3-29) on the front door, and stick a barcodelabel carrying the same barcode to theindicated position.
Figure 3-29 Positions of the barcode labels
(1) Position of the barcode label on an inner wall of thecabinet
(2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of thecabinet
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.6.3 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The fanassemblies in the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the proceduresfor removing the fan assemblies from the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Optional: Remove the power cable for the fan assembly to power off the fan assembly. Skipthis step if this cable has been disconnected during the replacement of the front door.
If... Then...
An APM30H(Ver.B) is used
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
A TMC11H(Ver.B) is used
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breakercontrols power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
An APM30H(Ver.C) is used
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
A TMC11H(Ver.C) is used
Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breakercontrols power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fan
assembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 3-30.
NOTE
The procedure for removing a fan assembly from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H(Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) are the same. Figure 3-30 uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
314
Figure 3-30 Removing the fan assembly
DANGERWhen removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fanassembly.
Step 4 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position and tightenthe four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown inFigure 3-31. The recommended torque is 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
NOTE
When installing the new fan assembly, ensure that the air exhaust vent of the fan assembly is on the top.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
315
Figure 3-31 Installing the new fan assembly
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.6.4 Replacing the ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit(ELU).
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
The ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-32.
Figure 3-32 Position of the ELU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
316
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1. Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.
2. Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,as shown in Figure 3-33.
Figure 3-33 Opening the housing of the ELU
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown inFigure 3-34.
Figure 3-34 Removing the ELU
Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new ELU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
NOTE
l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure3-35. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 3-6.
Figure 3-35 Position of the barcode label
(1) Barcode label on the ELU (2) BOM code
Table 3-6 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed basestation
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macrobase station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmissionequipment
l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 anduses the -48 V DC power supply
l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395
RFC (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113818l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113819l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113820l Ver.C: 02113397
1. Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. Therecommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.
3. Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic labelinformation of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplatein the upgrade package.l If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.l If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.6.5 Replacing the Power SystemThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power system.
PrerequisitesBefore replacing the power system, ensure that the entire base station has been powered off.
Contextl Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.l The procedure for replacing the power system of the APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H
(Ver.C) is the same. The figures in this section uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.l Figure 3-36 shows component changes in the AC/DC power system.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
Figure 3-36 Component changes in the AC/DC power system
(1) PMU 01B (2) PSU(EPW30-48A)
(3) EPS 01subrack
(4) PSU(PSU4850A)
(5) EPU03Asubrack
(6) PMU 11A (7) PSU(R4850G2)
(8) EPU05Asubrack
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove cables from the EPS or EPU.1. Disconnect the ground cable for the EPS or EPU from the ground bar on the inner left wall
of the cabinet.2. Loosen the two captive screws on the metal protective cover on the left side of the EPS or
EPU, and then remove the protective cover.3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the plastic protective covers from the AC input and
output wiring terminal blocks on the left side of the EPS or EPU.4. Record the connections of the AC input power cable and AC output power cable, and then
remove the cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
5. Reinstall the two plastic protective covers, and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M4screws to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
6. Record the connections of the DC power cables on the EPS or EPU panel, and then removethe DC power cables.
7. Record the connections of the DC power cables that are connected to the power cables onthe right side of the EPS or EPU, and then remove the DC power cables.
Step 3 Remove the PMU and all PSUs from the EPS or EPU.
NOTICEThe original EPS or EPU contains one PMU and three PSUs and therefore is heavy. You areadvised to remove the PMU and PSUs before removing the EPS or EPU.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of eachPSU.
2. Pull the handle slightly to slide each PSU out of the subrack and remove each PSU fromthe subrack, as shown in Figure 3-37.
Figure 3-37 Removing the PSUs
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of the
PMU.4. Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU out of the subrack and remove the PMU from the
subrack, as shown in Figure 3-38.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
321
Figure 3-38 Removing the PMU
Step 4 Remove the plate for the power series 120 connector from the right side of the EPS or EPU, asshown in Figure 3-39.
Figure 3-39 Removing the plate for the power series 120 connector
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the remaining seven screws from both sides of the EPS orEPU, and remove the EPS or EPU from the cabinet along the guide rails slowly, as shown inFigure 3-40.
NOTICEThe EPS or EPU subrack is heavy. Therefore, you need to hold the subrack with one hand andsupport the bottom with the other hand to slowly pull the subrack out of the cabinet. This preventsthe subrack from falling and ensures personal safety.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
Figure 3-40 Removing the EPS or EPU
Step 6 Remove the metal support from the left side of the EPS or EPU.
1. Loosen the two captive screws on the cover plate of the metal support.
2. Remove the two screws from the metal support and remove the metal support, as shown inFigure 3-41.
Figure 3-41 Removing the metal support
Step 7 Place the removed EPS or EPU subrack, PSUs, PMU, and metal support into an ESD box orbag.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
Step 8 Optional: Install the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall ofthe cabinet. Only an APM30H (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an APM30H(Ver.C) is used, skip this step.
CAUTIONIf a guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature willincrease by 2°C to 3°C at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will reportovertemperature alarms if the environmental temperature is high.
1. Remove the guide rails on the left side of the position where the EPS or EPU is originallyinstalled, as shown by a in Figure 3-42. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve the screws.
2. Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mountingbar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton paddingcontacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in Figure 3-42.
3. Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 8.1 to secure the guide rails and tighten the screwsto 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown by c in Step 8.1.
Figure 3-42 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner leftside of the cabinet
Step 9 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet. If there areother modules installed at the bottom of the cabinet, skip this step.1. Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton
padding for about 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in Figure 3-43.2. Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completely
strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of thecabinet, as shown by b and c in Figure 3-43.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
324
Figure 3-43 Installing windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet
Step 10 Install the windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet, as shown in Figure3-44.
CAUTIONIf a guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature willincrease by 2°C to 3°C at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will reportovertemperature alarms if the environmental temperature is high.
1. Remove the M6 screw at the bottom of the right mounting bar.2. Place the windproof cotton padding next to the inner right wall of the cabinet, use two M6
screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
325
Figure 3-44 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet
Step 11 Install a new EPU.1. Place the new EPU on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the power system
into the cabinet.2. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven panel screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.) and one
hex screw to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.) so that the EPU subrack is secured.3. Use M6x12 screws to secure the ground cable for the new EPU to the ground bar. The
recommended torque is 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
----End
3.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-TeeThis section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.
Prerequisitesl The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. When
DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.l If the BTS3900A has two GATMs, remove the upper one before the lower one.
Procedure
Step 1 Power off the GATM. The following table lists the terminals that can be used by a GATM powercable, which may differ from the actually used terminal.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
326
If... Then...
AnAPM30H(Ver.B) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATMpower cable from the LOAD4 port on the EPS.
If anAPM30H(Ver.C) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATMpower cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPU.
Step 2 Remove the GATM.
1. Remove the monitoring signal cable from the GATM panel.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the ground cable for the GATM. Then use a wrenchto remove the RF jumper from the GATM.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, remove theGATM, and secure the removed screws on their original positions on the mounting bar, asshown in Figure 3-45.
NOTE
The method of removing the GATM from an APM30H (Ver.B) is the same as the method of removing itfrom an APM30H (Ver.C). The following figure uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.
Figure 3-45 Removing the GATM
Step 3 Remove the Bias-Tee.
1. Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable and PGND cable.
2. Remove the Bias-Tee.
3. Use a wrench to connect the jumper and the feeder to 25 N·m to 35 N·m (221.25 lbf·in. to309.75 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 3-46.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
327
Figure 3-46 Connecting the jumper and the feeder
(1) Feeder (2) Jumper
----End
3.6.7 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30H cabinetafter you restructure the APM30H.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 3-7 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 3-7 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe APM30H
EPC4connector
LOAD2 porton the EPU
3V3connector
PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe APM30H
A 1.1 m (3.61ft) cable isnewlydelivered.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
328
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
Input powercable for thejunction box
OT terminals(M4)
M4 groundscrew aswell as L1,and N1terminalsnear the ACOUTPUTsilkscreen onthe EPU intheAPM30H
OT terminals L and Nterminals inthe junctionbox
To be reused
EMUApower cable
EPC4connector
LOAD5 porton the EPU
Cord endterminals
PWR1 porton theEMUA
To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.
BBU powercable
EPC4connector
LOAD0 orLOAD6 porton the EPU
3V3connector
-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU
A cable isnewlydelivered.
Table 3-8 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 3-8 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
InstallationPosition
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensorin theAPM30H
2-pinconnector
GATE porton the PMU
Bare wire Door statussensor
To be reused
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU RJ45connector
ELU port inthe CMUEA
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor
Interconnection terminal
Power cablefor the fan inthe front doorof theAPM30H
4-pinconnector
FAN_EXTport on thefan assembly
A cable isnewlydelivered.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
329
Cable Connectorat One End
InstallationPosition
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA
RJ45connector
MON1 porton the UPEUin the BBU
A 1.1 m(3.61 ft)cable isnewlydelivered.
Monitoringsignaltransfercable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thePMU
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe fanassembly ofthe APM30H
A 1.1 m(3.61 ft)cable isnewlydelivered.
EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
DB9 maleconnector
RS-485 porton theEMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on thePMU
To be reused
Procedurel Remove related cables in the cabinet.
Remove the related cables listed in Table 3-7 and Table 3-8. If the cables have beenremoved during the module replacement, skip this step.
l Install power cables in the APM30H.
1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the APM30H, as shown by P1 in Figure3-47.
a. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD2 port on the panel of the EPU.
b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD2 porton the EPU.
c. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe fan assembly in the APM30H, and use a torque wrench to tighten the screwson the 3V3 connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).
2. Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-47.
a. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For detailed operations, seeAssembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling theEPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD5 port on the panel of the EPU.
c. Connect the one end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD5port on the EPU.
d. Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 porton the EMUA.
3. Install input power cable for the junction box, as shown by P3 in Figure 3-47.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
330
a. Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L1 and N1terminals near the AC OUTPUT silkscreen on the EPU, and tighten the terminalsto 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L andN terminals in the junction box, and tighten the terminals to 1.2 N·m (10.62lbf·in.).
4. Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P4 in Figure 3-47.
a. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to theinstructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
b. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD0 or LOAD1 port on the panel ofthe EPU.
c. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD0 orLOAD1 port on the EPU.
d. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on theUPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).
Figure 3-47 Installing power cables in the APM30H
5. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind the cable.
6. Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the APM30H.
1. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 3-48.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
331
a. Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on thetop of the ELU.
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU porton the fan assembly.
2. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure3-48.
a. Connect one end of the signal cable to the GATE port on the PMU.b. Connect the other end of the signal cable to the door status sensor.
3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door, as shown by S3 inFigure 3-48.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door toits transfer terminal.
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with a 4-pin connector to the FAN_EXTport on the fan assembly.
4. Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S4 in Figure 3-48.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to theCOM_IN port on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector tothe MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
5. Install the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 3-48.
a. Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_INport on the PMU.
6. Optional: Install the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, as shown by S6 in Figure3-48.
a. Connect the end of the signal cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS485 porton the EMUA, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the PMU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
332
Figure 3-48 Installing signal cables in the APM30H
7. Optional: Install the surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals.
a. Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of theSLPU.
b. Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in theBBU.
c. Connect the other three surge protection transfer cables, as shown in Figure3-49.
Figure 3-49 Connections of surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals
8. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind the cable.
9. Label the installed cables according to Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
333
3.7 Restructuring the TMC11H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11Hcabinet to be restructured.
3.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theTMC11H Cabinet
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the TMC11H cabinet.
Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Components in the TMC11HCabinet
There are two types of TMC11Hs:l One type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration A in
Figure 3-50.l The other type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as
shown in illustration B in Figure 3-50.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
334
Figure 3-50 Exterior and configurations of the TMC11H
No. Component
Change Type
Remarks
1 Fanassembly
To bereplaced
The fan assembly needs to be replaced to enhance theheat dissipation capacity.
2 SLPU To bereused
-
3 ELU To bereplaced
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.
4 DCDU-03C
To bereplaced
It needs to be replaced with the DCDU-12B orDCDU-12C.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
335
No. Component
Change Type
Remarks
5 BBU3900 To bereused
-
6 Door statussensor
To bereused
-
7 Environmentmonitoringunit type A(EMUA)
To bereused
-
8 AC heater To bereused
-
9 Front door To bereplaced
The heat exchanger in the cabinet needs to be replacedto enhance the heat dissipation capacity of the cabinet.
10 Junctionbox
To bereused
-
11 DCDU-11B, orDCDU-11C
To bereplaced
It needs to be replaced with the DCDU-12B orDCDU-12C.
Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Cables in the TMC11HCabinet
Figure 3-51 shows the power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet that housesthe BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power.
Figure 3-51 Power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
336
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
Installation Position
Connector
Installation Position
P1 Powercable forthe fanassembly intheTMC11H
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD8port ontheDCDU-03C.
l Theotherendconnects to thePWRport onthe fanassembly in theTMC11H.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD9port ontheDCDU-12C.
l Theotherendconnects to thePWRport onthe fanassembly in theTMC11H.
To bereplaced
P2 BBU powercable
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD6port ontheDCDU-03C.
l Theotherendconnects to the-48Vport ontheUPEUin theBBU.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD6orLOAD7port ontheDCDU-11C.
l Theotherendconnects to the-48Vport ontheUPEUin theBBU.
To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
337
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
Installation Position
Connector
Installation Position
P3 EMUApowercable
l One endis tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend iscordendterminals.
l One endconnects to theLOAD7port ontheDCDU-03C.
l Theotherendconnects to thePWR1port ontheEMUA.
l One endis tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l Theotherend iscordendterminals.
l One endconnects to theLOAD8port ontheDCDU-11C.
l Theotherendconnects to thePWR1port ontheEMUA.
They can beusedcontinuously and theirconnectorsneed to bereplacedonsite.
P4 Equipotential cable forgroundingof the frontdoor
Both endsare OTterminals.
l One endconnects to thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.
l Theotherendconnects to thegroundpoint onthebottomleft ofthecabinet.
Both endsare OTterminals.
l One endconnects to thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.
l Theotherendconnects to thegroundpoint onthebottomleft ofthecabinet.
To bereplaced
Figure 3-52 shows the signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses the BBU3900 and issupplied with -48 V DC power.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
338
Figure 3-52 Signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S1 Monitoring signalcable forthe doorstatussensor
l Oneend is a2-pinconnector.
l Theotherend isbarewires.
l Oneendconnects totheGATEport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Theotherendconnects tothedoorstatussensor.
l Oneend is a2-pinconnector.
l Theotherend isbarewires.
l Oneendconnects totheGATEport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Theotherendconnects tothedoorstatussensor.
To bereused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
339
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S2 CMUA-BBUmonitoring signalcable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Oneendconnects totheCOM_IN porton thefanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Theotherendconnects totheMON0port ontheUPEUin theBBU.
- - To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
340
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S3 ELUsignalcable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Theotherendconnects totheELUport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Oneendconnects totheELU.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Theotherendconnects totheELUport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Oneendconnects totheELU.
To bereused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
341
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S4 Monitoring signalcable forthe fan inthe frontdoor
Both endsare 4-pinconnectors.
l Theotherendconnects totheFAN_EXTport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Oneendconnects tothetransfer box inthefrontdoor oftheTMC11H.
Both endsare 4-pinconnectors.
l Theotherendconnects totheFAN_EXTport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Oneendconnects tothetransfer box inthefrontdoor oftheTMC11H.
To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
342
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S5 EMUAmonitoring signalcable
l Oneend is aDB9maleconnector.
l Theother isanRJ45connector.
l Theotherendconnects totheCOM_OUTport onthe fanassembly.
l Oneendconnects totheRS-485 porton theEMUA.
l Oneend is aDB9maleconnector.
l Theother isanRJ45connector.
l Theotherendconnects totheCOM_OUTport onthe fanassembly.
l Oneendconnects totheRS-485 porton theEMUA.
To bereused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
343
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S6 Surgeprotectiontransfercable forthemonitoring signals
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Oneendconnects totheOUT0port ontheUSLP2in theSLPU.
l Theotherendconnects totheEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEUin theBBU.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Oneendconnects totheOUT0port ontheUSLP2in theSLPU.
l Theotherendconnects totheEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEUin theBBU.
To bereused
S7 GPS clocksignalcable
l Oneend isanSMAmaleconnector.
l Theotherend isan N-typefemaleconnector.
l Oneendconnects totheGPSport ontheUSCUin theBBU.
l Theotherendconnects to aGPSsurgeprotector.
l Oneend isanSMAmaleconnector.
l Theotherend isan N-typefemaleconnector.
l Oneendconnects totheGPSport ontheUSCUin theBBU.
l Theotherendconnects to aGPSsurgeprotector.
To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
344
No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S8 CMUE-BBUmonitoring signalcable
- - Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l Oneendconnects totheCOM_IN porton thefanassembly intheTMC11H.
l Theotherendconnects totheMON0port ontheUPEUin theBBU.
To bereplaced
3.7.2 Replacing the Front DoorThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door. The front doorsof the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures for removingthe front doors of the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
345
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Turn off the fan in the front door.
If... Then...
AnAPM30H(Ver.B) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
ATMC11H(Ver.B) isused
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker controlspower supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
AnAPM30H(Ver.C) isused
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
ATMC11H(Ver.C) isused
Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breaker controlspower supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
Step 3 Remove the front door to be replaced.1. Remove the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door from the transfer box, as
shown in Figure 3-53.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
346
Figure 3-53 Removing the connector from the monitoring signal cable for the fan in thefront door
2. Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown
in Figure 3-54.
Figure 3-54 Removing the equipotential cable for the door of the cabinet
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two hinges from the front door, and remove thefront door, as shown in Figure 3-55.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
347
Figure 3-55 Removing the front door
Step 4 Install the new front door.
NOTE
l When installing the front door, use new removable pins.
l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the front door before delivery.
1. Install the new front door and insert the removable pins.2. Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on an inner wall.
Step 5 Replace an N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever.1. Remove the two M4 screws on the left N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever
and pull out the door support lever from the right N-shaped fixing bracket. Then move theleft N-shaped fixing bracket to the right part of the door support lever and remove the leftN-shaped fixing bracket, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
348
Figure 3-56 Remove an N-shaped fixing bracket
2. Take out and slide a new N-shaped fixing bracket onto the right part of the door supportlever and move it to the left part of the lever. Use two M4 screws to secure the new N-shaped fixing bracket, with a torque of 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), and place the right part ofthe door support lever in its original position, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-57 Install a new N-shaped fixing bracket
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
349
Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the number onthe barcode label starts from 212102, as shown by 1 in Figure 3-58.
If... Then...
There is a barcode label in the indicatedposition
Proceed with the next step.
There is no barcode label in the indicatedposition
Record the barcode (shown by 2 in Figure3-58) on the front door, and stick a barcodelabel carrying the same barcode to theindicated position.
Figure 3-58 Positions of the barcode labels
(1) Position of the barcode label on an inner wall of thecabinet
(2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of thecabinet
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.7.3 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
350
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 (Optional) Turn off the circuit breaker LOAD8 on the DCDU-03C. Skip this step if the fanassembly has been powered off during replacement of the front door.
Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.
1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fanassembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 3-59.
NOTE
The procedure for removing a fan assembly from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H(Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) are the same. Figure 3-59 uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.
Figure 3-59 Removing the fan assembly
DANGERWhen removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fanassembly.
Step 4 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
351
Step 5 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position and tightenthe four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown inFigure 3-60. The recommended torque is 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
NOTE
When installing the new fan assembly, ensure that the air exhaust vent of the fan assembly is on the top.
Figure 3-60 Installing the new fan assembly
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.7.4 Replacing the ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit(ELU).
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
ContextThe ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-61.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
352
Figure 3-61 Position of the ELU
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1. Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.
2. Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,as shown in Figure 3-62.
Figure 3-62 Opening the housing of the ELU
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown inFigure 3-63.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
353
Figure 3-63 Removing the ELU
Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE
l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure3-64. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 3-9.
Figure 3-64 Position of the barcode label
(1) Barcode label on the ELU (2) BOM code
Table 3-9 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed basestation
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macrobase station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmissionequipment
l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 anduses the -48 V DC power supply
l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
354
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113818l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113819l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113820l Ver.C: 02113397
1. Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. Therecommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.3. Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.
Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic labelinformation of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplatein the upgrade package.
l If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.
l If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.7.5 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDUs in an TMC11H.These DCDUs include the DCDU-03B, DCDU-03C, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-11C.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
The following table helps you determine whether a DCDU needs to be replaced with aDCDU-12B or DCDU-12C.
Cabinet Base Station ApplicationScenarios
DCDU ModelBeforeReplacement
DCDU ModelAfterReplacement
TMC11H(Ver.B)
DBS3900 It providestransmissionspace.
DCDU-03C DCDU-12C
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
Cabinet Base Station ApplicationScenarios
DCDU ModelBeforeReplacement
DCDU ModelAfterReplacement
It houses theBBU3900 and issupplied with-48 V DCpower.
DCDU-03B DCDU-12B
BTS3900A It providestransmissionspace.
DCDU-03C DCDU-12C
It houses theBBU3900 and issupplied with-48 V DCpower.
DCDU-03C DCDU-12C
TMC11H(Ver.C)
DBS3900 It providestransmissionspace.
DCDU-11C DCDU-12C
It houses theBBU3900 and issupplied with-48 V DCpower.
DCDU-11B DCDU-12B
BTS3900A It providestransmissionspace.
DCDU-11C DCDU-12C
It houses theBBU3900 and issupplied with-48 V DCpower.
DCDU-11C DCDU-12C
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
356
Step 2 Power off the DCDU according to the following table.
If... Then...
A DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B needs to bepowered off
Switch off the external power supply.
A DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C in a TMC11Hneeds to be powered off, and the TMC11H onlyprovides transmission space
Turn off the TMC circuit breaker on theEPS in the APM30H.
At a BTS3900A site, a DCDU-03C in aTMC11H needs to be powered off, and theTMC11H houses BBU3900 and is suppliedwith -48 V DC power
Turn off the SPARE2 circuit breaker on theDCDU-01 in the RFC.
A DCDU-11C in a TMC11H needs to bepowered off, and the TMC11H housesBBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power
Switch off the external power supply.
At a DBS3900 site, a DCDU-03C or DCDU-11Cin a TMC11H needs to be powered off, and theTMC11H houses BBU3900 and is suppliedwith -48 V DC power
Switch off the external power supply.
Step 3 Remove the DCDU.1. Remove all cable connectors from the DCDU.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal
block from the DCDU, as shown in Figure 3-65.3. Record the connection of the input power cables, and then remove the power cables.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from both sides of the DCDU, and
pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as shown in Figure 3-66.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
357
Figure 3-65 Removing the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block from theDCDU
Figure 3-66 Removing the DCDU
Step 4 Place the removed DCDU and protective covers in an ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install a new DCDU-12B.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
358
1. Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting earson both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.
2. Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.7.6 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC11H cabinetafter restructuring the TMC11H cabinet.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 3-10 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 3-10 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe TMC11H
EPC4connector
LOAD9 porton theDCDU-12C
3V3connector
PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe TMC11H
The cable isnewlydelivered.
BBU powercable
EPC4connector
LOAD6 orLOAD7 porton theDCDU-12Cin theTMC11H
3V3connector
-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU ofthe TMC11H
The cable isnewlydelivered.
EMUApower cable
EPC4connector
LOAD8 porton theDCDU-12C
Cord endterminals
PWR1terminal onthe EMUA
To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.
Table 3-11 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
359
Table 3-11 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensor
Bare wire GATE porton the fanassembly
Bare wire Door statussensor
Reused
CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assembly
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBU
The cable isnewlydelivered. Itis 1.1 m (3.61ft) long.
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU RJ45connector
ELU port onthe fanassembly
Reused
Monitoringsignaltransfercable for thefan in thefront door
Interconnection terminal
Power cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor of theTMC11Hcabinet
4-pinconnector
FAN_EXTport on thefan assembly
Newlydeliveredcable
EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
DB9 maleconnector
RS485 porton theEMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on thefan assembly
Reused
Procedurel Install power cables in the TMC11H cabinet.
1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the TMC11H cabinet, as shown by P1in Figure 3-67.
a. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD9 porton the DCDU-12C.
b. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).
2. Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-67. If a BBU isnot installed in the cabinet, skip this step.
a. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to theinstructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 orLOAD7 port on the DCDU-12C.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
360
c. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on theUPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).
3. Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P3 in Figure 3-67.
a. Replace the OT terminals at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4connector, as described in Table 3-10. For details about how to replace theterminals, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD8 porton the DCDU-12C.
c. Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 porton the EMUA.
Figure 3-67 Installing power cables in the TMC11H cabinet
4. Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then usecable ties to bind the cables.
5. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to the GATEport on the fan assembly, as shown by S1 in Figure 3-68.
2. Optional: Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S2 inFigure 3-68. If a BBU is not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to theCOM_IN port on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector tothe MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
3. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S3 in Figure 3-68.
a. Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on thetop of the ELU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
361
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU porton the fan assembly.
4. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly in the front door, as shown byS4 in Figure 3-68.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door toits transfer terminal.
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with a 4-pin connector to the FAN_EXTport on the fan assembly.
5. Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 3-68.
a. Connect the end of the signal cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS485 porton the EMUA, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.
Figure 3-68 Installing signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet
6. Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then usecable ties to bind the cables.
7. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
3.8 Restructuring the RFC CabinetThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFCcabinet to be restructured.
3.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFCThis section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
Component Changes in the RFCFigure 3-69 shows component changes in the RFC.
Figure 3-69 Components in the RFC
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 DCDU-01 To bereplaced
The DCDU-01 needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A toenhance the power distribution capability.
2 ELU To bereplaced
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.
3 Door statussensor
Reused -
4 FAN 01A To bereplaced
The FAN 01A needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C toenhance the heat dissipation capability.
5 RFU To bereplaced
The original RFUs are replaced by new RFUs withenhanced capacities.
6 DCDU-11A
To bereplaced
The DCDU-11A needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12Ato enhance the power distribution capability.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
363
No. Component
Change Type
Description
7 FAN 01B To bereplaced
The FAN 01B needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C toenhance the heat dissipation capability.
8 DCJunctionBox
- l The DC junction box in an RFC (Ver.B) uses one ortwo DC power inputs and provides two DC poweroutputs.
l The original DC junction box will be used in the RFC(Ver.C).
Cable Changes in the RFCFigure 3-70 shows the power cable changes in the RFC.
Figure 3-70 Power cables in the RFC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
364
No.
Cable RFC (Ver.B) RFC (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P0
DCDU-11Apowercable
- - Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to theRTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals on theDCDU-11A.
l The other endconnects to theDC junctionbox.
Reused
P1
Powercable forthe fanassemblyin theRFC
l One endis aparallelterminal.
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnectsto theFAN porton theDCDU-01.
l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton the fanassemblyin theRFC.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to theLOAD6 port ontheDCDU-11A.
l The other endconnects to thePWR port onthe fanassembly in theRFC.
Tobereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
365
No.
Cable RFC (Ver.B) RFC (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
P2toP7
RFUpowercables
l One endis aparallelterminal.
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnectsto one ofthe RFU0to RFU5ports ontheDCDU-01.
l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton anRRUamongRFU 0 toRFU 5.
l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).
l The otherend is a3V3connector.
l One endconnects to oneof the LOAD0to LOAD5ports on theDCDU-11A inthe RFC.
l The other endconnects to thePWR port on anRRU amongRFU 0 to RFU5.
Tobereplaced
P8
Equipotentialcable forthe frontdoor
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.
l The otherendconnectsto thegroundpoint onthebottomleft of thecabinet.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to theground point onthe front door.
l The other endconnects to theground point onthe bottom leftof the cabinet.
Reused
Figure 3-71 shows the signal cable changes in the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
366
Figure 3-71 Signal cable changes in the RFC
No. Cable RFC (Ver.B) RFC (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S1 MonitoringSignalCable forthe DoorStatusSensor
Both endsare barewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.
l Theotherendconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
Both endsare barewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassemblyin theRFC.
l Theother endconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
Reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
367
No. Cable RFC (Ver.B) RFC (Ver.C) ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S2 ELU signalcable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELUport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.
l Theotherendconnectsto theELU.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELU porton thefanassemblyin theRFC.
l Theother endconnectsto theELU.
Reused
S3 Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in theRFC
l One endis a 4-pinconnector.
l Theotherend is atemperaturesensor.
l One endconnectsto theTEMport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.
l Theotherend isboundnearbythe airintakevent atthebottomof theRFC.
l One endis a 4-pinconnector.
l Theotherend is atemperaturesensor.
l One endconnectsto theTEMport onthe fanassemblyin theRFC.
l Theother endis boundnearbythe airintakevent atthebottomof theRFC.
Reused
3.8.2 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. Theprocedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C) is the same as the procedure forreplacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
368
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Power off the fan assembly.
If... Then...
An RFC (Ver.B)is used
Turn off the FAN circuit breaker on the DCDU-01.
An RFC (Ver.C)is used
Turn off the SW6 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11A.
Step 3 Remove the original fan assembly.1. Record all cable connections on the panel of the fan assembly.2. Remove all the cables from the front panel of the fan assembly.3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears on both sides
of the fan assembly, and pull the box out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 3-72.
NOTE
The procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B) is the same as the procedure for replacinga fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C). Figure 3-72 uses an RFC (Ver.C) as an example.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
369
Figure 3-72 Removing the fan assembly
4. Place the removed fan assembly into an ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four screws on the mounting ears on both sides to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.8.3 Replacing the ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit(ELU).
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
ContextThe ELU is on the inner right side of the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-73.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
370
Figure 3-73 Position of the ELU
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1. Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.
2. Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,as shown in Figure 3-74.
Figure 3-74 Opening the housing of the ELU
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown inFigure 3-75.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
371
Figure 3-75 Removing the ELU
Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE
l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure3-76. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 3-12.
Figure 3-76 Position of the barcode label
(1) Barcode label on the ELU (2) BOM code
Table 3-12 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed basestation
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macrobase station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmissionequipment
l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 anduses the -48 V DC power supply
l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
372
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113818l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113819l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113820l Ver.C: 02113397
1. Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. Therecommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.3. Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.
Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic labelinformation of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplatein the upgrade package.l If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.l If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.8.4 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-01 or DCDU-11Ain an RFC.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
ContextAs shown by Figure 3-77, a DCDU-01 is located in the top 1 U space of an RFC (Ver.B). TheDCDU-11A in an RFC (Ver.C) is in the same position as the DCDU-01.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
373
Figure 3-77 Position of the DCDU-01
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESDgloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 2 Switch off all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU to power off the fan assembly and RFUs.
Step 3 Power off the DCDU.
If... Then...
An RFC (Ver.B)is installed in anAC powersupply scenario
Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPS.
An RFC (Ver.B)is installed in aDC powersupply scenario
Switch off the external power supply.
An RFC (Ver.C)is installed in anAC powersupply scenario
Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
374
If... Then...
An RFC (Ver.C)is installed in aDC powersupply scenario
Switch off the external power supply.
Step 4 Remove the old DCDU.1. Record the positions of all connectors on the DCDU, and remove the connectors.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal
block from the DCDU, as shown in Figure 3-78.3. Record the connection of the input power cables, and then remove the power cables.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from both sides of the DCDU, and
pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as shown in Figure 3-79.
NOTE
The procedure for removing a DCDU-01 is the same as that for removing a DCDU-11A. Figure 3-78 and Figure3-79 use a DCDU-11A as an example.
Figure 3-78 Removing the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block from theDCDU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
375
Figure 3-79 Removing the DCDU
Step 5 Place the removed DCDU and protective covers in an ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Install a new DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 3-81.1. Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 3-80.
Figure 3-80 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A
(1) Double-sided tape
2. Place the new DCDU-12A on the guide rails of the installation position and slide theDCDU-12A into the cabinet.
3. Tighten the two screws on each side of the DCDU-12A to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
376
Figure 3-81 Installing the DCDU-12A
(1) DCDU-12A (2) Cable claw
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.8.5 Replacing the RFUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the RFU.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or a pairof ESD gloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.
Contextl RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU
V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, and LRFU.
l If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) is not faulty, disable its maximum output power lockingfor TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
l Replacing an RFU interrupts services carried by the RFU.
l Replacing an RFU takes about 6 to 10 minutes.
l The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. WhenDRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced. For details abouthow to remove the GATM and Bias-Tee, see 3.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM andBias-Tee.
l A handle is used during the replacement. The handle is placed on the lower left side of thedocument holder on the cabinet door, as shown in Figure 3-82.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
377
Figure 3-82 Position of the handle
NOTE
The handle is only for pulling an RFU outwards horizontally.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, to preventelectrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the RFU to be replaced.1. Turn off the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to power off the
RFU.2. Label the power cable for the RFU to be replaced, and disconnect the cable.3. Label the RF jumper for the RFU to be replaced, loosen the DIN 7/16 male elbow connector
on the RF jumper, and disconnect the RF jumper.4. Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the fiber.5. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws at the four corners of the RFU, and then
pull the RFU handle to move the RFU outwards 50 mm (1.97 in.) to 100 mm (3.94 in.), asshown in Figure 3-83. Hold the RFU with one hand, and remove the RFU from the cabinetwith the other hand.
CAUTIONThe RFU is heavy. Therefore, handle it with caution.
6. Place the handle in its original position.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
378
Figure 3-83 Removing the RFU
Step 3 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC, as shown inFigure 3-84. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) isused, skip this step.
1. Strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton padding, and adhere the windproof cottonpadding to the position of "1" in Figure 3-84.
2. Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of theRFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure3-84, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.
3. Strip all pieces of windproof cotton padding left on the cabinet wall after removing thewindproof cotton padding.
Figure 3-84 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC
(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom rightside of the RFC
Step 4 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC, as shown in Figure3-85. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is used, skipthis step.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
379
1. Strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton padding, and adhere the windproof cottonpadding to the position of "1" in Figure 3-85.
2. Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom left side of theRFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure3-85, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.
3. Strip all pieces of windproof cotton padding left on the cabinet wall after removing thewindproof cotton padding.
Figure 3-85 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC
(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottomleft side of the RFC
Step 5 Install the new RFU.
1. Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the rails until it snaps into place.
2. Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners of the RFU panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.) tosecure the RFU to the subrack.
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction BoxThe DC junction box in an RFC converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.Skip this section if an RFC (Ver.C) is used, which has already been configured with a DC junctionbox.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
Contextl In AC scenarios, the RFC power terminals in the EPU are connected to the DCDU-12A,
which then distributes DC power to the RFC, the DC junction box is not configured.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
380
l In DC scenarios, the external power supply is directly connected to the DC junction box,which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the DC junction box, as shown in Figure 3-86.1. Remove the screw from the protective cover for the DC junction box and then remove
protective cover.2. Remove the two screws from the DC junction box and then remove the DC junction box.
Figure 3-86 Removing the DC junction box
Step 3 Install the DC junction box in the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-87.1. Remove the two M6 screws from the left wall of the RFC.2. Align the two holes on the right side of the installation plate with the two holes left in Step
3.1, and secure them with the two removed M6 screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).3. Place the DC junction box on the installation plate, and secure them with two M4 screws
to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
381
Figure 3-87 Installing the DC junction box
NOTE
It is recommended that the protective cover be reinstalled after all required cables are connected to the DCjunction box.
----End
3.8.7 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC cabinetafter you restructure the RFC.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 3-13 describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
382
Table 3-13 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe RFC
EPC4connector
LOAD6 porton theDCDU-12A
3V3connector
PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe RFC
The cable isnewlydelivered. Itis 1.1 m (3.61ft) long.
Input powercable fromthe DCjunction boxto theDCDU-12Ain the RFC
OT terminal(M6)
DC junctionbox in theRFC
OT terminals DCDU-12Ain the RFC
l A 0.3 m(0.98 ft)cablewith ablue wireand ablackwire isnewlydeliveredfor anRFC(Ver.B).
l Theoriginalcable isused in anRFC(Ver.C).Thenewlydeliveredcable canbedisposedof.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
383
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
RFU powercables
EPC4connector
One ofLOAD0 toLOAD5ports on theDCDU-12A
3V3connector
PWR port onone of RFU 0to RFU 5
Six RFUpower cablesare newlydelivered.Power cablesfor RFU 0 toRFU 2 are1.5 m (4.92ft) and powercables forRFU 3 toRFU 5 are1.1 m (3.61ft).
Table 3-14 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 3-14 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensor
Bare wire GATE porton the fanassembly
Bare wire Door statussensor
Reused
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU port onthe fanassembly
RJ45connector
ELU Reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in theRFC
4-pinconnector
TEM port onthe fanassembly inthe RFC
Temperaturesensor
Air intakevent at thebottom of anRFC
Reused
Procedurel Install power cables in the RFC.
1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the RFC, as shown by P1 in Figure3-88.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
384
a. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 porton the DCDU-12A.
b. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).
2. Optional: Install the input power cable for the RFC (from the DC junction box to theDCDU-12A), as shown by P2 in Figure 3-88. If the cabinet is an RFC (Ver.B) in anAC power supply scenario, skip this step.
a. Optional: Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+)and NEG(-) terminals in the DC junction box on an inner wall of the RFC, andtighten the terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.). In an RFC (Ver.C), one end ofthe power cable has been connected to the DC junction box. Therefore, skip thisstep for an RFC (Ver.C).
b. Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN+ andNEG- terminals on the DCDU-12A, and tighten the terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48lbf·in.).
3. Install the RFU power cables, as shown by P3 to P8 in Figure 3-88.
a. Connect the end of the power cables with an EPC4 connector to one of theLOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12A.
b. Connect the end of the power cables with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe corresponding RFU, and tighten the screws on the connectors to 0.4 N·m(3.54 lbf·in.).
Figure 3-88 Installing power cables in the RFC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
385
4. Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then usecable ties to bind the cables.
5. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the RFC.
1. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 3-89.
a. Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on thetop of the ELU.
b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU porton the fan assembly in the RFC.
2. Connect one end of the door status monitoring signal cable with bare wires to theGATE port on the fan assembly, as shown by S2 in Figure 3-89.
3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the RFC, as shownby S3 in Figure 3-89.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the temperature sensor nearthe air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.
b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEM port on the fan assembly in the RFC.
Figure 3-89 Installing signal cables in the RFC
4. Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then usecable ties to bind the cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
386
5. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
3.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200Dor IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.
3.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theIBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet
This section describes the changes to be made on the components and cables in an IBBS200Dor IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.
Component Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet
The component changes in the IBBS200D cabinet are the same as those in the IBBS200T cabinet.This section uses the IBBS200D as an example. Figure 3-90 shows component changes in theIBBS200D cabinet.
Figure 3-90 Components in the IBBS200D cabinet
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 ELU To bereplaced
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.
2 Storagebattery
Reused -
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
387
No. Component
Change Type
Description
3 Door statussensor
Reused -
4 Powerdistributionbox
To bereplaced
The power distribution box needs to be replaced toenhance the power backup capacity.
5 Junctionterminal forthe inputpowercable of theheatingfilm
Reused -
- Batterytemperature sensor
Reused -
Cable Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T CabinetFigure 3-91 shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the IBBS200T.
Figure 3-91 Equipotential cable and power cables in the battery cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
388
No.
Cable IBBS200D (Ver.B) orIBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T(Ver.C)
ChangeTypeConnector Installation
PositionConnector Installation
Position
P1
Powertransfercable forthe fan orTEC inthe frontdoor
l One endis a 3V3connector.
l The otherend is anOTterminal.
l One endconnectsto theCMUA.
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerdistribution box.
l One endis a 3V3connector.
l The otherend is anOTterminal.
l One endconnects to thePWR port onthe CMUE.
l The other endconnects to thepowerdistributionbox.
Tobereplaced
P2
RTN(+)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thestoragebatteries.
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerdistribution box.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to thestoragebatteries.
l The other endconnects to thepowerdistributionbox.
Tobereplaced
P3
NEG(-)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thestoragebatteries.
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerdistribution box.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to thestoragebatteries.
l The other endconnects to thepowerdistributionbox.
Tobereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
389
No.
Cable IBBS200D (Ver.B) orIBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T(Ver.C)
ChangeTypeConnector Installation
PositionConnector Installation
Position
P4
RTN(+)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thestoragebatteries.
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerdistribution box.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to thestoragebatteries.
l The other endconnects to thepowerdistributionbox.
Tobereplaced
P5
NEG(-)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thestoragebatteries.
l The otherendconnectsto thepowerdistribution box.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to thestoragebatteries.
l The other endconnects to thepowerdistributionbox.
Tobereplaced
P6
Equipotentialcable forthe frontdoor
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnectsto thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.
l The otherendconnectsto thegroundpoint onthebottomleft of thecabinet.
Both ends areOTterminals.
l One endconnects to theground point onthe front door.
l The other endconnects to theground point onthe bottom leftof the cabinet.
Tobereused(replacement oftheterminalsnotrequired)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
390
Figure 3-92 shows signal cable changes in the cabinet.
Figure 3-92 Signal cable changes in the battery cabinet
No. Cable IBBS200D (Ver.B) orIBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) orIBBS200T (Ver.C)
ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S1 Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatussensor
Both endsare barewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theRFcabinet(RFC).
l Theotherendconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
Both endsare barewires.
l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassemblyin theRFC.
l Theother endconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.
Reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
391
No. Cable IBBS200D (Ver.B) orIBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) orIBBS200T (Ver.C)
ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S2 ELU signalcable
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELUport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.
l Theotherendconnectsto theELU.
Both endsare RJ45connectors.
l One endconnectsto theELU porton thefanassemblyin theRFC.
l Theother endconnectsto theELU.
Reused
3.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution BoxThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power distribution boxin the battery cabinet.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
DANGERWhen replacing batteries, prevent short circuits or reverse connections between the positive andnegative poles of the storage batteries. All tools used for installation must be insulated to preventthe batteries from burning and to ensure personal safety.
ContextBefore replacing the power distribution box, remove all storage batteries from the cabinet.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
392
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Power off the battery cabinet.
If... Then...
An IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T(Ver.B) is used
1. Remove the tool-less female connector(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on theEPS.
2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker onthe EPS.
3. Turn off the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1circuit breakers on the power distributionbox.
4. Turn off the BAT circuit breaker on the EPS.
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C) 1. Remove the tool-less female connector(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on theEPU.
2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker onthe EPU.
3. Turn off the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1circuit breakers on the power distributionbox.
4. Turn off the FAN/TEC_SW2 circuit breakeron the power distribution box.
Step 3 Remove the storage batteries.
1. Remove the terminal covers from the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 3-93.
Figure 3-93 Removing the terminal covers from the storage batteries
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
393
2. Use temporary labels to mark the input power cables for the positive and negative poles on
the storage batteries and the serial connection copper bars between the storage batteries,and remove the input power cables and copper bars, as shown in Figure 3-94.
Figure 3-94 Removing the power cables for storage batteries
3. Reinstall the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.4. Hold the slings on the storage batteries and pull the storage batteries out. Then use both
hands to remove the storage batteries at the same layer, and place the storage batteries ina safe position.
NOTE
l Remove the baffle plate and storage batteries layer by layer from top down. After removing thebaffle plate at one layer, you must remove all storage batteries at this layer before removing thebaffle plate at the lower layer.
l Use both hands to hold each storage battery to avoid falling.
l When placing the storage batteries outdoors, do not expose them to the sunlight.
Step 4 Remove the storage battery power cables and power transfer cable for the TEC or fan in thefront door from the power distribution box.
Step 5 Remove the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 3-95.1. Remove the two screws from the left cover plate of the power distribution box and remove
the cover plate.2. Remove the four screws from the interior of the power distribution box.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
394
Figure 3-95 Removing the power distribution box
3. Take the power distribution box out and use insulation tape to wrap the OT terminals onthe cables connected to the power distribution box.
4. Place the power distribution box into an ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Install rubber protective caps onto the screws for the earthquake-proof support on the top of thebattery cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-96.
Figure 3-96 Installing rubber protective caps
(1) Screws for the earthquake-proof support (2) Rubber protective caps
Step 7 Install cables in the power distribution box.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
395
1. Remove the cover plate from the new power distribution box.2. Install cables in the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 3-97.
Figure 3-97 Installing cables in the power distribution box
(1) NEG(-) cable for theupper storage batteries
(2) RTN(+) cable for theupper storage batteries
(3) NEG(-) cable for thelower storage batteries
(4) RTN(+) cable for thelower storage batteries
NOTE
The power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the battery cabinet has been connectedto the new power distribution box before delivery.
Step 8 Install the power distribution box in the battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-98.1. Place the new power distribution box in the battery cabinet.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the four M4x8 screws in the power distribution box
to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).3. Install the cover plate on the left side of the power distribution box and tighten the two
M3x6 screws on the cover plate to 0.55 N·m (4.87 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
396
Figure 3-98 Installing the power distribution box
----End
3.9.3 Replacing the ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit(ELU).
Prerequisitesl The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves,
a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
ContextThere is an ELU on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet, as shown inFigure 3-99.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
397
Figure 3-99 Position of the ELU in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1. Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.
2. Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,as shown in Figure 3-100.
Figure 3-100 Opening the housing of the ELU
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown inFigure 3-101.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
398
Figure 3-101 Removing the ELU
Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE
l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure3-102. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 3-15.
Figure 3-102 Position of the barcode label
(1) Barcode label on the ELU (2) BOM code
Table 3-15 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed basestation
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macrobase station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmissionequipment
l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 anduses the -48 V DC power supply
l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
399
Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113818l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113819l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113820l Ver.C: 02113397
1. Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. Therecommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.3. Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.
Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic labelinformation of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplatein the upgrade package.l If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.l If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
3.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing storage batteries and cablesin the battery cabinet after you restructure the battery cabinet.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 3-16 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
400
Table 3-16 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
Powertransfercable for theTEC or fan inthe frontdoor
3V3connector
PWR port onthe CMUEA
OT terminals(M4, 2.5mm2 or0.004 in.2)
PowerDistributionBox
Deliveredwith thepowerdistributionbox
RTN(+)cable for theupperstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal PowerDistributionBox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
NEG(-)cable for theupperstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal PowerDistributionBox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
RTN(+)cable for thelowerstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal PowerDistributionBox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
NEG(-)cable for thelowerstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal PowerDistributionBox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Table 3-17 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 3-17 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU port inthe CMUEA
RJ45connector
ELU To be reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
401
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Remarks
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensor
Bare wire GATE porton theCMUEA
Bare wire Door statussensor
To be reused
Procedurel Install storage batteries and power cables in the battery cabinet.
1. Install the power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the cabinet, asshown by P1 in Figure 3-103.
2. Place power cables for the storage batteries. The NEG(-) cables are black and RTN(+) cables are red. P2 and P3 in Figure 3-103 show the routing of these power cables.
Figure 3-103 Installing copper bars and power cables in the battery cabinet
3. Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown inFigure 3-104.
NOTE
The battery cell should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reservedbetween battery cells.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
402
Figure 3-104 Installing the storage batteries
4. Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 3-105.
a. Remove terminal covers from the storage batteries.
b. Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for seriesconnections.
c. Install the NEG(-) cables and then RTN(+) cables for the storage batteries, andtighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
Figure 3-105 Installing copper bars and power cables in the battery cabinet
5. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind the cable.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
403
6. Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.l Install signal cables in the battery cabinet.
1. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 3-106.
a. Connect the ELU signal cable to the port on the ELU.b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU
port on the CMUEA.2. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure
3-106.
a. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the door status sensor.b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on the
CMUEA.
Figure 3-106 Installing signal cables in the battery cabinet
3. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind the cable.
4. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
3.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their CablesThis chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting themodules to external devices.
3.10.1 Installing the BBU CaseThis section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in anAPM30H or TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
404
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and a torque screwdriver.
ContextTwo BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the
BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.l When a second BBU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that the second BBU
be installed right above or below the original BBU without removing the guide rails.
Figure 3-107 shows the position for installing the BBU case in the APM30H and TMC11H.
Figure 3-107 Position for installing the BBU case
ProcedureStep 1 Optional: Remove the filler module from the position where the BBU case is to be installed, as
shown in Figure 3-108. If no filler module is installed in this position, skip this step.1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting ear on each
side of the filler module.2. Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.
NOTE
Install removed filler modules in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top to bottom. Redundantfiller modules can be discarded.
Figure 3-108 Removing the filler module
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
405
Step 2 Record the ESN on the BBU case and report it to the base station commissioning personnel. Fordetails, see Obtaining the ESN.
Step 3 Install cable claws on the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-109.1. Align the two cable claws with the holes on either side of the BBU case.2. Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw with a torque of 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
Figure 3-109 Installing cable claws on the BBU
Step 4 Install the BBU case, as shown in Figure 3-110.1. Place the BBU on the guide rails and slowly slide the BBU into the cabinet.2. Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ears on either side of the BBU to 2 N·m (17.70
lbf·in.).
Figure 3-110 Installing the BBU case
Step 5 Install the BBU power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-111.1. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructions
in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
406
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connectormust be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
2. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.
3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on theEPU in the APM30H.
CAUTIONWhen installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connectthe BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the EPU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
NOTE
Figure 3-111 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30H. When the BBU case is installed in a TMC11H, thecable connections are the same.
Figure 3-111 Installing the BBU power cable in AC scenarios
Step 6 Install the BBU power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-112.
1. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructionsin Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
407
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connectormust be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
2. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.
3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD8 port on theDCDU-12C in the TMC11H.
CAUTIONWhen installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connectthe BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
NOTE
Figure 3-112 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC11H. When the BBU case is installed in an extensionTMC11H, the cable connections are the same.
Figure 3-112 Installing the BBU power cable in DC scenarios
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
408
Step 7 Install inter-BBU signal cables. For details, see 3.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU SignalCables.
Step 8 Install the transmission cables. For details, see 3.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables.
----End
3.10.2 Installing the BBU ComponentsThis section describes how to install the boards into the BBU and SLPU.
Context
NOTE
This chapter only describes the procedure for installing components in the BBU. For details about the slotswhere the BBU components are installed, see the BBU configuration information.
CAUTIONTake correct ESD prevention measures, such as wearing an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, toavoid static damage to boards, modules, and electronic components.
Operation Rulesl When moving a board, hold the board with both hands, as shown in Figure 3-113.
Figure 3-113 Incorrect and correct operations for moving a board
l When installing a board, hold the front panel with one hand and support the edge of the
board with the other hand to insert it into the slot. Do not use only one hand to hold theboard or apply pressure to the edge of the board. Figure 3-114 shows correct and incorrectoperations.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
409
Figure 3-114 Incorrect and correct operations for supporting a board for installation
l When inserting a board into a slot, keep the board on the same plane as the slot. Do notbend the board or insert it at an angle. Figure 3-115 shows correct and incorrect operations.
Figure 3-115 Incorrect and correct operations for inserting a board
CAUTIONl Exercise cautions when holding and placing boards to avoid collision or scratches. Do not
stack or deform boards after they are unpacked.
l When inserting a board, ensure that it does not collide with the subrack and is properlyinstalled.
Installing the boards into the BBU
Figure 3-116 uses the WMPT and UPEU as examples to illustrate how to install boards in theBBU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
410
1. Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the fillerpanels from the slots.
2. If there are ejector levers on the panel, raise them.
3. Gently slide the board into the slot.
4. If there are ejector levers on the panel, close them.
5. Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
Figure 3-116 Installing the boards into the BBU
Installing the boards into the SLPU
Figure 3-117 uses the UELP as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the SLPU.
1. Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the fillerpanels from the slots.
2. Gently slide the board into the slot.
3. Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
Figure 3-117 Installing the boards into the SLPU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
411
3.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12BThis section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the DCDU-12B.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
When RFUs and RRUs are configured in the BTS3900A, a DCDU-12B must be installed in theRFC to supply power to RRUs.
Figure 3-118 shows the position of the DCDU-12B in the RFC.
Figure 3-118 Position of the DCDU-12B
Table 3-18 lists the specifications of DCDU-12B power cables in AC and DC scenarios.
Table 3-18 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables
Cable Color
Cross-SectionalArea ofthe Cable
One End The Other End
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
DCDU-12Binputpowercable(in AC
RTN(+)
Black
25 mm2 or0.039 in2,one group
OTterminal(M6)
RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals inthe INPUTpart of theDCDU-12B inthe RFC
OTterminal(M6)
RFC2terminal onthe EPU intheAPM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
412
Cable Color
Cross-SectionalArea ofthe Cable
One End The Other End
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
scenarios)
NEG(-)
Blue
DCDU-12Binputpowercable(in DCscenarios)
RTN(+)
Black
l 35mm2 or0.054in.2(lowsmokezerohalogen), onegroup
l 16mm2 or0.025in2, twogroups
OTterminal(M6)
RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals inthe INPUTpart of theDCDU-12B inthe RFC
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Externalpowerequipment
NEG(-)
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B.
Step 2 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 3-119.1. Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on the DCDU-12B contact the columns.2. Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as
shown in Figure 3-119.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
413
Figure 3-119 Installing the DCDU-12B
(1) DCDU-12B (2) Cable claw
Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-120. Skip thisstep in DC scenarios.1. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For details, see Assembling the OT
Terminal and the Power Cable.2. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal RFC2
on the EPU in the APM30H.3. Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the
DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input wiringterminals on the DCDU-12B. Then reinstall the protective cover.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
414
Figure 3-120 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in AC scenarios
Step 4 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-121.1. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For how to add a connector to the power
cable on the DCDU-12B side, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. Thetype of the connector at the other end depends on the onsite conditions.
2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cable to external power equipment.3. Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the
DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input wiringterminals on the DCDU-12B. Then reinstall the protective cover.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
415
Figure 3-121 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in DC scenarios
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cables.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
3.10.4 Installing the Air BaffleIn an APM30H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.B), air baffle must be installed in the vacant customerspace to prevent heat reflux in the empty space. If the vacant space in an APM30H(Ver.C)/TMC11H(Ver.C) has been occupied by air baffle, skip this section.
Procedure
Step 1 Place the air baffle in the installation position, and secure the air baffle to the right inner wall ofthe cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
416
Figure 3-122 Installing the filler module
----End
3.11 Installing Cables Between Two CabinetsThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade.
3.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.B)This section describes the changes of power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables,transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between cabinets duringthe upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).
Power Cables, PGND Cables, and Equipotential CablesTable 3-19 lists the changes of power cables, PGND cables, and equipotential cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
417
Table 3-19 Changes of power cables, PGND cables, and Equipotential cables
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theAPM30H (inACscenarios)
To bereplaced (anewcableneedsto bepreparedonsite)
OTterminal(M6)
ACINPUT porton theEPS
Dependingon theexternalpowerequipment
Externalpowerequipment
OTterminal(M6)
ACINPUT porton theEPU
Dependingon theexternalpowerequipment
Externalpowerequipment
Inputpowercablefor theTMC11H (inACscenarios)
To bereused, andtheconnector atoneendneedsto bereplacedonsite.
Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfit type)
TMCport ontheEPS
OTterminal(M6, 4mm2
or0.006in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-03C
EPC4connector
LOAD7 porton theEPU
OTterminal (M6,4 mm2
or0.006in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-12C
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
418
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Powercablefor thejunction boxin theTMC11H
To bereused
OTterminal(M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L3 andN3terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart onthejunction boxin theAPM30H
OTterminal(M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L andNterminalsneartheACOUTPUTparton thejunctionbox intheTMC11H
OTterminal (M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L3 andN3terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart onthejunction boxin theAPM30H
OTterminal (M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L andNterminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart onthejunction boxin theTMC11H
Inputpowercablefor theTMC11H(whentheTMC11HusesDCpowersupplied bytheRFCcabinet)
To bereplaced (anewcableneedsto bepreparedonsite)
Parallelterminal
SPARE2port ontheDCDU-01
OTterminal(M6,2.5mm2
or0.004in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-03C
OTterminal(M6)
Junction boxin theRFC
OTterminal (M6,25mm2
or0.039in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-12C
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
419
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theRFC(in DCscenarios)
To bereplaced (anewcableneedsto bepreparedonsite)
Dependingon theexternalpowerequipment
Dependingon theexternalequipment
OTterminal(M6,16mm2
or0.025in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-01
Dependingon theexternalpowerequipment
Dependingon theexternalequipment
OTterminal (M6,onegroupofcableswith across-sectional areaof 35mm2
or0.054in2, ortwogroupsofcableswith across-sectional areaof 16mm2
or0.025in2)
Junction boxin theRFC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
420
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theRFC(in ACscenarios)
To bereplaced
Powerseries120connector(blue)
Powerseries120connector(blue)on theEPS
OTterminal
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-01
OTterminal(M6)
RFC1terminal ontheEPUin theAPM30H
OTterminal
DCDU-12Ain theRFC
RRUpowercable
To bereused(1)
Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfit type)
One ofLOAD8 toLOAD13portson theEPS
Dependingon theRRUport
- EPC5orEPC4connector
One ofLOAD0 toLOAD8 portson theDCDU-12B
Dependingon theRRUport
PWRport ontheRRU
Inputpowercablefor theheater(in ACscenarios)
To bereused
OTterminal(M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L1 andN1terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart ontheEPS
C13connector
Heater/powerinputport
OTterminal (M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L1 andN1terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart ontheEPS
C13connector
Heater/powerinputport
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
421
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Powercablesfor abatterycabinet
To bereplaced (anewcableneedsto bepreparedonsite)
Powerseries120connector(grey)
Powerseries120connector(grey)on theEPS
OTterminal(M6,16mm2
or0.025in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalson theBATin thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200DorIBBS200T
OTterminal (M8,35mm2
or 0.05in.2)
BATterminal ontheEPUin theAPM30H
OTterminal (M8,35mm2
or 0.05in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminals ontheBATin thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T
Powercablesfor thefan inanIBBS200D
To bereplaced (anewcableneedsto bepreparedonsite)
Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfit type)
LOAD3 porton theEPS intheAPM30H
OTterminal(M4,2.5mm2
or0.004in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalson thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D
EPC4connector
LOAD8 porton theEPUin theAPM30H
EPC4connector
FAN/TEC_INPUTport onthepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
422
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Powercablefor theheating filmin theIBBS200D
To bereused
OTterminal(M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L1 andN1terminals orL2 andN2terminals onthejunction box
OTterminal(M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L andNterminalson thejunctionboxfor theheating filmin theIBBS200D
OTterminal (M8,35mm2
or 0.05in.2)
L1 andN1terminals orL2 andN2terminals onthejunction box
OTterminal (M4,1.5mm2
or0.002in.2)
L andNterminals onthejunction boxfor theheating filmin theIBBS200D
Powercablefor theTECin theIBBS200T
To bereplaced (anewcableneedsto bepreparedonsite)
Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfit type)
LOAD3 porton theEPS
OTterminal(M4,2.5mm2
or0.004in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheFANsilkscreenon thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T
EPC4connector
LOAD8 porton theEPU
EPC4connector
FAN/TEC_INPUTport onthepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T
Equipotential cable
To bereused
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin theuppercabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin thelowercabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin theuppercabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin thelowercabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
423
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
PGNDcable
To bereused
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barfor thecabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Groundbusbaroutside thecabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barfor thecabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Groundbusbaroutside thecabinet
NOTE
(1) The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length requirementsof the new RRU.
Signal CablesTable 3-20 lists the signal cable changes.
Table 3-20 Signal cable changes
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
MonitoringsignalcablebetweencascadedCMUEAs
Tobereused
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport ontheupper-levelCMUA
RJ45connector
COM_INport onthelower-levelCMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport ontheupper-levelCMUEA
RJ45connector
COM_INport onthelower-levelCMUEA
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
424
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Monitoringsignalcablefor abatterycabinet
Tobereused
RJ45connector
COM_INport ontheCMUA intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port onthePMU
RJ45connector
COM_INport ontheCMUEA intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port onthePMU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
425
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignalcable
Tobereused
RJ45connector
l COM_INport ontheCMUAintheRFC
l COM_INport ontheCMUAintheAPM30H
RJ45connector
l MON0port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheAPM30H
l MON1port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheAPM30H
RJ45connector
l COM_INport ontheCMUEAintheRFC
l COM_INport ontheCMUEAintheAPM30H
RJ45connector
l MON0port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheRFC
l MON1port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheAPM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
426
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
BBUinterconnectioncable
Tobereused
DLCconnector
One ofthe M0to M4portson theUCIUin theBBU
DLCconnector
l CIport ontheUMPTintheBBU
l S0port ontheUCIUintheBBU
DLCconnector
One ofthe M0to M4portson theUCIUin theBBU
DLCconnector
l CIport ontheUMPTintheBBU
l S0port ontheUCIUintheBBU
BBUalarmcable
Tobereused
RJ45connector
EXT_ALM0orEXT_ALM1port ontheUPEUorUEIUin theBBU
RJ45connector
Externalalarmdevice
RJ45connector
EXT_ALM0orEXT_ALM1port ontheUPEUorUEIUin theBBU
RJ45connector
Externalalarmdevice
Cablebetweentwocombined basestations
Tobereused
DB15maleconnector
GCKport ontheUCIUin theBBU
MD36orDB15maleconnector
DGLUb ontheDCTB
DB15maleconnector
GCKport ontheUCIUin theBBU
MD36orDB15maleconnector
DGLUb ontheDCTB
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
427
Cable ChangeType
Before the Change After the Change
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
External drycontactmonitoringsignalcable
Tobereused
Barewire
SLPU Dependingon theexternaltransmissionequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
Barewire
SLPU Dependingon theexternaltransmissionequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
Adapterused forlocalmaintenance
Tobereused
USB3.0connector
USBport ontheUMPTin theBBU
Ethernetconnector
Ethernetcable
USB3.0connector
USBport ontheUMPTin theBBU
Ethernetconnector
Ethernetcable
Transmission Cables and CPRI Electrical CablesTable 3-21 lists the changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables.
Table 3-21 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
E1/T1cable
To bereused
DB26 maleconnector
OUTSIDE porton the UELP inthe SLPU
Depending onthe externaltransmissionequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
FE/GEEthernet cables
To bereused
RJ45 connector FE electricalport in theOUTSIDE parton the UFLP inthe SLPU
RJ45 connector Router that isconnected tothe BSC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
428
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
FE/GEfiberopticcable
To bereused
LC connector l FE opticalport on theGTMU,WMPT,UMPT, orUTRP inthe BBU
l FE opticalport on theLMPT orUMPT inthe BBU
l FCconnector
l SCconnector
l LCconnector
Router that isconnected tothe BSC
E1/T1surgeprotectiontransfercable
To bereused
DB25connector
INSIDE porton the UELP inthe SLPU
DB26connector
E1/T1 port onthe GTMU,WMPT,UMPT, orUTRP in theBBU
FE/GEsurgeprotectiontransfercable
To bereused
RJ45 connector l FEelectricalport on theGTMU,WMPT, orUMPT inthe BBU
l FEelectricalport on theLMPT orUMPT inthe BBU
RJ45 connector FE electricalport in theINSIDE part onthe UFLP in theSLPU
Interconnection cablebetween FEopticalports
To bereused
LC connector FE optical porton the GTMU,WMPT/UMPT, orLMPT/UMPTin the BBU
LC connector FE optical porton the WMPT/UMPT, LMPT/UMPT, orGTMU in theBBU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
429
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
Interconnection cablebetween FEelectrical ports
To bereused
RJ45 connector FE electricalport on theGTMU,WMPT/UMPT, orLMPT/UMPTin the BBU
RJ45 connector FE electricalport on theWMPT/UMPT,LMPT/UMPT,or GTMU in theBBU
CPRIelectricalcables
To bereused
SFP20 maleconnector
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5ports on theGTMU inthe BBU
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5 (orCPRI0 toCPRI2)ports on theWBBP inthe BBU
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5ports on theLBBP in theBBU
SFP20 maleconnector
l CPRI0 orCPRI1 porton one ofMRFU 0 toMRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofGRFU 0 toGRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofWRFU 0 toWRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofLRFU 0 toLRFU 5
RF CablesTable 3-22 lists the RF cable changes.
Table 3-22 RF cable changes
Cable ChangeType
Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
RF jumper To be reused DIN straightmaleconnector
Antennafeeder
DIN elbowmaleconnector
ANT_TX/RXA andANT_RXBports on theRFU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
430
Cable ChangeType
Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Inter-RFURF signalcable
To be reused QMA elbowmaleconnector
RX_OUTAport on theRFU
QMA elbowmaleconnector
RX_INBport on anRFU
3.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC CabinetsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for variouscabinets when AC power is supplied.
Installing Input Power Cable for the APM30HThe input power cable for the APM30H connects the external power equipment to the inputwiring terminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the cabinets in the BTS3900A.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
The cabinets used by the BTS3900A in AC scenarios support the power supplies of 220 V ACthree-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire. Table 3-23 lists the inputpower cables that are delivered for the APM30H supplied with different type of power.
Table 3-23 Specifications of input power cables for the APM30H
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V AC three-phase power
L1wire
Brown OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l Preparedonsite
l Black cablewith dualinsulation
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
431
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
L2wire
layers andfour corewires
Black OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
L3wire
Gray OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Nwire
Blue OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V ACsingle-phasepower
L wire Brown OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l Preparedonsite
l Two wires (Land N), eachwith a singlecore and twoinsulationlayers
Nwire
Blue OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with110 V AC dual-live-wire power
L1wire
Black OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l Preparedonsite
l Three wires(L1, L2, andN), each witha single coreand twoinsulationlayers
L2wire
Red OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Nwire
White OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the APM30H.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add an OT terminal to each end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling
the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the APM30H, as shown in Figure 3-123, Figure 3-124, orFigure 3-125.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
432
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover for the ACinput terminals, and open the protective cover.
2. Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting barfrom the L1, L2, and L3 terminals.
NOTE
When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110 V ACdual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.
3. Route the power cable into the cabinet along the left side, connect each wire to thecorresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screw on the protectivecover to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).
Figure 3-123 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V ACthree-phase)
(1) Short-circuiting bar
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
433
Figure 3-124 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V ACsingle-phase)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
434
Figure 3-125 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (110 V ACdual-live-wire)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H
The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H include the input power cable for theTMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed powerfrom the APM30H into the TMC11H and other equipment. You need to reuse the power cablesfrom the APM30H to the TMC11H with replacing the connectors at both ends.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
435
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables arepurchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 3-24 lists the specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H.
Table 3-24 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H
Cable Color One End The Other End Remarks
Input powercable for theTMC11H
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector OT terminal(M6, 4 mm2 or0.006 in.2)
To be reused, andthe connectors atboth ends need tobe replaced.
NEG(-)wire
Blue EPC4 connector OT terminal(M6, 4 mm2 or0.006 in.2)
Power cablefor thejunction boxin theTMC11H
L wire Brown
OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002in.2)
OT terminal(M4, 1.5 mm2 or0.002 in.2)
To be reused
N wire Blue OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002in.2)
OT terminal(M4, 1.5 mm2 or0.002 in.2)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in theTMC11H.
1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
2. Add a connector to each end of the input power cable for the TMC11H and the power cablefor the junction box in the TMC11H according to the instructions in Table 1. For details,see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connectorand the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-126.
1. Remove the protective cover from the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminalLOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30H.
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminalsto 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
436
4. Reinstall the protective cover onto the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.
Figure 3-126 Installing the input power cable for the TMC11H
Step 3 Install the power cable for the junction box of the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-127.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L3 and N3 terminals in the junction
box of the APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the AC input terminals L and N in the junction
box of the TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
437
Figure 3-127 Installing power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the RFCsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from theAPM30H to the RFCs.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
438
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 3-25 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs.
Table 3-25 Power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercable for theRFC(between theAPM30Hand the RFCright belowtheAPM30H)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6, 25mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal(M6, 25 mm2 or0.039 in.2)
Cables arenewlydelivered.
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Input powercable for theRFC(between theAPM30Hand the RFCon the lowerright side)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6, 25mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal(M6, 25 mm2 or0.039 in.2)
Cables arenewlydelivered.
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC right below theAPM30H), as shown in Figure 3-128.1. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the RFC1 port on the EPU in the
APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the DCDU-12A in the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
439
Figure 3-128 Installing the input power cable for the RFC
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower rightside), as shown in Figure 3-129.1. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the RFC2 port on the EPU in the
APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the DCDU-12A in the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
440
Figure 3-129 Installing the input power cable for the RFC
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (OneIBBS200D or IBBS200T Configured)
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from theAPM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T when one IBBS200D or IBBS200T is configured inthe initial configuration.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
441
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Table 3-26 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Table 3-26 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Power cablesfor the fan inanIBBS200D
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Power cablefor the TECin theIBBS200T
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Power cablefor a batterycabinet
RTN(+)wire
Red OT terminal (M8, 35mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal(M8, 35 mm2 or0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Black
Power cablefor theheating filmin theIBBS200D
L wire Brown
OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.2)
OT terminal(M4, 1.5 mm2 or0.002 in.2)
To be reused
Nwire
Blue
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
442
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the cable.
1. Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS200D or IBBS200T) to be configured anddetermine the cable to be prepared and installed according to Table 1.
2. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
3. Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:
l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable
l Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable
Step 2 Install the power cable for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 3-130.
1. Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreenon the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Figure 3-130 Installing the power cable for the battery cabinet
Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 3-131.
NOTE
If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
443
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 onthe right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.
Figure 3-131 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly in the IBBS200D
Step 4 Install the power cable for the heating film in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 3-132.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L2 and N2 terminals in the junctionbox on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
444
Figure 3-132 Installing the power cables for the heating films in the IBBS200Ds
NOTICEWhen installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do notconnect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 3-133.
l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.
l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from thetop, not from the bottom.
Figure 3-133 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes ofthe IBBS200Ds
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
445
Step 5 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 3-134.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 onthe right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.
Figure 3-134 Installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T
Step 6 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
NOTE
When routing cables along the right side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cablesthat are routed in front of the power distribution box. For easy maintenance in the future, do not bind the cablesthat are routed in front of the power distribution box.
Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
446
Step 8 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts(Two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts Configured)
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from theAPM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts when two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts are configuredin the initial configuration.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables arepurchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Table 3-27 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Table 3-27 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Power cablefor the fanassembly intheIBBS200D
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Cascadingpower cablefor the fanassembly intheIBBS200D
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector The power cableis reused withconnectors atboth endreplaced.NEG
(-)wire
Blue
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
447
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Power cablefor the TECin theIBBS200T
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Cascadingpower cablefor the TECin theIBBS200T
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector The power cableis reused withconnectors atboth endreplaced.NEG
(-)wire
Blue
Power cablefor batteries
RTN(+)wire
Red OT terminal (M8, 35mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal(M8, 35 mm2 or0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Black
Cascadingpower cablefor thebatteries
RTN(+)wire
Red OT terminal (M8, 35mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal(M8, 35 mm2 or0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
NEG(-)wire
Black
Power cable(two wires)for theheating filmin theIBBS200D
L wire Brown
OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.2)
OT terminal(M4, 1.5 mm2 or0.002 in.2)
To be reused
Nwire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the cable.
1. Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS200D or IBBS200T) to be configured anddetermine the cable to be prepared and installed according to Table 1.
2. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
3. Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:
l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
448
l Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable
Step 2 Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P1 in Figure 3-135.1. Connect the OT terminal (M8) at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen
on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals near the BAT silkscreen in the lower part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Step 3 Install cascading power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-135.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the upper part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)wiring terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution boxin the upper IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Figure 3-135 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the storage batteries
Step 4 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure 3-136.
NOTE
If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
449
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 onthe right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen on the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
Step 5 Install the cascading power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure3-136.
NOTE
If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.
Figure 3-136 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the fan in theIBBS200D
Step 6 Install the power cable for the heating film in the upper IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure3-137.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
450
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L1 and N1 terminals in the junctionbox on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the upper IBBS200D.
Step 7 Install the power cable for the heating film in the lower IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure3-137.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L2 and N2 terminals in the junctionbox on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the lower IBBS200D.
Figure 3-137 Installing the power cables for the heating films in the IBBS200Ds
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
451
NOTICEWhen installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do notconnect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 3-138.l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from the
top, not from the bottom.
Figure 3-138 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes ofthe IBBS200Ds
Step 8 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P1 in Figure 5.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 onthe right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the FAN/TEC port near theINPUT silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
Step 9 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-139.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
452
Figure 3-139 Installing the power cable and cascading power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T
Step 10 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
NOTE
When routing cables along the right side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cablesthat are routed in front of the power distribution box. For easy maintenance in the future, do not bind the cablesthat are routed in front of the power distribution box.
Step 11 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 12 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
(Optional) Installing the RRU Power CableWhen the BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRUs are powered by theDCDU-12B in the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
453
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length
requirements of the new RRU.
l The colors and structures of the power cables are for reference only, which may differ fromthose of the cables onsite.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of theRRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installationguide.
l Table 3-28 lists the specifications of RRU power cables when a DCDU-12B suppliespower.
Table 3-28 Specifications of the RRU power cable
Cable Color One End The Other End Remarks
RRUpowercable
RTN(+)
Black EPC5 or EPC4connector
Depending onthe RRU port
l If theoriginalRRU powercable can bereused, youneed toreplace theconnector ontheDCDU-12Bside.
l If theoriginalRRU powercable mustbe replaced,you need toadd newconnectorsto both endsof the newRRU powercable onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
454
Procedure
Step 1 Route the RRU power cable into the cabinet through the cable hole.
Step 2 Remove the ground clip in the cabinet, and put the removed ground clip into the ESD bag orbox.
Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 3-140.1. Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC to expose the shield layer.2. Strip the shield layer to expose the two core wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC.3. Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m(10.62 lbf·in.).
Figure 3-140 Installing the ground clip
4. Install the PGND cables with the ground clips onto the two self-clinching studs on the right
wall of the RFC. Then tighten the self-clinching studs to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
Step 4 Add an EPC5 or EPC4 connector to the RRU power cable on the DCDU-12B side. For detailsabout how to add the connector, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable orAssembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Stick a temporary label onto the RRU power cable to be installed.
Step 6 Connect the one end of the cable to the RRU.
Step 7 Connect the EPC5 or EPC4 connector on the RRU power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD8ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 3-141.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
455
CAUTIONWhen installing the RRU power cable for an RRU that is added to a running base station, connectthe RRU power cable first to the RRU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
Figure 3-141 Installing the RRU power cable
Step 8 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
3.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC ScenariosThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for variouscabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
456
Installing Input Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theRFC and TMC11H when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables arepurchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
As listed in Table 3-29, power cables for the RFC have two specifications: 35 mm2 (0.05 in.2)and 16 mm2 (0.02 in.2).
Table 3-29 Input power cables for the RFC
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercable for theRFC
(35 mm2 or0.05 in.2, onegroup)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6,35 mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
Depending onthe externalequipment
The powercable is madeonsite.
NEG(-) wire
Blue
Input powercable for theRFC
(16 mm2 or0.02 in.2, twogroups)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6,16 mm2 or 0.02 in.2)
NEG(-) wire
Blue
Input powercable for theTMC11H(theTMC11H ispowered bythe RFC)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
OT terminal(M6, 25 mm2 or0.039 in.2)
The powercable is madeonsite.
NEG(-) wire
Blue
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
457
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the RFC.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cable for the RFC according to Table 1.
For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-142.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals
in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the external power supply.
Figure 3-142 Installing the input power cable for the RFC
Step 3 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-143.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals
in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the input power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG
(-) terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
458
Figure 3-143 Installing the input power cable for the TMC11H
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
(Optional) Installing the RRU Power CableWhen the BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRUs are powered by theDCDU-12B in the RFC.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
459
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of theRRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installationguide.
l Table 3-30 lists the specifications of the RRU power cable when a DCDU-12B suppliespower.
Table 3-30 Specifications of the RRU power cable
Cable Color One End The Other End Remarks
RRUpowercable
RTN(+)
Black EPC5 or EPC4connector
Depending onthe RRU port
l If theoriginalRRU powercable can bereused, youneed toreplace theconnector ontheDCDU-12Bside.
l If theoriginalRRU powercable mustbe replaced,you need toadd newconnectorsto both endsof the newRRU powercable onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
NOTE
If the RRU is to be placed at a longer distance, replace the original RRU power cable with a longerone.
Procedure
Step 1 Route an RRU power cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
460
Step 2 Remove the ground clip in the cabinet, and put the removed ground clip into the ESD bag orbox.
Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 3-145.1. Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC to expose the shield layer.2. Strip the shield layer to expose the two core wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC.3. Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
NOTE
When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules:
l When one to three RRU power cables are installed, put all the RRU power cables on one side of theground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in Figure 3-144.
l When four or six RRU power cables are installed, put two or three RRU power cables on each side ofthe ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in Figure 3-144.
l When five RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread three cablesthrough one ground clip and two cables through the other group clip, or thread four cables throughone ground clip or one cable through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 3 in Figure3-144.
l When seven to ten RRU power cables or twelve RRU power cables are installed, use two ground clipsand comply with the preceding rules.
l When eleven RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread fivecables through one ground clip and six cables through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration4 in Figure 3-144.
Figure 3-144 Installing the ground clips (side elevation view)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
461
Figure 3-145 Installing the ground clips
Step 4 Add an EPC5 or EPC4 connector to the RRU power cable on the DCDU-12B side. For detailsabout how to add the connector, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable orAssembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Stick a temporary label onto the RRU power cable to be installed.
Step 6 Connect the one end of the cable to the RRU.
Step 7 Connect the EPC5 or EPC4 connector on the RRU power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD8ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 3-146.
CAUTIONWhen installing the RRU power cable for an RRU that is added to a running base station, connectthe RRU power cable first to the RRU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
462
Figure 3-146 Installing the RRU power cable
Step 8 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
3.11.4 Installing Transmission CablesThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing transmission cables betweena cabinet and the external transmission equipment.
Installing the E1/T1 CableThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the E1/T1 cable.
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the
E1/T1 cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in the APM30Hthat is shown in Figure 3-147.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
463
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on the UELP, as shown in Figure3-147.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
Figure 3-147 Installing the E1/T1 cable
Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable outlet on the bottom left side of thecabinet.
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 4 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cable
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable.
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
464
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l An FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable.l When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the
FE/GE Ethernet cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing inthe APM30H that is shown in Figure 3-149.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE cable in a proper position within 1 m from the cable outletof the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-148.1. Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE cable, and strip the sheath off the cable
for about 40 mm to expose the shield layer.2. Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.3. Make the shield layer of the FE/GE cable in full contact with the ground clip, and tighten
the M4 screws on the clip until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 N·m.
Figure 3-148 Installing a grounding clip
Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) portnear the OUTSIDE label on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 3-149.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
465
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
Figure 3-149 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable
Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 5 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing the FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable.
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
466
l Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeledas MM.
l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multi-mode opticalmodule is black or gray.
l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
l An FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SCconnector, or LC connector at the other end.
l SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are notused simultaneously.
l SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they arenot used simultaneously.
l The method of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H is the same as the methodof installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in a TMC11H. The following describes the procedurefor installing an FE/GE fiber optic cable in an APM30H.
NOTICEAn optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore,you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 3-150.
1. Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the correspondingBBU board.
2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.
3. Lower the puller on the optical module.
4. Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.
5. Raise the puller on the optical module.
Figure 3-150 Installing the optical module
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
467
Step 2 Insert the optical module into the corresponding FE/GE optical port, as shown in Figure3-151.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
Step 3 Stick a temporary label to the FE/GE fiber optic cable to be installed.
Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in Figure3-151.
Figure 3-151 Installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable
Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 6 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 7 Replace the temporary label on the FE/GE fiber optic cable with an engineering label. Fordetailed operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
3.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in ACScenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cablesbetween cabinets when AC power is supplied.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
468
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 3-31 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable changes.
Table 3-31 Specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 APM30H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 3-152.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
469
Figure 3-152 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200TThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 3-32 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cables between twocabinets after the cable changes.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
470
Table 3-32 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Batterycabinetmonitoringsignal cable(between theIBBS200DorIBBS200TandAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA intheIBBS200DorIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port on thePMU in theAPM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 3-153.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
471
Figure 3-153 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T andAPM30H), as shown in Figure 3-154.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
472
Figure 3-154 Installing the battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200Dor IBBS200T and APM30H)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 3-33 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cables between twocabinets after the cable changes.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
473
Table 3-33 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe TMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 3-155.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
474
Figure 3-155 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),as shown in Figure 3-156.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
475
Figure 3-156 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC11H and RFC)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 3-34 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
476
Table 3-34 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe TMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe RFC
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor a batterycabinet
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA intheIBBS200DorIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port on thePMU in theAPM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 3-157.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
477
Figure 3-157 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T andAPM30H), as shown in Figure 3-158.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
478
Figure 3-158 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),as shown in Figure 3-159.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
479
Figure 3-159 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC11H and RFC)
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 3-35 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
480
Table 3-35 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector InstallationPosition
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theupperIBBS200D/IBBS200Tand lowerIBBS200D/IBBS200T)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe upperIBBS200D
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe lowerIBBS200D
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor a batterycabinet(between theAPM30Hand lowerbatterycabinet)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe lowerIBBS200DorIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port on thePMU in theAPM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 3-160.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
481
Figure 3-160 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T), as shown in Figure 3-161.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the upper
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA on the door of
the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
482
Figure 3-161 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between theupper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery cabinet and theAPM30H), as shown in Figure 3-162.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the lower
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
483
Figure 3-162 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower batterycabinet and the APM30H)
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 3-36 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
484
Table 3-36 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor a batterycabinet(between theAPM30Hand lowerbatterycabinet)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe lowerIBBS200DorIBBS200T
RJ45connector
COM_485port on thePMU in theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe TMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe RFC
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theupperIBBS200D/IBBS200Tand lowerIBBS200D/IBBS200T)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe upperIBBS200D
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe lowerIBBS200D
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 3-163.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
485
1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly ofthe RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of theAPM30H.
Figure 3-163 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T), as shown in Figure 3-164.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the upper
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA on the door of
the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
486
Figure 3-164 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery cabinet and theAPM30H), as shown in Figure 3-165.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the lower
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
487
Figure 3-165 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lowerbattery cabinet and the APM30H)
Step 4 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),as shown in Figure 3-166.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
488
Figure 3-166 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC11H and RFC)
Step 5 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
3.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48V DC Scenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cablesbetween cabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 3-37 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
489
Table 3-37 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(betweenthe RFC andTMC11H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefanassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU of theTMC11H
To bereused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown inFigure 3-167.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
490
Figure 3-167 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC11H)
Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs.
ContextMonitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of thecabinet. Table 3-38 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinetsafter the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
491
Table 3-38 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andTMC11H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theTMC11H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theextensionTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe extensionTMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown inFigure 3-168.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
492
Figure 3-168 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC11H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the extension TMC11Hand RFC), as shown in Figure 3-169.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the extension TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
493
Figure 3-169 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe extension TMC11H and RFC)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.
Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 3-39 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable change.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
494
Table 3-39 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenarioof 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs
Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(betweenthe RFC andTMC11H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefanassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU of theTMC11H
To bereused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweentheextensionTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA intheextensionTMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe RFC
To bereused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweentwo RFCs)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe rightRFC
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe left RFC
To bereused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown inFigure 3-170.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
495
Figure 3-170 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC11H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the extension TMC11Hand RFC), as shown in Figure 3-171.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the right RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the extension TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
496
Figure 3-171 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe extension TMC11H and RFC)
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between two RFCs), as shownin Figure 3-172.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the left RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the right RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
497
Figure 3-172 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweentwo RFCs)
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
3.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal CablesThis section describes the procedure for installing inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or single-mode base station.
Prerequisitesl The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.
l The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.
l The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable.
Optical modules can be divided into single- and multimode optical modules, which can bedistinguished as follows:
l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode opticalmodule is black or gray.
l The transmission mode is displayed as "SM" on the label of a single-mode optical moduleand "MM" on the label of a multimode optical module.
There is a label on each optical module, which provides information such as the rate, wavelength,and transmission mode, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
498
Figure 3-173 Label on an optical module
(1) Rate (2) Wavelength (3) Transmission mode
ContextThe following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBUsignal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU SignalCable Connections.
Table 3-40 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected
InterconnectionMode
Installation Position
BBU 0 BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT M0 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_U
M1 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_L
HEI port on the WBBPf HEI port on the WBBPf
NOTE
BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20minutes.
The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBUsignal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU SignalCable Connections.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
499
Table 3-41 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected
InterconnectionMode
Installation Position
BBU 0 BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT M0 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_U
M1 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_L
HEI port on the WBBPf HEI port on the WBBPf
UMPT+UMPT CI port on the UMPT CI port on the UMPT
NOTICEA color-coding tape marked Master is attached to one end of an inter-BBU cable that connectstwo UMPTs in different BBUs. When installing the cable, connect the end marked Master tothe CI port on the UMPT in BBU 0 and the other end to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 1.
NOTE
BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the opticalmodules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.1. Lower the puller of the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the port.3. Raise the puller of the optical module.
Figure 3-174 Installing the optical module
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
500
Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 3-175.
Figure 3-175 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable
Step 3 Install one or two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT. The followingfigure shows the installation of two inter-BBU signal cables.
NOTE
l You need to install two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+UL mode.
l You need to install only one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+L or GL+Umode.
1. Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0.2. Connect the other end of the cables to the CI ports on the UMPT_U and UMPT_L in BBU
1.
Step 4 Install one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the WBBPf to the WBBPf, as shown in thefollowing figure. The inter-BBU signal cable is installed only to interconnect the WBBPf in aBBU to the WBBPf in another BBU.1. Connect one end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 0.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1.
NOTE
l When two BBUs are installed in the APM30H, connect the signal cables, as shown in Figure 3-176. WhenBBU 0 is installed in the APM30H and BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H, connect the signal cables, asshown in Figure 3-177.
l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the sametype as those on BBU 0.
l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1Aand 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1.
l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
501
Figure 3-176 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (1)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
502
Figure 3-177 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (2)
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic patchcord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBUinterconnection signal cable before using cable ties to secure it. If another type of cable is usedas a BBU interconnection signal cable, directly use cable ties to secure it.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
3.11.8 Installing the RF JumperThe RF jumper transmits signals between the RFU and antenna system.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a cable cutter, PVC insulation tape, and an open-end wrench or torque wrench.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the RF jumper into the cabinet through the cable outlet in the cabinet according to one ofthe manners shown in Figure 3-178. Lay out the installed RF jumper according to the instructionsin Cabling Requirements.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
503
Figure 3-178 Routing of the RF jumper
Step 2 Install the RF jumper, as shown in Figure 3-180 and Figure 3-179.
NOTICEConnect each RF jumper securely to prevent RF signal leakage.
Figure 3-179 Installing RF jumpers for interconnected RFUs
NOTE
Inter-RFU RF signal cables have been installed in the cabinet before delivery. You only need to check whetherthe cables are securely connected.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
504
Figure 3-180 Installing RF jumpers for independent RFUs
1. Connect the DIN connector on the RF jumper to the ANT port on the RFU panel.2. Use a 32 mm (1.26 in.) open-end wrench or torque wrench to tighten the two DIN
connectors from bottom to top. Ensure that the tightening torque reaches 25 N·m to 35 N·m(221.27 lbf·in. to 309.78 lbf·in.).
Figure 3-181 Tightening the DIN connectors
Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumper according to the instructions in Attaching the Color Ring.
Step 4 Connect the DIN straight male connector at the other end of the jumper to the connector on thefeeder.
----End
3.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical CableThe CPRI electrical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RFU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
505
Procedure
Step 1 Insert the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables into the CPRI ports on thecorresponding board in the BBU.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D) HardwareDescription.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing CPRI Cables.
Step 2 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cable through the cable hole on the inner left side ofthe power cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the correspondingRFU, as shown in Figure 3-182.
Figure 3-182 Installing the CPRI electrical cable
Step 3 Connect the SFP connector on the CPRI electrical cable to the CPRI0 port on the panel of theRFU, as shown in Figure 3-182.
Step 4 Route the cables by referring to Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind the cables.
NOTE
l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cable at the top of the DCDU-12A in the RFC or in thebase of the RFC.
l Lay out the cable according to the manners in Figure 3-182. Ensure that the cable is routed to the RFUthrough the cable bridge above the RFUs.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
506
Step 5 Attach labels to the installed cables. For details, see Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
3.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic CableThe CPRI fiber optic cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RRU.
Contextl Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeled
as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multi-mode optical
module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.l For details about the connections of CPRI fiber optic cables, see "CPRI Cable Connections"
in the BTS900A Hardware Description.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes maybe abnormal. Therefore, you must insert an fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical modulewithin 20 minutes.
For the details about the cable connections,l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base
Station Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 3-183.1. Lower the puller on the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU/WBBP/LBBP. Then insert an
optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU.
NOTE
Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.
3. Raise the puller on the optical module.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
507
Figure 3-183 Installing the optical module
Step 2 Install a CPRI fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 3-184.1. Stick a temporary label to the CPRI fiber optic cable to be installed.2. Remove the dustproof cap from the connector on the fiber optic cable.3. Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into
the optical modules in the WBBPLBBPGTMU, WBBP, or LBBPGTMU or WBBP, andthen insert the DLC connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical modulein the RF module.
NOTICEl When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the break-out fiber optic
cables on the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.03 m (1.18in.), respectively.
l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX port on the BBU must be connected to theTX port on the RF module, and the RX port on the BBU must be connected to the RXport on the RF module.
Figure 3-184 Installing the CPRI fiber optic cable
Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cable along the left of the cabinet, and then lead it out of the cabinetfrom the cable hole on the left of the bottom. For details, see Cabling Requirements.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
508
Step 4 Replace the temporary label on the CPRI fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
3.12 Installation ChecklistAfter the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installationenvironment, and cable-related items.
Cabinet Installation ChecklistTable 3-42 describes the cabinet installation checklist.
Table 3-42 Cabinet installation checklist
No. Item
1 The installation position of the cabinet strictly complies with the engineeringdesign.
2 The base is securely installed.
3 All the bolts, including those for electrical connections, are tightened. The springwashers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.
4 The cabinet is neat and clean.
5 The paint on the surface is satisfactory. The damaged paint is repaired. For details,see 3.14.3 Repainting.
6 Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.
Installation Environment ChecklistTable 3-43 describes the installation environment checklist.
Table 3-43 Installation environment checklist
No. Item
1 No excessive straps or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.
2 No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around the cabinet.
3 Antirust powder on the door of the cabinet is cleared.
Electrical Connection ChecklistTable 3-44 describes the electrical connection checklist.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
509
Table 3-44 Electrical connection checklist
No. Item
1 All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters. Thereshould not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed.
2 The PGND cable is securely connected and the AC input power cable and cablesin the cabinet are correctly connected according to the electrical design of the powersystem. The screws are tightened. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not short-circuited.
3 The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off rather than coiled.
4 The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are securely solderedor crimped.
5 The bare wires and the terminal handles at the wiring terminals are coated with heatshrink tubing.
6 The flat washer and the spring washer are well mounted on all OT terminals.
7 The exterior of the battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.
8 The shell of the battery is clean without any leakage trace.
9 The wiring post on the battery stands properly without any damage, and the post isnot covered with any acid substances.
10 The pressure relief valve of the battery is not deformed, and no liquid leaks.
11 The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positiveand negative poles.
12 The voltage of the battery is normal.l The voltage of a 2 V battery cell ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.l The voltage of a 12 V battery cell ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.l The total voltage of the batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.
13 The circuit breakers for the batteries are set to OFF.
Cable Installation ChecklistTable 3-45 describes the cable installation checklist.
Table 3-45 Cable installation checklist
No. Item
1 All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are securelyconnected. All cable connectors at the bottom of the cabinet are securely installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
510
No. Item
2 The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and facethe same direction.
3 Different types of power cables are bound separately when being routed, forexample, the power cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber optic cables, and E1/T1/FE cables.
4 The layout of all cables facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion. Forexample, the maintenance transfer cable is bound to the outside of the BBU cableclaw, as shown in Figure 3-185.
5 Legible labels are attached to both ends of all cables.
6 The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are smoothwithout sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.2 in.) of theoutdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.
7 The port that no cable is connected to is properly protected.
8 The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid false connection that will causean abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).
Figure 3-185 Checking the maintenance transfer cable
Checklist for the Hardware UpgradeTable 3-46 describes the checklist for the hardware upgrade.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
511
Table 3-46 Checklist for the hardware upgrade
No.
Cabinet Type Item
1 APM30H/TMC11H
The ground cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 3.6.5 Replacing the Power System.
2 APM30H/TMC11H
The vacant customer space in the cabinet has been configured withthe filler module.
3 APM30H/TMC11H
The ELU has been replaced, For detailed operations, see 3.7.4Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
4 APM30H The input power cable for the APM30H has been replaced. Fordetailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cable for theAPM30H.
5 APM30H The input power cable for the junction box has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
6 APM30H The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
7 APM30H The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
8 APM30H The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 3.10.1 Installingthe BBU Case.
9 APM30H The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
10 APM30H The monitoring signal transfer cable and CMUEA-BBUmonitoring signal cable have been installed. For detailedoperations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
11 APM30H The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
12 TMC11H The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
13 TMC11H The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 3.7.6 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
14 TMC11H The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 3.10.1 Installingthe BBU Case.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
512
No.
Cabinet Type Item
15 TMC11H The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
16 TMC11H The CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable has been installed.For detailed operations, see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in theCabinet.
17 TMC11H The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 3.7.6 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
18 RFC The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 3.8.3Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
19 RFC The monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor,monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, and ELU signalcable have been installed. For detailed operations, see 3.8.7Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
20 RFC In DC scenarios, the junction box has been installed. For detailedoperations, see 3.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC JunctionBox.
21 RFC In AC scenarios, the input power cable for the RFC has beenreplaced. For detailed operations, see Installing Power Cablesfrom the APM30H to the RFCs.
22 RFC The shield layer of the RRU power cable has been grounded. Fordetailed operations, see (Optional) Installing the RRU PowerCable or (Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable.
23 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 3.9.3Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
3.13 Powering On a Base StationThis section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supplyto the components in a cabinet.
Prerequisitesl Input power cables for the BTS3900A are correctly connected.
l The power supply to the BTS3900A meets the requirements of the power system.
l The external power supply to the BTS3900A has been shut off.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
513
l All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.l All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been set to OFF.l All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T have
been set to OFF.l Switch on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T has been set to OFF.l Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.l Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.
Context
DANGERExercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves some high voltageoperations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact with the input voltage usinga damp object may be fatal.
NOTICEl Power on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it. If you power off a cabinet or
BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU for
maintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
514
Table 3-47 Circuit breakers in BTS3900A base stations
BaseStation
Power Device(1) Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A(Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,DCDU-03C, or powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A or EPS 01Cl BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2
circuit breakers on the power distribution boxin an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU0 toRFU5 circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 (Thecircuit breakers control the power input to theBBU, fan assembly, and RFUs.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control thepower input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fanassembly, and customer transmissionequipment.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control thepower input to the BBU, fan assembly, andcustomer transmission equipment.)
BTS3900A(Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 orEPU03A-04,DCDU-11A,DCDU-11B,DCDU-11C, and powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02 orEPU03A-04
l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2circuit breakers on the power distribution boxin an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11A (SW0 to SW8 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,FAN 01B, and BBU 0 and BBU 1. The SW9circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA, and FAN 02B. TheSW9 circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11C (SW0 to SW5 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the transmissionequipment. SW6 to SW9 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to BBU 0 and BBU 1,EMUA, and FAN 02B.)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
515
BaseStation
Power Device(1) Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A(Ver.D)
EPU05A-02 orEPU05A-04,DCDU-12A,DCDU-12B,DCDU-12C, and powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02 orEPU05A-04
l BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers onthe power distribution box in an IBBS200D orIBBS200T
l Switch on the power distribution box in anIBBS700D or IBBS700T
NOTE
(1) In this section, EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 and EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 are shortened to EPU, EPS 01Aor EPS 01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.
ProcessThe following figure shows the power-on check process.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
516
Figure 3-186 Power-on check process
Procedurel Power on an AC base station.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
517
1. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply andthe ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.
2. Optional: If the base station is configured with a battery cabinet, set the BAT circuitbreaker on the EPU or EPS to ON and set the circuit breaker on the power distributionbox in the battery cabinet to ON. Otherwise, skip this substep.
3. Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and batterycabinet.
4. Set the circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS for the corresponding components to ON,and check the power supply status of each component.
Table 3-48 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU or EPS
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
APM30H PMU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
PSU l The power indicator is steady green.l The fault indicator is steady off.
Fanassembly
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
IBBS200DorIBBS200T
Fan or TECin the frontdoor
The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the RUNindicator on the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA isblinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1sand off for 1s).
IBBS700D Fan in thefront doorandCMUEA
The fan is working properly, and the RUN indicatoron the CMUEA is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
IBBS700T TEC andCMUF
The TEC is working properly, and the RUN indicatoron the CMUF is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
5. Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on each DCDU
in the RFC and TMC11H to ON. Skip this substep if there is no circuit breaker on theDCDU, such as the DCDU-12A, DCDU-12B, and DCDU-12C.
6. Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.7. Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
518
Table 3-49 Normal status of components in the cabinet
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
APM30H BBU l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and offfor 1s). The indicators indicating the status of theCPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.
TMC11H FAN 02A/FAN 02B/FAN 02D
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
RFC RFU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
FAN 01A/FAN 01B/FAN 01C
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
- RRU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, checkwhether the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.
NOTE
The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other indicators, seeBBU Hardware Description.
8. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
519
Table 3-50 Troubleshooting
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to allcomponents in thecabinet
Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit
breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.
Failure in the powersupply to a board inthe BBU
Check as follows:1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the
slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the statusof indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove theboard, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards ofthe same type, and check the status of the indicators.l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
520
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to othercomponents in thecabinet
Check as follows:1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skipthis step and go to step 2 if this component does not useany fuse terminal block.l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse accordingto the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, goto step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to thecomponent.l If the input power is normal, replace the component.l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connectedsecurely. If the power cable is not securelyconnected, turn off the circuit breaker for thecomponent (if there is no circuit breaker for thecomponent, remove the connector from the powerunit) and reconnect the power cable. If the powercable is securely connected, the protector (such ascircuit breaker or fuse) on the component may bedamaged. In this case, replace the damagedprotector. If the protector cannot be replaced,replace the upper-level power distributioncomponent.
l Power on a DC base station.
1. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply andthe ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.
2. Turn on the external power switch to power on the RFC cabinet. Power on theTMC11H if it is configured as a transmission cabinet.
3. Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the RFC to ON.Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as DCDU-12Aand DCDU-12B.
4. Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the TMC11Hto ON. Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such asDCDU-12C.
5. Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.6. Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
521
Table 3-51 Normal status of components in the cabinet
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
TMC11H BBU l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and offfor 1s).
FAN 02A/FAN 02B/FAN 02D
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
RFC RFU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
FAN 01A/FAN 01B/FAN 01C
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
- RRU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
7. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,
handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.
Table 3-52 Troubleshooting
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to allcomponents in thecabinet
Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit
breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
522
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to a board inthe BBU
Check as follows:1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the
slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the statusof indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove theboard, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards ofthe same type, and check the status of the indicators.l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.
Failure in the powersupply to othercomponents in thecabinet
Check as follows:1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skipthis step and go to step 2 if this component does not useany fuse terminal block.l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse accordingto the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, goto step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to thecomponent.l If the input power is normal, replace the component.l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connectedsecurely. If the power cable is not securelyconnected, turn off the circuit breaker for thecomponent (if there is no circuit breaker for thecomponent, remove the connector from the powerunit) and reconnect the power cable. If the powercable is securely connected, the protector (such ascircuit breaker or fuse) on the component may bedamaged. In this case, replace the damagedprotector. If the protector cannot be replaced,replace the upper-level power distributioncomponent.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
523
3.14 Subsequent OperationsThis section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgradedand checked.
3.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet DoorThe barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label on the cabinetdoor need to be replaced after the upgrade.
ContextThe front door of the cabinet has been replaced during restructuring of the APM30H andTMC11H cabinets. You only need to replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card,and power distribution label.
Procedure
Step 1 Stick the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to theAPM30H and TMC11H cabinets. Their positions are shown in Figure 3-187.
Figure 3-187 Positions of labels for the cabinet
(1) Barcode label (2) Qualification card (3) Power distribution label (4) Nameplate
Step 2 Replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label in the RFCand IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinets.1. Take out the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label
for the cabinet.2. Stick the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to
the same positions as the original labels in the cabinet.
----End
3.14.2 Sealing the Cable OutletsAfter all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable outlets on the cabinet and base.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
524
Procedure
Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes on both sides of the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC,IBBS200T, or IBBS200D cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-188 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, IBBS200T, orIBBS200D cabinet
(1) Fireproof mud
Step 2 Seal the RF cable holes in the RFC, as shown in the following figure.1. Route the cables through the corresponding cable holes, and install the cable outlet module
on the bottom of the cabinet.2. Use rubber caps to seal the unused cable holes in the cable outlet module.3. Tighten the screw on the cable outlet module.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
525
Figure 3-189 Sealing the cable holes in the RFC
(1) Cable holes for thepower cables
(2) Cable holes for CPRIelectrical cables
(3) Cable hole for themonitoring signal cable
(4) Cable hole for theequipotential cable
(5) Cable hole for themonitoring signal cable
(6) Screw - -
Step 3 Use baffle plates to block redundant space in the cable outlets and tighten the two screws oneach baffle plate, as shown in Figure 3-190.
Figure 3-190 Sealing the cable outlets on the base
(1) Baffle plate on the right (2) Baffle plate at the rear (3) Baffle plate on the left
Step 4 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in Figure 3-191.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
526
Figure 3-191 Sealing cable outlets on the base using fireproof mud
(1) Fireproof mud (2) PVC corrugated pipe
Step 5 Tighten the three screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate.
----End
3.14.3 RepaintingThe paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept satisfactory. Therefore, any damaged paintmust be repaired.
PrerequisitesBefore repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to Table 3-53.
Table 3-53 Color codes
Applied to Color Huawei Code International Code
Cabinet RAL7035 YB026 RAL7035
Base 3010 light gray YB030 Pantone 422U
Procedure
Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, rub the area with sandpaperslightly to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in Figure 3-192.
Figure 3-192 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
527
Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or dust from therubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with another clean cloth, as shown inFigure 3-193.
Figure 3-193 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol
Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color.
Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the paint. Then applythe paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be observed, as shown in Figure 3-194.
NOTICEThe paint coating should be as thin as possible. No drops are allowed on the paint coating, andthe surface should be smooth.
Figure 3-194 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
528
Step 5 Perform subsequent operations after the repaired paint coating is exposed in the air for 30minutes.
NOTE
The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the surrounding areas, withoutobvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no longer be distinguishable. In addition, thereshould be no paint peeled off.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
529
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A2)
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A(Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).
4.1 Introduction to UpgradeThis section describes configuration of enhanced cabinets after being upgraded and reuseprocedures.
4.2 Installation PreparationsThis chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It alsospecifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
4.3 Unpacking CheckUnpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
4.4 Restructuring the APM30H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30Hcabinet to be restructured.
4.5 Restructuring the TMC11H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11Hcabinet to be restructured.
4.6 Restructuring the RFC CabinetThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFCcabinet to be restructured.
4.7 Restructuring the IBBS200TThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200Tto be restructured.
4.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
530
A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure propergrounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinetsto ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.
4.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their CablesThis chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting themodules to external devices.
4.10 Installing Cables Between Two CabinetsThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade.
4.11 Installation ChecklistAfter the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installationenvironment, and cable-related items.
4.12 Powering On a Base StationThis section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supplyto the components in a cabinet.
4.13 Subsequent OperationsThis section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgradedand checked.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
531
4.1 Introduction to UpgradeThis section describes configuration of enhanced cabinets after being upgraded and reuseprocedures.
4.1.1 Restrcutured Cabinets InteriorTo meet requirements in different outdoor environments, Huawei provides various cabinets forthe separated macro base station such as BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) and distributed base stationsuch as DBS3900 (Ver.D_A2). The cabinets include the APM30H (Ver.D_A2), TMC11H(Ver.D_A2), RFC (Ver.D_A), and IBBS200T (Ver.D_A2), which provide different functions.The RFC is used only for the BTS3900A.
APM30H interiorThe following figure shows the APM30H interior.
Figure 4-1 APM30H interior
The following table describes the components in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
532
Table 4-1 Components in the APM30H
No.
Component
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantity inaSingleCabinet
Description
1 Heatexchanger core
Mandatory
1 The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer aircirculation, and exchanges internal and external air. In thisway, it lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet andprotects the cabinet from dust.
2 Fanassembly
Mandatory
1 A fan assembly is configured with fans and a centralmonitoring unit type EA (CMUEA), dissipating heat from thecabinet.
3 SLPU Mandatory
2 l To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal lightningprotection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and installed in thetop 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with theuniversal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) oruniversal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP).
l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU isoptional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. Itis configured with two universal signal lightningprotection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.
4 ELU Mandatory
1 The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet typeautomatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
5 Doorstatussensor
Mandatory
1 It reports the door status, whether open or closed.
6 EPU Mandatory
1 The Embedded Power subrack Unit (EPU) converts ACpower into DC power and feeds power to the devices insidethe cabinet. The EPU consists of the EPU subrack, PMU, andPSUs.
7 BBU3900
Mandatory
2 The BBU3900 processes the baseband signals and enablesthe base station and the base station controller to interact.
8 GATM Optional
2 The GSM Antenna and TMA Control module (GATM)reports the RET control signal alarms.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
533
No.
Component
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantity inaSingleCabinet
Description
9 EMUA Optional
1 An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) monitorsthe environment in a cabinet and processes alarms.
10 ACheater
Optional
1 The AC heater ensures that components in the cabinet workwithin the acceptable temperature range when thesurrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 Uspace at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater andan SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U spaceabove the SOU.
11 SOU Optional
1 The SOU can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom ofthe cabinet, transferring AC power supply to the customerequipment.
TMC11H InteriorThere are two types of TMC11H:l One type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown
in illustration A in the following figure.l The other type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration
B in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
534
Figure 4-2 TMC11H interior
The following table describes the components in the TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
535
Table 4-2 Components in the TMC11H
No.
Component
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantityin aSingleCabinet
Description
1 Heatexchanger core
Mandatory
1 The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer aircirculation, and exchanges internal and external air. In thisway, it lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet andprotects the cabinet from dust.
2 Fanassembly
Mandatory
1 A fan assembly is configured with fans and a centralmonitoring unit type EA (CMUEA), dissipating heat fromthe cabinet.
3 SLPU Mandatory
2 l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU ismandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of thecabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP.
l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPUis optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU.It is configured with two USLP2s.
4 ELU Mandatory
1 The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet typeautomatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
5 Doorstatussensor
Mandatory
1 It reports the door status, whether open or closed.
6 DCDU Mandatory
1 The direct current distribution unit (DCDU) is 1 U high andit provides ten DC power outputs for components in theTMC. The DCDU-12B is used for the DC-powereddistributed base stations. The DCDU-12C is used for theDC-powered macro base stations and transmission cabinets.
7 BBU3900
Mandatory
2 The BBU3900 processes the baseband signals and enablesthe base station and the base station controller to interact.
8 EMUA Optional
1 An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) monitorsthe environment in a cabinet and processes alarms. TheEMUA must be configured when more than 16 Booleanalarm inputs are required. It is installed in the 1 U spacebelow the BBU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
536
No.
Component
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantityin aSingleCabinet
Description
9 ACheater
Optional
1 The AC heater ensures that components in the cabinet workwithin the acceptable temperature range when thesurrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
RFC Interior
The Radio Frequency Cabinet (RFC) is used by the BTS3900A and provides installation spacefor RFUs.
The following figure shows the RFC interior.
Figure 4-3 RFC interior
The following table describes the components in the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
537
Table 4-3 Components in the RFC
No. Module/Board
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantityin a SingleCabinet
Description
1 CMUEAassembly
Mandatory
1 The Central Monitoring Unit type EA(CMUEA) assembly consists of the supportand CMUEA.
2 DCDU-13A
Mandatory
2 The DCDU-13A is a direct currentdistribution unit. It provides four 30 A and-48 V DC power outputs.
3 ELUassembly
Mandatory
1 The ELU assembly consists of a supportand an electronic label unit (ELU). TheELU automatically reports the cabinet type.
4 Fanassembly
Mandatory
2 A fan assembly dissipates heat from thecabinet. It contains two standalone fans.
5 RFUs Mandatory
6 Radio frequency units (RFUs) are used inmacro base stations. They performmodulation and demodulation of basebandsignals and RF signals, data processing,power amplifying, and VSWR test.
IBBS200T InteriorThe following figure shows the IBBS200T interior.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
538
Figure 4-4 IBBS200T interior
The following table describes the components in the IBBS200T.
Table 4-4 Components in the IBBS200T
No. Module/Board
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantityin a SingleCabinet
Description
1 TEC Mandatory
1 The TEC cooler ensures the normaloperation of the IBBS200T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat forthe storage batteries.
2 Transferterminalfor thesignalcable
Mandatory
1 It provides ports for alarms reported by thedoor status sensor, TEC, temperaturesensor for storage batteries, and smokesensor.
3 Powerdistribution box
Mandatory
1 The power distribution box is installed onthe lower inner right wall of the cabinet. Ittransfers and distributes power to the fan orTEC and storage batteries.
4 Storagebattery
Mandatory
8 The storage batteries provide long-durationbackup power for base stations.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
539
No. Module/Board
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantityin a SingleCabinet
Description
5 Transferterminalfor theinputpowercable forthe TEC
Mandatory
1 It provides power input ports for the TEC.
4.1.2 Restructuring ProcessThis section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade from BTS3900A(Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).
Restructuring Process in AC ScenariosThe following figure shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site suppliedwith AC power.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
540
Figure 4-5 Restructuring process
Restructuring Process in DC ScenariosFigure 4-6 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied withDC power.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
541
Figure 4-6 Restructuring process
4.2 Installation PreparationsThis chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It alsospecifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
4.2.1 Pre-upgrade CheckThis section describes the operations that must be taken before the hardware upgrade.
You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:
l Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properlybefore the upgrade.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
542
l Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need tocontact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.
4.2.2 Upgrade PreparationsThis section describes the preparations needed for the upgrade.
Table 4-5 lists the requirements on the current software version of the base station before theupgrade.
Table 4-5 Versions before the upgrade
Product Name Version before Upgrade
SingleRAN7.0 series V100R007C00SPC240 and later
SingleRAN6.0 series V100R004C00SPC190 and later
4.2.3 Document PreparationsThis section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.
l Before the installation, familiarize yourself with related information in the followingdocuments:
– BTS3900A (Ver.A) Hardware Description
– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description
– APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide
– BTS3900A&DBS3900 Post-Upgrade Hardware Description
– BTS3900A (Ver.A) Installation Guide
– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide
– BTS3900A (Ver.A) Site Maintenance Guide
– Safety Precautionsl During the installation, refer to the following document:
– Installation Reference
4.2.4 Tools and InstrumentsThis section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation.
Marker Phillips screwdriver (M3 toM6)
Flat-head screwdriver (M3 toM6)
Diagonal pliers
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
543
32 mm (1.26 in.)combination wrench
Socket wrench Torque wrench
Power cable crimping tool RJ45 crimping tool Cable cutter
Rubber mallet Soldering iron Wire stripper
Hammer drill (Φ16) Heat gun Level
Multimeter Measuring tape Vacuum cleaner
ESD wrist strap ESD gloves Torque screwdriver
Gloves - -
4.2.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite PersonnelOnsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsitepersonnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.
Before the installation, pay attention to the following items:
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
544
l The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with theproper installation and operation methods.
l The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installationenvironment. Generally, only three to five onsite personnel are necessary.
4.3 Unpacking CheckUnpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
ContextNOTE
When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:
l Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.
l Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweat-soaked gloves, or dirty gloves.
NOTICEl Powered on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.
If... Then...
The total number tallies with the packinglist
Go to Step 2.
The total number does not tally with thepacking list
Find out the cause and report any missingarticles to the local Huawei office.
Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case.
If... Then...
The exterior of the packing case is intact Go to Step 3.
The outer packing is severely damaged orsoaked
Find out the cause and report any missingarticles to the local Huawei office.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
545
If... Then...
The mark on the shockwatch label is red. Do not open the case. Claim compensationfrom the transportation company.
Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list.
If... Then...
Types and quantity of the article tally withthose on the packing list
Sign the Packing List with the customer.
There are any goods missing, incorrectlydelivered, or damaged
Send feedback to the local Huawei office.
CAUTIONTo protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep theunpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment,packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file thephotos.
----End
4.4 Restructuring the APM30H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30Hcabinet to be restructured.
4.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theAPM30H
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the APM30H.
Component Changes in the APM30HFigure 4-7 shows component changes in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
546
Figure 4-7 Components in the APM30H
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 Front door To bereplaced
The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heatdissipation capacity of the cabinet.
2 PMU To bereplaced
-
3 Fanassembly
To bereplaced
The fan assembly needs to be replaced to enhance theheat dissipation capacity.
4 PSU (AC/DC)
To bereplaced
The PSUs need to be replaced to enhance the powerdistribution capability.
5 Door statussensor
To bereused
-
6 Powersubrack(AC/DC)
To bereplaced
The power subrack (AC/DC) needs to be replaced withan EPU 05 to meet the power requirement of a largeconfiguration.
7 PDU To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
547
No. Component
Change Type
Description
8 BBU3900 To bereused
-
9 GATM To beremoved
-
10 EMUA To bereused
The environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA)monitors the environment in a cabinet and processesalarms. The EMUA must be configured when more than16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. It is installed in the1 U space below the BBU.
- AC heater To bereused
-
- SLPU Added An SLPU can be added according to customerrequirements.
- ELU Added The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be added to facilitate troubleshooting.
Cable Changes in the APM30HFigure 4-8 lists the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the APM30H.
Figure 4-8 Equipotential cable and power cables in the APM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
548
No. Cable One End The Other End Change Type
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
Installation Position
P0 PGNDcable forthe frontdoor
OTterminal
Groundpoint onthe innerwall of theAPM30H
OTterminal
Front doorof theAPM30H
To bereplaced
P1 GATMpowercable
- - - - To beremoved
P2 GATMpowercable
- - - - To beremoved
P3 EMUApowercable
OTterminal
LOAD3terminal onthe PDU intheAPM30H
Cord endterminal
PWR1terminal onthe EMUA
To bereused
P4 HEUApowercable
OTterminal
LOAD4terminal onthe PDU intheAPM30H
3V3connector
PWR1 porton theHEUA
To bereplaced
P5 BBUpowercable
OTterminal
LOAD5terminal onthe PDU intheAPM30H
3V3connector
-48V porton the BBU
To bereplaced
Figure 4-9 shows the signal cable changes in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
549
Figure 4-9 Signal cable changes in the APM30H
No. Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S0 Monitoringsignal cablefor theIBBS200T
OT terminal Junctionterminal forthemonitoringsignal cablein theIBBS200T
RJ45connector
HPMI in theAPM30H
To bereused
S1 HPMI-PMUmonitoringsignal cable
- - - - To beremoved
S2 PMU-HEUAmonitoringsignal cable
- - - - To beremoved
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
550
No. Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S3 HEUA-GATM1monitoringsignal cable
- - - - To beremoved
S4 GATM0-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
- - - - To beremoved
S5 FMUA-GATM0monitoringsignal cable
- - - - To beremoved
S6 GATM1-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
- - - - To beremoved
S7 EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
DB9 maleconnector
RS485 porton theEMUA
RJ45connector
RS232/RS422 porton the PMU
To bereused
S8 GPS clocksignal cable
Type Nfemaleconnector
GPS surgeprotector
SMA maleconnector
GPS port onthe USCU inthe BBU
To bereused
S9 GPS jumper N50 straightmaleconnector
GPS surgeprotector
N50 straightmaleconnector
GPSantenna
To bereused
4.4.2 Replacing the Front DoorThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
551
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Set the SW4 circuit breaker on the PDU to OFF. This circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fan assembly.
NOTE
l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the DBS3900, the SW2 circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fans.
l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the BTS3900A, the SW4 circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fans.
Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door from the fan transferboard, and then cut the cable ties on these cables.
Figure 4-10 Removing the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door
Step 4 Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown inFigure 4-11.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
552
Figure 4-11 Removing the equipotential cable for the cabinet door
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove three hinges on the cabinet door and then remove thecabinet door, as shown in Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12 Removing the front door
Step 6 Install the new front door.
NOTE
l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.
l Two persons are required for installing the front door.
1. One person lifts the new front door to align the hinges with the holes in the cabinet, andthe other person uses a torque screwdriver to tighten the three hinges to the cabinet to 1.4N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
553
2. Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on the inner wall.
Step 7 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and that the barcodenumber starts with 212102.
l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Figure 4-13 shows the positionof the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of the cabinet.
l If there is no such a barcode label on the inner wall of the cabinet, record the number on thebarcode label that is stuck on the front door, and stick a label carrying the same number tothe corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Figure 4-13 shows the positionof the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.
Figure 4-13 Positions of the barcode labels
(1) Position of the barcode label on the inner wall of thecabinet
(2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of thecabinet
Step 8 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
4.4.3 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
554
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Set the SW4 circuit breaker on the PDU to OFF. This circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fan assembly.
NOTE
l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the DBS3900, the SW2 circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fans.
l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the BTS3900A, the SW4 circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fans.
Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.
1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables. Attach temporarylabels at one end of all cables before removing them for recording cable connections.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fanassembly, and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shownin the following figure.
NOTE
When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan assembly.
Figure 4-14 Removing the fan assembly
3. Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears of the fan assembly to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
555
Figure 4-15 Installing the new fan assembly
Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
4.4.4 Installing an ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the electronic label unit(ELU).
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Use two M4x8 screws to secure the ELU on the ELU base to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
Step 3 Remove the adhesive paper off the bottom of the ELU base, and stick the ELU base on theposition shown in the following figure.
NOTE
Press the ELU for about 1 minute to ensure that it is securely stuck on the inner wall of the cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
556
Figure 4-16 Installing the ELU base
Step 4 Install the ELU case.
Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
4.4.5 Replacing the Power SystemThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power system.
PrerequisitesBefore replacing the power system, ensure that the entire base station has been powered off.
Contextl Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.l The following figure shows the power systems before and after the upgrade. A shows the
exterior of the power subrack without the cover before the upgrade. B shows the exteriorof the power subrack after the upgrade.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
557
Figure 4-17 Power systems before and after the upgrade
(1) PMU (2) PSU (3) PDU (4) Power subrack
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Instruct the element management system (EMS) administrator to block all the carriers of thisbase station.
Step 3 Power off the base station.
1. Set the Bat circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.
2. Shut off the external power for the APM30H.
Step 4 Remove all cables from the power system.
1. Remove all monitoring signal cables from the PMU.
2. Remove power cables for storage batteries from the BAT(+) and BAT(-) terminals on thewiring unit of the power subrack.
3. Remove all cables from the PDU panel. The cables include the PGND cable, AC inputpower cables, AC and DC output power cables, and AC and DC surge protection signalcables.
Step 5 Remove the power system.
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to loosen the screws on the ejector lever of the PMU or PSUpanel.
2. Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU or PSU out of the subrack and remove the PMUor PSU from the subrack, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
558
Figure 4-18 Removing the PMU or PSU
3. Remove the screws on both sides of the power subrack (AC/DC), and gently pull the power
subrack (AC/DC) out of the cabinet.4. Remove the screws on both sides of the PDU, and gently pull the PDU out of the cabinet.5. Place the removed AC or DC power subrack, PMU, PSUs, and PDU into the ESD box or
bag.
Step 6 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left side of thecabinet
CAUTIONIf the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC(35.6oF to 37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperaturealarms.
1. Remove the guide rails in the positions shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-19 Removing the guide rails
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
559
2. Remove the guide rail on the left side of the position where the power subrack is originally
installed, as shown by a in the following figure. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve thescrews.
3. Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mountingbar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton paddingcontacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in the following figure.
4. Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 6.2 to secure the guide rail attached with windproofcotton padding, and tighten the screws to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown by c in thefollowing figure.
Figure 4-20 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the innerleft side of the cabinet
Step 7 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet. If there areother modules installed at the bottom of the cabinet, skip this step.1. Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton
padding for about 3 cm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in the following figure.2. Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completely
strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of thecabinet. These operations are shown by b and c in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
560
Figure 4-21 Installing windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet
Step 8 Install the mounting part attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of thecabinet
CAUTIONIf the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC(35.6oF to 37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperaturealarms.
1. Remove the M6 screw at the bottom of the right mounting bar.2. Attach the windproof cotton padding to the inner right wall of the cabinet, use three M6
screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as shown in the followingfigure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
561
Figure 4-22 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right side of the cabinet
Step 9 Install the new power system.
1. Add six floating nuts to the mounting bars for securing the power system. The followingfigure shows the positions.
Figure 4-23 Installing floating nuts
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
562
2. Place the new power system in the installation position and gently push it into the cabinetalong the guide rails. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven M6x12 panel screws to2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).
3. Use M6x12 screws to secure the PGND cable for the new power system to the ground bar.The recommended torque is 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
----End
4.4.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-TeeThis section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.
Contextl The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured along with DRFUs. When DRFUs are removed,
the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.l If the BTS3900A has two GATMs, remove the upper one before the lower one.
Procedurel Remove the GATM.
1. Turn off the SW0 or SW1 circuit breaker on the PDU to power off the GATM.2. Remove the monitoring signal cable from the GATM panel.3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the PGND cable for the GATM. Then use a
wrench to remove the RF jumper from the GATM.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, and remove
the GATM. Reinstall the removed screws on their original positions on the mountingbar, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-24 Removing the GATM
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
563
l Remove the Bias-Tee.
1. Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable, and PGND cable from theBias-Tee.
2. Remove the Bias-Tee.
----End
4.4.7 (Optional) Installing the Filler ModuleIn an APM30H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.B), filler modules must be installed in the vacantcustomer space to prevent heat reflux in the empty space. If the vacant space in an APM30H(Ver.C)/TMC11H(Ver.C) has been occupied by filler modules, skip this section.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the filler module in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to the secure thefiller module to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-25 Installing the filler module
----End
4.4.8 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30H afterrestructuring the APM30H.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
Context
The following table describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
564
Table 4-6 Power cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable One End The Other End Description
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
Power cablefor thetransferterminal
Bare wire Transferterminal
OT terminal AC INPUTterminal onthe EPU
To be reused
Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe APM30H
EPC4connector
LOAD2 porton the EPU
3V3connector
PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe APM30H
A 1.1 m (3.61ft) cable isnewlydelivered.
EMUApower cable
EPC4connector
LOAD5 porton the EPU
Cord endterminal
PWR1terminal onthe EMUA
To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.
BBU powercable
EPC4connector
LOAD0 orLOAD1 porton the EPU
3V3connector
-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU
A 0.58 m(1.90 ft)cable isnewlydelivered.
The following table describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 4-7 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable One End The Other End Description
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector Installation Position
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensorin theAPM30H
2-pinconnector
GATE porton the PMU
Bare wire Door statussensor
To be reused
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU RJ45connector
ELU port onthe fanassembly
Added
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
565
Cable One End The Other End Description
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector Installation Position
Monitoringsignaltransfercable for thefan in thefront door
Interconnection terminal
Power cablefor the fan inthe front doorof theAPM30H
4-pinconnector
FAN_EXTport on thefan assembly
Added
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe fanassembly
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBU
Added
PMU-CMUEAmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thePMU
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on thefan assemblyin theAPM30H
Added
EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
DB9 maleconnector
RS485 porton theEMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on thePMU
To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.
Procedurel Remove related cables in the cabinet.
Remove related cables in the cabinet according to the cable changes in 4.4.1 InformationYou Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H. Skip this step if you haveremoved these cables when replacing related modules.
l Installing power cables in the APM30H
1. Install the power transfer cable for the APM30H, as shown by P1 in Figure 4-26.
a. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the AC OUTPUT porton the left side of EPU.
b. Connect the cable at the other end of the power cable to the transfer terminal.
2. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the APM30H, as shown by P1 in Figure4-26.
a. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD2 port on the panel of the EPU.
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable for the fan assemblyto the LOAD2 port on the EPU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
566
c. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the fan assembly in the APM30H, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten thescrews on the 3V3 connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).
3. Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 4-26.
a. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD5 port on the panel of the EPU.
b. Add a connector to each end of the power cable and you can use the EPC4connector removed in 3.1. For detailed operations, see Assembling the Cord EndTerminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and thePower Cable.
c. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD5 porton the EPU.
d. Connect the cord end terminal at the other end of the power cable to the PWR1port on the EMUA.
4. Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P4 in Figure 4-26.
a. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD0 port on the panel of the EPU.
b. Add the removed EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable. Fordetailed operations, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
c. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V porton the UPEU in the BBU, and connect the EPC4 connector at the other end tothe LOAD0 port on the panel of the EPU.
Figure 4-26 Installing power cables in the APM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
567
5. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind them.
6. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the APM30H.1. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S1 in Figure
4-27.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to theGATE port on the fan assembly.
b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the door status sensor.
2. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S2 in Figure 4-27.
a. Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU.
b. Connect the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU port on the fanassembly.
3. Install the monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front door, as shown byS3 in Figure 4-27.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the frontdoor to the power cable for the fan in the front door.
b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal transfercable to the FAN_EXT port on the fan assembly.
NOTICEBind the interconnected monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front doorto the cable bridge on the front door to prevent the cabinet door from extruding theinterconnection terminal.
4. Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S4 in Figure 4-27.
a. Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_OUTport on the fan assembly.
b. Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1port on the UPEU in the BBU.
5. Install the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 4-27.
a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signalcable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoringsignal cable to the COM_IN port on the PMU.
6. Optional: Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S6 in Figure4-27.
a. Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the EMUA monitoring signalcable to the RS485 port on the EMUA.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the EMUA monitoring signalcable to the COM_OUT port on the PMU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
568
Figure 4-27 Installing signal cables in the APM30H
7. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind them.
8. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
4.5 Restructuring the TMC11H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11Hcabinet to be restructured.
4.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theTMC11H
This section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of theTMC11H.
Component Changes in the TMC11H
There are three types of TMC11Hs:
l When a TMC11H serves as a transmission cabinet, it only provides space for thetransmission equipment and a DCDU-03A is installed in it. Illustration A in the followingfigure shows this type of TMC11H.
l When a TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the DBS3900, the TMC11H is suppliedwith -48 V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-03B are installed in it. Illustration Bin the following figure shows this type of TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
569
l When a TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, the TMC11H is suppliedwith -48 V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-06A are installed in it. Illustration Cin the following figure shows this type of TMC11H.
Figure 4-28 Exterior and configurations of the TMC11H
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 Front door To bereplaced
The heat exchanger in the cabinet needs to be replacedto enhance the heat dissipation capacity of the cabinet.
2 Fanassembly
To bereplaced
The fan assembly needs to be replaced to enhance theheat dissipation capacity.
3 DCDU To bereplaced
l When the TMC11H serves as a transmission cabinet,the DCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12C.
l When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet ofthe DBS3900, the DCDU needs to be replaced with aDCDU-12B.
l When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet ofthe BTS3900A, the DCDU needs to be replaced witha DCDU-12C.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
570
No. Component
Change Type
Description
4 Door statussensor
To bereused
-
5 BBU3900 To bereused
-
6 GATM To beremoved
-
7 EMUA To bereused
-
- ELU Added The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be added to facilitate troubleshooting.
Cable Changes in the TMC11HCable connections in TMC11Hs vary according to the configurations of TMC11Hs. Thefollowing figure shows the cable changes in the TMC11H serving as the power cabinet of theBTS3900A.
Figure 4-29 Equipotential cables and power cables in the TMC11H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
571
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
P0 PGNDcable forthe frontdoor
OTterminal
Groundpoint onthe innerwall of theTMC11H
OTterminal
Front doorof theTMC11H
To bereplaced
P1 Powercable forthe fan intheTMC11H
OTterminal
l FANterminal ontheDCDU-06A
l LOAD8terminal ontheDCDU-03A
l LOAD8terminal ontheDCDU-03B
3V3connector
PWR porton the fanassemblyin theTMC11H
To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
572
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
P2 BBUpowercable
OTterminal
l BBUterminal ontheDCDU-06A
l LOAD6terminal ontheDCDU-03A
l LOAD6terminal ontheDCDU-03B
3V3connector
-48V porton theUPEU inthe BBU
To bereplaced
P3 EMUApowercable
OTterminal
l SPARE3terminal ontheDCDU-06A
l LOAD7terminal ontheDCDU-03A
l LOAD7terminal ontheDCDU-03B
Cord endterminal
PWR1terminalon theEMUA
To bereused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
573
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
P4 GATMpowercable
- - - - To beremoved
Figure 4-30 shows the signal cable changes in the TMC11H that houses the BBU3900 and issupplied with -48 V DC power.
Figure 4-30 Signal cable changes in the TMC11H
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
S1 Monitoring signalcable forthe doorstatussensor
2-pinconnector
GATEport on theHPMI
Bare wire Doorstatussensor
To bereused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
574
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
S2 l DCDU-06Amonitoringsignalcable
l DCDU-03Amonitoringsignalcable
l DCDU-03Bmonitoringsignalcable
- - - - To beremoved
S3 EMUAmonitoring signalcable
DB9 maleconnector
RS485port on theEMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUT port onthe HEUA
To bereused
S4 GATM-BBUmonitoring signalcable
- - - - To beremoved
S5 FMUA-GATMmonitoring signalcable
- - - - To beremoved
S6 HEUA-BBUmonitoring signalcable
- - - - To beremoved
S7 GPS clocksignalcable
SMA maleconnector
GPS porton theUSCU inthe BBU
Type Nfemaleconnector
GPS surgeprotector
To bereused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
575
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
S8 GPSjumper
N50straightmaleconnector
GPS surgeprotector
N50straightmaleconnector
GPSantenna
To bereused
4.5.2 Replacing the Front DoorThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.
ContextThe TMC11H and APM30Hs have the same front door. This section describes the procedurefor replacing the cabinet door, using the APM30H as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Set the circuit breaker corresponding to the fans on the DCDU to OFF to power off the fans.l When the TMC11 or TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-06A, the SW3 circuit breaker
controls the power supply to the fans.l When the TMC11 or TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-03A or DCDU-03B, the SW0
circuit breaker controls the power supply to the fans.
Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door from the fan transferboard, and then cut the cable ties on these cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
576
Figure 4-31 Removing the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door
Step 4 Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown inFigure 4-32.
Figure 4-32 Removing the equipotential cable for the cabinet door
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove three hinges on the cabinet door and then remove thecabinet door, as shown in Figure 4-33.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
577
Figure 4-33 Removing the front door
Step 6 Install the new front door.
NOTE
l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.
l Two persons are required for installing the front door.
1. One person lifts the new front door to align the hinges with the holes in the cabinet, andthe other person uses a torque screwdriver to tighten the three hinges to the cabinet to 1.4N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on the inner wall.
Step 7 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and that the barcodenumber starts with 212102.l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Figure 4-34 shows the position
of the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of the cabinet.l If there is no such a barcode label on the inner wall of the cabinet, record the number on the
barcode label that is stuck on the front door, and stick a label carrying the same number tothe corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Figure 4-34 shows the positionof the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
578
Figure 4-34 Positions of the barcode labels
(1) Position of the barcode label on the inner wall of thecabinet
(2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of thecabinet
Step 8 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
4.5.3 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
The fan assembly used in a TMC11H is the same as that used in an APM30H. This sectiondescribes the procedure for removing the front door in an APM30H as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
579
Step 2 Set the circuit breaker corresponding to the fans on the DCDU to OFF to power off the fans.l When the TMC11 or TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-06A, the SW3 circuit breaker
controls the power supply to the fans.l When the TMC11 or TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-03A or DCDU-03B, the SW0
circuit breaker controls the power supply to the fans.
Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables. Attach temporary
labels at one end of all cables before removing them for recording cable connections.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fan
assembly, and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shownin the following figure.
NOTE
When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan assembly.
Figure 4-35 Removing the fan assembly
3. Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears of the fan assembly to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
580
Figure 4-36 Installing the new fan assembly
Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
4.5.4 Installing an ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the electronic label unit(ELU).
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
This section describes the procedure for installing the ELU in an APM30H as an example. Theposition of and procedure for installing an ELU in a TMC11H is the same as those in anAPM30H.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
581
Step 2 Use two M4x8 screws to secure the ELU on the ELU base to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
Step 3 Remove the adhesive paper off the bottom of the ELU base, and stick the ELU base on theposition shown in the following figure.
NOTE
Press the ELU for about 1 minute to ensure that it is securely stuck on the inner wall of the cabinet.
Figure 4-37 Installing the ELU base
Step 4 Install the ELU case.
Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
4.5.5 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-03A, DCDU-03B,or DCDU-06A.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
582
ContextTMC11Hs can be configured with different models of DCDUs, which include the DCDU-03A,DCDU-03B, and DCDU-06A. The DCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12B orDCDU-12C during the upgrade.l When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, replace the DCDU with
a DCDU-12C.l When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900, replace the DCDU with
a DCDU-12B.l When the TMC11H serves as a transmission cabinet of the BTS3900A or DBS3900, replace
the DCDU with a DCDU-12C.This section describes the procedure for replacing the DCDU-03B with a DCDU-12B. Othermodels of DCDUs are removed and installed in the same way.
ProcedureStep 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Shut off the external power supply to the power off the DCDU-03B.NOTE
l If a DCDU-03A is configured, you can turn the SW6 circuit breaker on the PDU in the APM30H to OFF topower off the DCDU-03A.
l If a DCDU-06A configured, shut off the external power supply to power off the DCDU-06A.
Step 3 Remove the DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 4-38.1. Remove all connectors from the DCDU-03B panel.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal
block from the DCDU-03B.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
583
3. Remove the input power cables and equipotential cable for the DCDU-03B from the
terminals.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-03B,
and gently pull the DCDU-03B out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Figure 4-38 Removing the DCDU-03B
Step 4 Place the DCDU-03B and protective cover into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install the DCDU-12C.1. Hold the DCDU-12C with both hands and slide the DCDU-12C into the cabinet until the
mounting ears on the DCDU-12C contact the columns.2. Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12C to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
4.5.6 (Optional) Installing the Filler ModuleIn an APM30H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.B), filler modules must be installed in the vacantcustomer space to prevent heat reflux in the empty space. If the vacant space in an APM30H(Ver.C)/TMC11H(Ver.C) has been occupied by filler modules, skip this section.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the filler module in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to the secure thefiller module to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 4-39.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
584
Figure 4-39 Installing the filler module
----End
4.5.7 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC11H afteryou restructure the TMC11H.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 4-8 describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 4-8 Power cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe TMC11H
EPC4connector
LOAD9 porton theDCDU-12C
3V3connector
PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe TMC11H
The cable isnewlydelivered.
BBU powercable
EPC4connector
LOAD6 orLOAD7 porton theDCDU-12Cin theTMC11H
3V3connector
-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU ofthe TMC11H
The cable isnewlydelivered.
EMUApower cable
EPC4connector
LOAD8 porton theDCDU-12C
Cord endterminal
PWR1terminal onthe EMUA
To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.
Table 4-9 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
585
Table 4-9 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensor
Bare wire GATE porton the fanassembly
Bare wire Door statussensor
To be reused
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assembly
RJ45connector
MON1 porton the UPEUin the BBU
To be reused
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU RJ45connector
ELU port onthe fanassembly
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Monitoringsignaltransfercable for thefan in thefront door
Interconnection terminal
Power cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor of theTMC11H
4-pinconnector
FAN_EXTport on thefan assembly
The cable isnewlydelivered.
EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
DB9 maleconnector
RS485 porton theEMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on thefan assembly
To be reused
Procedurel Install power cables in the TMC11H.
1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the TMC11H, as shown by P1 in Figure4-40.
a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD9 porton the DCDU-12C.
b. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the fan assembly.
2. Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 4-40. If no BBUis installed in this cabinet, skip this step.
a. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to theinstructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b. Connect the EPC4connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 orLOAD7 port on the DCDU-12C.
c. Connect the 3V3 power connector at the other end of the power cable to the -48Vport on the UPEU in the BBU.
3. Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P3 in Figure 4-40.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
586
a. Replace the OT terminal at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4connector, as described in Table 4-8. For details about how to replace theterminals, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD8 porton the DCDU-12C.
c. Connect the cord end terminal at the other end of the power cable to the PWR1port on the EMUA.
Figure 4-40 Installing power cables in the TMC11H
4. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind them.
5. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the TMC11H.
1. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S1 in Figure4-41.
a. Cut off the 2-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable, and stripthe jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.
b. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on the fanassembly.
2. Optional: Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S2 inFigure 4-41. If no BBU is installed in this cabinet, skip this step.
a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to theCOM_IN port on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
3. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S3 in Figure 4-41.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
587
a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the port on the topof the ELU.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the ELU porton the fan assembly.
4. Install the monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front door, as shown byS4 in Figure 4-41.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door toits transfer terminal.
b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the signal cable to the FAN_EXTport on the fan assembly.
5. Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 4-41.
a. Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the signal cable to the RS485 porton the EMUA.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.
Figure 4-41 Installing signal cables in the TMC11H
6. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind them.7. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
4.6 Restructuring the RFC CabinetThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFCcabinet to be restructured.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
588
4.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFCThis section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the RFC.
Component Changes in the RFC
Figure 4-42 shows component changes in the RFC.
Figure 4-42 Components in the RFC
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 FMUA To bereplaced
The FMUA needs to be replaced with a CMUEAassembly.
2 DCDU-02 To bereplaced
The DCDU-02 needs to be replaced with a DCDU-13Ato enhance the power distribution capacity.
3 Filler panel To bereplaced
The filler panel needs to be replaced with an ELUassembly. The ELU reports the cabinet typeautomatically. It needs to be added to facilitatetroubleshooting.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
589
No. Component
Change Type
Description
4 Door statussensor
To bereused
-
5 Fan To bereused
-
6 Temperature sensor
To bereused
-
Cable Changes in the RFCFigure 4-43 shows the power cable changes in the RFC.
Figure 4-43 Power cables in the RFC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
590
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
P1 to P6 RFUpowercables
Parallelterminal
RFU0terminalon theDCDU-02
- - To bereplaced
P7 FMUApowercable
Parallelterminal
FMUAterminalon theDCDU-02
3V3connector
PWR porton theFMUA
To bereplaced
Figure 4-44 shows the signal cable changes in the RFC.
Figure 4-44 Signal cable changes in the RFC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
591
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
S1 DCDU-FMUAmonitoring signalcable
Cord endterminal
TEM_HUMARRESTER
RJ45connector
SPD ALMport on theDCDU-02
To bereplaced
S2 and S3 FMUA-FANmonitoring signalcable
4-pinconnector
FAN porton theFMUA
- FAN unit To bereplaced
S4 Monitoring signalcable forthe doorstatussensor
2-pinconnector
GATEport on theCMUA
Bare wire Doorstatussensor
To bereused
S5 Monitoring signalcable forthetemperature sensor inthe RFC
4-pinconnector
TEM porton the fanassemblyin the RFC
Temperature sensor
Air intakevent at thebottom ofthe RFC
To bereplaced
4.6.2 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.
Prerequisitesl The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves,
a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.l The FMUA is removed, and the fan assembly stops working.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
592
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fan assembly,and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shown in the followingfigure.
Step 3 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown in the followingfigure. The recommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
Figure 4-45 Replacing the fan assembly in the RFC
Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
4.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler PanelThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the FMUA assembly andfiller panel.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
593
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Turn the FMUA circuit breaker on the left of the DCDU-02 panel to OFF.
Step 3 Record the cable connections on the FMUA panel, and remove all cables.
Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the FMUA, and gentlypull the FMUA out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, andremove the filler panel.
Step 6 Place the removed FMUA assembly and filler panel into ESD boxes or bags.
Step 7 Place the CMUEA assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Usea torque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.
Figure 4-46 Installing the CMUEA assembly
Step 8 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, and gentlypull the filler panel out of the cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
594
Step 9 Place the ELU assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use atorque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.
Figure 4-47 Installing the ELU assembly
Step 10 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
4.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-02 with aDCDU-13A.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
595
Step 2 Instruct the M2000/U2000 administrator to block all the carriers of this base station.
Step 3 Turn all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU-02 to OFF to power off the fan assembly andRFUs.
Step 4 Power off the DCDU-02.l In AC scenarios, turn the SW8 and SW9 circuit breakers on the PDU in the APM30H to
OFF.l In DC scenarios, shut off the external power supply.
Step 5 Remove the two DCDU-02 units on the left and right, as shown in the following figure.1. Record the position of connectors on the DCDU-02, and remove the connectors.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminals
on the DCDU-02.3. Remove the input power cables and PGND cable from the DCDU-02.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-02, and
gently pull the DCDU-02 out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Figure 4-48 Removing the DCDU-02 units
Step 6 Place the removed DCDU-02 units and protective covers in ESD boxes or bags.
Step 7 Place the DCDU-13A in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use a torquescrewdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the followingfigure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
596
Figure 4-49 Installing the DCDU-13A
Step 8 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
4.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the RFU.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or ESDgloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.
Contextl RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU
V2, MRFU V2a, and WRFU.l RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU
V2, MRFU V2a WRFU, and LRFU.l RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU
V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU.l If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) or WRFUa is not faulty, disable its maximum output
power locking for TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.l Replacing an RFU interrupts services carried by the RFU.l Replacing an RFU takes about 6 to 10 minutes.l The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured along with DRFUs. When DRFUs are removed,
the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be removed. For details about how to remove theGATM and Bias-Tee, see 4.4.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.
l A handle is used during the replacement. The handle is placed on the lower left side of thedocument holder on the cabinet door, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
597
Figure 4-50 Position of the handle
NOTE
The handle is only for pulling an RFU outwards horizontally.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If a replaced RFU is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking for TXchannels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
NOTE
l If a replaced RFU is faulty, its maximum output power locking for TX channels does not need to bedisabled.
l If the maximum output power has not been set for the RFU, the maximum output power for TX channelsis the maximum transmit power of the hardware.
1. Check the maximum output power has been locked for TX channels of the new RFU, andrecord the result.l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet
number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU. Run theDSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number,and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum output power forTX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has been locked.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query thecabinet number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU.Run the DSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number,slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximumoutput power for TX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power hasbeen locked.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site MaintenanceTerminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-clickLock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Query Config tab. On the displayed tab page,select the target RFU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
598
If... Then...
The maximum output power has beenlocked for TX channels
Go to Step 1.2.
The maximum output power has not beenlocked for TX channels
Go to 2.
NOTE
The maximum output power of some RFUs cannot be queried by running the DSP TXBRANCHcommand. If the value of the maximum output power invalid in the query result for an RFU, the RFUdoes not support the maximum output power locking.
2. Set the maximum output power of the RFU to 0 to disable the maximum output powerlocking.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable themaximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to resetthe RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum outputpower of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disablethe maximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command toreset the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximumoutput power of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site MaintenanceTerminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-clickLock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Config tab. On the displayed tab page, setthe parameters to disable the maximum output power locking for TX channels, and clickSet. Reset the RFU to make the configuration take effect.
NOTE
If there is more than one RFU, reset the TX channels of each RFU separately. If RFUs are cascaded,perform the operations from the lowest-level RFU to the highest-level RFU to minimize the impacton services carried by the RFUs.
Step 2 Ask the administrator of element management system (EMS) to block the RFU.
l On the NodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the eNodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the BSC, run the SET GTRXADMSTAT command and set ADMSTAT to LOCK toblock all carriers of the RFU.
NOTE
l Block the RFU before replacing the module or separately replacing the RF jumper.
l If RFU to be replaced works in multiple modes, block the RFU in all modes it supports.
l An RFU working in GSM mode cannot be blocked, and therefore you can block only the carriers ofthe RFU in GSM mode.
Step 3 Verify that TX channels of the RFU are disabled. In this case, the ACT indicator on the RFUpanel is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).
Step 4 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
599
NOTE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, to preventelectrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 5 Remove the RFU to be replaced.1. Set the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to OFF to power off
the RFU.2. Label the power cable for the RFU to be replaced, and disconnect the cable.3. Label the RF jumper for the RFU to be replaced, loosen the DIN 7/16 male elbow connector
on the RF jumper, and disconnect the RF jumper.4. Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the cable.5. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws at the four corners of the RFU, and then
pull the RFU handle to move the RFU outwards 50 mm (1.97 in.) to 100 mm (3.94 in.), asshown in Figure 4-51. Hold the RFU with one hand, and remove the RFU from the cabinetwith the other hand.
CAUTIONThe RFU is heavy. Therefore, handle it with caution.
6. Place the handle in its original position.
Figure 4-51 Removing the RFU
Step 6 Install the new RFU.1. Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the rails until it snaps into place.2. Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners on the RFU panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.) to
secure the RFU to the subrack.3. Reconnect power cable and RF jumper to the RFU panel.4. Use a wrench to tighten the connector on the jumper and feeder to 25 N·m to 35 N·m (221.25
lbf·in. to 309.75 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
600
Figure 4-52 Tightening the connector on the jumper and feeder
(1) Feeder (2) Jumper
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
4.6.6 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC after yourestructure the RFC.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 4-10 describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 4-10 Power cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
CMUEApower cable
EPC4connector
LOAD3 porton the leftDCDU-13A
3V3connector
PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe RFC
The cable isnewlydelivered.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
601
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Power cablebetweenDCDU-13As
OT terminal(M6)
RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals onthe leftDCDU-13Ain the RFC
OT terminal RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals onthe rightDCDU-13Ain the RFC
The cable isnewlydelivered.
RFU powercable
EPC4connector
One of theLOAD0 toLOAD2ports on bothDCDU-13As
3V3connector
PWR port onone of RFU 0to RFU 5
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Table 4-11 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 4-11 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensor
Bare wire GATE porton the fanassembly
Bare wire Door statussensor
To be reused
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU port onthe CMUEA
RJ45connector
ELU port onthe ELUassembly
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in theRFC
4-pinconnector
TEM port onthe CMUEA
Temperaturesensor
Air intakevent at thebottom of theRFC
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Surgeprotectionalarm cablefor theDCDU
Bare wire IN0 and IN1ports on theCMUEA
Bare wire DC ALARMport on theDCDU-13A
The cable isnewlydelivered.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
602
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Monitoringsignal cablefor the leftfan
- Cabledeliveredwith the fan
Bare wire EFAN1 andEFAN2 portson theCMUEAassembly
The cable isdeliveredwith the newfanassembly.
Monitoringsignal cablefor the rightfan
- Cabledeliveredwith the fan
4-pinconnector
Transferterminal forthe CMUEAassembly
The cable isdeliveredwith the newfanassembly.
Procedurel Install power cables in the RFC.
1. Install the CMUEA power cable, as shown by P1 in Figure 4-53.
a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD3 porton the left DCDU-13A.
b. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the CMUEA.
2. Optional: Install the power cable between DCDU-13As, as shown by P2 in Figure4-53. Skip this step in DC scenarios.
a. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals on the left DCDU-13A in the RFC.
b. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) andNEG(-) terminals on the right DCDU-13A in the RFC.
3. Install the RFU power cables, as shown by P3 to P8 in Figure 4-53.
a. For RFU 0 to RFU 2, connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cableto one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the left DCDU-13A.
b. For RFU 3 to RFU 5, connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cableto one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the right DCDU-13A.
c. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the RFU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
603
Figure 4-53 Installing power cables in the RFC
4. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind them.
5. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the RFC.
1. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 4-54.
a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the ELU port onthe ELU assembly.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the ELU porton the CMUEA.
2. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure4-54.
a. Cut off the 2-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable, and stripa length of 8 mm (0.31 in.) jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.
b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on theCMUEA.
3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown by S3 inFigure 4-54.
a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to thetemperature sensor near the air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.
b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEM port on the CMUEA.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
604
4. Install the surge protection alarm cable for the left DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 inFigure 4-54.
a. Connect one end of the cable to the DC ALARM port on the DCDU-13A.
b. Connect the other end of the cable to the IN1 port on the CMUEA.
5. Install the surge protection alarm cable for the right DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 inFigure 4-54.
a. Connect one end of the cable to the DC ALARM port on the DCDU-13A.
b. Connect the other end of the cable to the IN0 port on the CMUEA.
6. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan, as shown by S5 in Figure 4-54.
a. Connect the cables that come out of the left fan assembly to the EFAN1 andEFAN2 ports on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the cables that come out of the right fan assembly to the 4-pin terminalsthat come out of the CMUEA. Those 4-pin terminals have been connected to theIFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the rear of the CMUEA.
Figure 4-54 Installing signal cables in the RFC
7. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind them.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
605
8. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
4.7 Restructuring the IBBS200TThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200Tto be restructured.
4.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theIBBS200T
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the IBBS200T.
Component Changes in the IBBS200T
Figure 4-55 shows component changes in the IBBS200T.
Figure 4-55 Components in the IBBS200T
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 Storagebattery
To bereused
-
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
606
No. Component
Change Type
Description
2 Door statussensor
To bereused
-
3 Powerdistributionbox
To bereplaced
The power distribution box needs to be replaced toenhance the power backup capacity.
4 Transferterminal forthe inputpowercable forthe TEC
To bereused
-
- Transferterminal forthe signalcable
To bereused
-
Cable Changes in the IBBS200TFigure 4-56 shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the IBBS200T.
Figure 4-56 Equipotential cable and power cables in the battery cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
607
No. Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
P0 PGNDcable forthe frontdoor
OTterminal
Groundpoint onthe frontdoor
OTterminal
Groundpoint onthe rack
To bereused
P1 RTN(+)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries
OTterminal
Positivepole forthe lowerstoragebatterygroup
OTterminal
Positivewiringterminalon thepowerdistribution box
To bereplaced
P2 RTN(+)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries
OTterminal
Positivepole forthe upperstoragebatterygroup
OTterminal
Positivewiringterminalon thepowerdistribution box
To bereplaced
P3 NEG(-)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries
OTterminal
Negativepole forthe upperstoragebatterygroup
OTterminal
Negativewiringterminalon thepowerdistribution box
To bereplaced
P4 NEG(-)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries
OTterminal
Negativepole forthe lowerstoragebatterygroup
OTterminal
Negativewiringterminalon thepowerdistribution box
To bereplaced
P5 Powertransfercable forthe TEC inthe frontdoor
- Transferterminalfor theinputpowercable forthe TEC
- TEC To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
608
No. Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
P6 TECpowercable
Cord endterminal
Powerdistribution box
Cord endterminal
Wiringterminalon thefront door
To bereused
Figure 4-57 shows signal cable changes in the cabinet.
Figure 4-57 Signal cable changes in the battery cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
609
No. Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S1 Monitoring signalcable forthe doorstatussensor
Bare wire Transferterminalfor thesignalcable
Bare wire Doorstatussensor
To bereused
S2 Monitoring signalcable forthetemperature sensor inthe batterycabinet
- Transferterminalfor thesignalcable
Cord endterminal
Temperature sensor
To bereused
4.7.2 Replacing the Power Distribution BoxThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power distribution boxin the battery cabinet.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
DANGERWhen replacing batteries, prevent short circuits or reverse connections between the positive andnegative poles of the storage batteries. All tools used for installation must be insulated to preventthe batteries from burning and ensure personal safety.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
610
Step 2 Power off the battery cabinet.1. Set the SW2 circuit breaker on the PDU panel in the APM30H to OFF. This circuit breaker
controls the power supply to the TEC.2. Set the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers on the power distribution box to OFF.3. Set the BAT circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.
Step 3 Remove the storage batteries.1. Remove the terminal covers from the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 4-58.
Figure 4-58 Removing the terminal covers from the storage batteries
2. Use temporary labels to mark the input power cables for the positive and negative poles on
the storage batteries and the copper bars between the storage batteries, and remove the inputpower cables and copper bars, as shown in Figure 4-59.
Figure 4-59 Removing the power cables for storage batteries
3. Reinstall the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.4. Hold the slings on the storage batteries and pull the storage batteries out. Then use both
hands to remove the storage batteries at the same layer, and place the storage batteries at aproper place.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
611
NOTE
l Remove the baffle plate and storage batteries layer by layer from top down. After removing thebaffle plate at a layer, you must remove all storage batteries at the layer before removing thebaffle plate at the lower layer.
l Use both hands to hold each storage battery to avoid falling.
l When placing the storage batteries outdoors, do not expose them to the sunlight.
Step 4 Remove the TEC power transfer cable from the TEC.
Step 5 Remove the power distribution box, as shown in the following figure.
1. Remove the two screws from the left cover of the power distribution box and remove thecover plate.
2. Remove the four screws, spring washers, and flat washers from the power distribution box.
Figure 4-60 Removing the power distribution box
3. Remove the power distribution box with the cables connected to it and then place them intothe ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Connect cables to the new power distribution box.
1. Remove the cover from the new power distribution box.
2. Connect cables to the power distribution box, and bind the cables inside the distributionbox, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
612
Figure 4-61 Connecting cables to the power distribution box
(1) NEG(-) cable for theupper storage batteries
(2) RTN(+) cable for theupper storage batteries
(3) NEG(-) cable for thelower storage batteries
(4) RTN(+) cable for thelower storage batteries
Step 7 Install the power distribution box in the battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-62.1. Place the new power distribution box in the battery cabinet.2. Adjust the position of the power distribution box until the holes at four corners of the power
distribution box align with the bolts in the cabinet.3. Use a socket wrench to secure the four nuts delivered with the power distribution box to
the bolts until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).4. Install the cover on the left side of the power distribution box and tighten the two M3x6
screws on the cover to 0.55 N·m (4.87 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
613
Figure 4-62 Installing the power distribution box
----End
4.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing storage batteries and cablesin the battery cabinet after you restructure the battery cabinet.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
614
ContextThe following table describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 4-12 Power cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Powertransfercable for theTEC
OT terminal Transferterminal forthe inputpower cablefor the TEC
OT terminal Powerdistributionbox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
RTN(+)cable for theupperstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal Powerdistributionbox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
NEG(-)cable for theupperstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal Powerdistributionbox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
RTN(+)cable for thelowerstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal Powerdistributionbox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
NEG(-)cable for thelowerstoragebatteries
OT terminal Storagebattery
OT terminal Powerdistributionbox
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the power transfer cable for the TEC as well as power cables between the powerdistribution box and the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.1. Connect the power transfer cable for the TEC to the power transfer terminal on the front
door, as shown by P1 in the following figure.2. Connect negative power cables and then positive power cables for the storage batteries.
The black cable is the power cable for the negative pole, and the red cable is the powercable for the positive pole, as shown by P2 and P3 in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
615
Figure 4-63 Installing power cables in the battery cabinet
Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom up and from left to right, as shown in the followingfigure.
NOTE
The storage batteries should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reserved betweenthe storage batteries.
Figure 4-64 Installing the storage batteries
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
616
Step 3 Install power cables for the storage batteries.
1. Remove the terminal covers from the batteries.2. Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for series connections, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-65 Installing the power cables for the storage batteries
Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
4.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential CableA PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure propergrounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinetsto ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.
Prerequisites
The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a cable cutter, and a multi-purposecrimping tool.
Context
The principles for grounding a BTS3900A are as follows:l The upper and lower cabinets must be connected through an equipotential cable.
l The lower cabinets are connected to the RFC through an equipotential cable.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
617
l The RFC is connected to the ground busbar through a PGND cable.
The principles for grounding a DBS3900 are as follows:l The upper and lower cabinets must be connected through an equipotential cable.l The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to other
lower cabinets through equipotential cables.l The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to an
external ground bar through a PGND cable.
The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable.
Table 4-13 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable
Cable Cross-Sectional Area ofthe Core Wire and Size ofthe OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
Equipotentialcable
OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or0.025 in.2)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the PGND cable and equipotential cable.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the
OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 4-67.1. Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar on the inner wall of the RFC, and
then use spring washers and screws to secure the OT terminals of the PGND cable.
NOTE
When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as shown inthe following figure.
Figure 4-66 Installing an OT terminal correctly
2. Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the external ground copper bar, as shown in
the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
618
Figure 4-67 Installing a PGND cable
(1) Ground bar in the cabinet (2) PGND cable (3) Onsite ground bar
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
619
4.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their CablesThis chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting themodules to external devices.
4.9.1 Installing a BBU CaseThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in anAPM30H or TMC11H.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and a torque screwdriver.
Context
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, theBBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
l When a second BBU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that the second BBUbe installed right above or below the original BBU without removing the guide rails.
Figure 4-68 shows the positions for installing BBU cases in an APM30H and a TMC11H.
Figure 4-68 Positions for installing BBU cases
Procedure
Step 1 Record the electronic serial number (ESN) on the BBU case and report it to the base stationcommissioning personnel. For details, see Obtaining the ESN.
Step 2 Install cable claws on the BBU, as shown in Figure 4-69.
1. Align the two cable claws with the holes on both sides of the BBU case.
2. Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
620
Figure 4-69 Installing cable claws on the BBU case
Step 3 Install the BBU case, as shown in Figure 4-70.
1. Place the BBU on the guide rails and gently push the BBU case into the cabinet.
2. Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ear on each side of the BBU case to 2 N·m(17.70 lbf·in.).
Figure 4-70 Installing a BBU case
Step 4 Install the BBU power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 4-71.
1. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructionsin Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
CAUTIONEnsure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connectedto the BBU first and then to the EPU. The operation in the reverse sequence may causepersonal injury or component damage.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
621
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connectormust be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
2. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.
3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on theEPU in the APM30H.
NOTE
Figure 4-71 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30H. When the BBU is installed in a TMC11H, the cableconnections are the same.
Figure 4-71 Installing the BBU power cable in AC scenarios
Step 5 Install the BBU power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 4-72.
1. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructionsin Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
CAUTIONEnsure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connectedto the BBU first and then to the EPU. The operation in the reverse sequence may causepersonal injury or component damage.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
622
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connectormust be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
2. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.
3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD8 port on theDCDU-12C in the TMC11H.
CAUTIONEnsure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connected to theBBU first and then to the DCDU. The operation in the reverse sequence may cause personalinjury or component damage.
NOTE
Figure 4-72 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC11H. When the BBU is installed in an extensionTMC11H, the cable connections are the same.
Figure 4-72 Installing the BBU power cable in DC scenarios
Step 6 Install inter-BBU signal cables. For details, see 3.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU SignalCables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
623
Step 7 Install the transmission cables. For details, see 3.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables.
----End
4.9.2 Installing the BBU ComponentsThis section describes how to install the boards into the BBU and SLPU.
Context
NOTE
This chapter only describes the procedure for installing components in the BBU. For details about the slotswhere the BBU components are installed, see the BBU configuration information.
CAUTIONTake correct ESD prevention measures, such as wearing an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, toavoid static damage to boards, modules, and electronic components.
Operation Rulesl When moving a board, hold the board with both hands, as shown in Figure 4-73.
Figure 4-73 Incorrect and correct operations for moving a board
l When installing a board, hold the front panel with one hand and support the edge of the
board with the other hand to insert it into the slot. Do not use only one hand to hold theboard or apply pressure to the edge of the board. Figure 4-74 shows correct and incorrectoperations.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
624
Figure 4-74 Incorrect and correct operations for supporting a board for installation
l When inserting a board into a slot, keep the board on the same plane as the slot. Do notbend the board or insert it at an angle. Figure 4-75 shows correct and incorrect operations.
Figure 4-75 Incorrect and correct operations for inserting a board
CAUTIONl Exercise cautions when holding and placing boards to avoid collision or scratches. Do not
stack or deform boards after they are unpacked.
l When inserting a board, ensure that it does not collide with the subrack and is properlyinstalled.
Installing the boards into the BBU
Figure 4-76 uses the WMPT and UPEU as examples to illustrate how to install boards in theBBU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
625
1. Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the fillerpanels from the slots.
2. If there are ejector levers on the panel, raise them.
3. Gently slide the board into the slot.
4. If there are ejector levers on the panel, close them.
5. Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
Figure 4-76 Installing the boards into the BBU
Installing the boards into the SLPU
Figure 4-77 uses the UELP as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the SLPU.
1. Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the fillerpanels from the slots.
2. Gently slide the board into the slot.
3. Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
Figure 4-77 Installing the boards into the SLPU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
626
4.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the outdoor distributionmodule 06D-2 (shortened to ODM) and outdoor fiber distribution 06 (shortened to OFD) on thetop or side of a cabinet.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a Phillips
screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nosepliers.
Contextl An ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed on one side of a single cabinet, or two
ODM or OFD mounting frames can be installed on one side of stacked cabinets or bothsides of a single cabinet. The ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed depending onsite space and the number of ODMs or OFDs to be installed.
l An ODM/OFD mounting frame or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are preferentiallyinstalled on the right side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets. If an ODM/OFD mountingframe or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are installed on the left side of a single cabinetor stacked cabinets, only one ODM or OFD can be installed one ODM/OFD mountingframe.
Figure 4-78 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with six or less RRUs configured)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
627
Figure 4-79 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with 7 to 12 RRUs configured)
Procedurel Installing a mounting frame or two mounting frames on one side of a single cabinet
or mounting frames or both sides of a single cabinet1. Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following
figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
628
Figure 4-80 Installing a mounting kit on the top
2. Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use a
torque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.
Figure 4-81 Installing a mounting kit on the top
3. Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use two
M6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 N·m(344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
629
Figure 4-82 Securing an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to one side of the cabinet
4. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/
OFD06 mounting frame to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-83 Tightening an attachment plate on an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame(1)
5. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the back of the cabinet base
to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
630
Figure 4-84 Tightening an attachment plate on an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame(2)
6. Optional: If two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames need to be installed on bothsides of a single cabinet, the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed onthe other side of the cabinet according to Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5.
l Installing mounting frames on one side of stacked cabinets
1. Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the followingfigure.
Figure 4-85 Installing a mounting kit on the top
2. Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use atorque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
631
Figure 4-86 Installing a mounting kit on the top
3. Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use twoM6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 N·m(344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-87 Securing an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to one side of the cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
632
4. Use two M6x14 screws to secure the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on
the installed ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame.5. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/
OFD06 mounting frame to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-88 Tightening the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame and itsattachment plate (1)
6. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the back of the cabinet base
to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
633
Figure 4-89 Tightening the second attachment plate
l Installing the ODM06D or OFD06
1. Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D or OFD06 to 1.2N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
634
Figure 4-90 Installing mounting ears
2. Place the ODM06D or OFD06 on the bulges of pre-securing parts on the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the right side of the cabinet, theODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on one side or in the middle of the mounting frame.
l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the left side of the cabinet, the ODM06Dor OFD06 can be installed only in the middle of the mounting frame.
Figure 4-91 Pre-securing the ODM06D or OFD06
(1) Pre-securing part
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
635
3. Use four M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D or OFD06 onto the ODM06D/OFD06mounting frame to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.). This is a recommended tightening torque.
Figure 4-92 Securing the ODM06D or OFD06
----End
4.9.4 Installing the SLPUDuring the upgrade, if there is no vacant slot for installing a UELP or UFLP in the BBU case,an SLPU needs to be configured.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and ESD gloves are available.
Context
The following figure shows the recommended position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 orAPM30H.
l When the SLPU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that SLPU be installed inthe top 1 U space in the APM30H.
l When the SLPU is installed in the APM30, it is recommended that SLPU be installed inthe 1 U space below the BBU in the APM30.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
636
Figure 4-93 Position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 or APM30H
(1) Recommended position for installing the SLPU inan APM30
(2) Recommended position for installing the SLPU inan APM30H
Procedure
Step 1 Install cable claws on both sides of the SLPU case, and move the mounting ear on each side onehole backwards. Use four M4 screws to secure the mounting ears to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), asshown in Figure 4-94.
Figure 4-94 Installing a cable claw
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
637
Step 2 Slide the SLPU into the cabinet, and then use a screwdriver to tighten the two M6 screws on themounting ears of the SLPU to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 4-95.
Figure 4-95 Installing the SLPU
Step 3 Install the surge protection transfer cable, as shown in Figure 4-96.
NOTE
The following figure shows the connection of an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable and an E1/T1 cable inGSM mode. For the transmission cable connections in other modes, see "Transmission Cable Connections" inBTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description or DBS3900 Hardware Description.
Figure 4-96 Installing a surge protection transfer cable
(1) T1: E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable (1) T2: E1/T1 cable
Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
4.10 Installing Cables Between Two CabinetsThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade.
4.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two CabinetsThis section describes the changes of power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables,transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
638
Power Cables, PGND Cables, and Equipotential CablesThe following table lists the changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable.
Table 4-14 Changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theAPM30H (inACscenarios)
To bereplaced(newcables needto bepreparedonsite)
- - - - OTterminal(M6)
ACINPUT porton theEPU
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Externalpowerequipment
Inputpowercablefor theTMC11H (inACscenarios)
To bereused.Theconnector atoneendneedsto bereplaced.
- - - - EPC4connector
LOAD7porton theEPU
OTterminal (M6,4 mm2
or0.006in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-12C
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
639
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theTMC11H (inDCscenarios)
To bereplaced(newcables needto bepreparedonsite)
- - - - OTterminal(M6)
Externalpowerequipment
OTterminal (M6,25mm2
or0.039in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-12C
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
640
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theRFC(in DCscenarios)
To bereplaced(newcables needto bepreparedonsite)
- - - - Dependingon thepowerequipment
Powerequipment
OTterminal (M6,agroupofcableswith across-sectional areaof 35mm2
[0.054in2] ortwogroupsofcableswith across-sectional areaof 16mm2
[0.025in2])
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-13A intheRFC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
641
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theRFC(in ACscenarios)
To bereplaced
- - - - OTterminal(M6)
RFC1terminal ontheEPUin theAPM30H
OTterminal
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-13A intheRFC
RRUpowercable
Added
- - - - EPC5orEPC4connector
A porton theODM
Dependingon theRRUmodel
PWRporton theRRU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
642
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Mainpowercable
Added
- - - - Dependingon thepowerequipment
l ACscenarios:RFC2portontheEPUintheAPM30H
l DCscenarios:externalpowerequipment
Cordendterminal
Cordendterminal baron theODM
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
643
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Powercablefor theheaterin theTMC11H
To bereused
Barewire
8-pintransferterminal ontheinnerleftwall oftheAPM30H
Barewire
8-pintransferterminal ontheinnerleftwallof theTMC11H
- - - -
Powercablesfor thebatterycabinet
To bereplaced(newcables needto bepreparedonsite)
- - - - OTterminal (M8,35mm2
or0.054in.2)
BATterminal ontheEPUin theAPM30H
OTterminal (M8,35mm2
or0.054in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheBATsilkscreen onthepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
644
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Powercablesfor theTECin theIBBS200T
To bereplaced(newcables needto bepreparedonsite)
- - - - EPC4connector
LOAD8porton theEPU
EPC4connector
FAN/TEC_INPUTporton thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T
Equipotential cable
To bereused
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin theuppercabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin thelowercabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin theuppercabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin thelowercabinet
PGNDcable
To bereused
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin thecabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Groundbusbaroutside thecabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin thecabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Groundbusbaroutside thecabinet
NOTE
(1) The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length requirementsof the new RRU.
Signal CablesThe following table lists the signal cable changes.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
645
Table 4-15 Signal cable changes
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Monitoringsignalcablefor thebatterycabinet
Tobereused
Barewire
Signaltransferterminal baron thefrontdoor oftheIBBS200T
Barewire
HPMIin theAPM30H
Barewire
Signaltransferterminal baron thefrontdoor oftheIBBS200T
Barewire
COM_485port onthePMU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
646
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
HEUA-BBUmonitoringsignalcable
Tobereused
RJ45connector
COM_IN porton theHEUAin theAPM30H
RJ45connector
MON1 porton theUPEUin theBBUin theAPM30H
RJ45connector
l COM_INport ontheCMUEAintheRFC
l COM_INport ontheCMUEAintheAPM30H
RJ45connector
l MON0port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheAPM30H
l MON1port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheAPM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
647
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Monitoringsignalcablefor thetransmissioncabinet
Tobereused
RJ45connector
COM_IN porton theHEUAin theTMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTporton theFMUA intheRFC
RJ45connector
COM_IN porton thefanassembly intheTMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport ontheCMUEAassembly intheRFC
FMUA-BBUmonitoringsignalcable
Tobereused
RJ45connector
COM_IN porton theFMUA intheRFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEUin theBBUin theAPM30H
RJ45connector
COM_IN porton theCMUEAassembly intheRFC
RJ45connector
MON0port ontheUPEUin theBBUin theAPM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
648
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
BBUinterconnectioncable
Tobereused
DLCconnector
One ofthe M0to M4portson theUCIUin theBBU
DLCconnector
l CIportontheUMPTintheBBU
l S0portontheUCIUintheBBU
DLCconnector
One ofthe M0to M4portson theUCIUin theBBU
DLCconnector
l CIport ontheUMPTintheBBU
l S0port ontheUCIUintheBBU
BBUalarmcable
Tobereused
RJ45connector
EXT_ALM0orEXT_ALM1port ontheUPEUorUEIUin theBBU
RJ45connector
Externalalarmdevice
RJ45connector
EXT_ALM0orEXT_ALM1port ontheUPEUorUEIUin theBBU
RJ45connector
Externalalarmdevice
Cablebetween twocombined basestations
Tobereused
DB15maleconnector
GCKport ontheUCIUin theBBU
MD36orDB15maleconnector
DGLUbporton theDCTB
DB15maleconnector
GCKport ontheUCIUin theBBU
MD36orDB15maleconnector
DGLUb porton theDCTB
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
649
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
External drycontactmonitoringsignalcable
Tobereused
Barewire
SLPU Dependingon theexternalequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
Barewire
SLPU Dependingon theexternalequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
Transmission Cables and CPRI Electrical CablesTable 4-16 lists the changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables.
Table 4-16 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI electrical cables
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
E1/T1cable
To bereused
DB26 maleconnector
OUTSIDE porton the UELP
Depending onthe externalequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
FE/GEEthernet cable
To bereused
RJ45 connector FE electricalport near theOUTSIDEsilkscreen onthe UFLP
RJ45 connector Router that isconnected tothe BSC
FE/GEfiberopticcable
To bereused
LC connector l FE opticalport on theGTMU,WMPT,UMPT, orUTRP inthe BBU
l FE opticalport on theLMPT orUMPT inthe BBU
l FCconnector
l SCconnector
l LCconnector
Router that isconnected tothe BSC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
650
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
E1/T1surgeprotectiontransfercable
To bereused
DB25connector
INSIDE porton the UELP
DB26connector
E1/T1 port onthe GTMU,WMPT/UMPT,or UTRP in theBBU
FE/GEsurgeprotectiontransfercable
To bereused
RJ45 connector l FEelectricalport on theGTMU,WMPT, orUMPT inthe BBU
l FEelectricalport on theLMPT orUMPT inthe BBU
RJ45 connector FE electricalport in theINSIDE part onthe UFLP in theSLPU
Interconnection cablebetween FEopticalports
To bereused
LC connector FE optical porton the GTMU,WMPT/UMPT, orLMPT/UMPTin the BBU
LC connector FE optical porton the WMPT/UMPT, LMPT/UMPT, orGTMU in theBBU
Interconnection cablebetween FEelectrical ports
To bereused
RJ45 connector FE electricalport on theGTMU,WMPT/UMPT, orLMPT/UMPTin the BBU
RJ45 connector FE electricalport on theWMPT/UMPT,LMPT/UMPT,or GTMU in theBBU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
651
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
CPRIelectrical cable
To bereused
SFP20 maleconnector
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5ports on theGTMU inthe BBU
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5 (orCPRI0 toCPRI2)ports on theWBBP inthe BBU
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5ports on theLBBP in theBBU
SFP20 maleconnector
l CPRI0 orCPRI1 porton one ofMRFU 0 toMRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofGRFU 0 toGRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofWRFU 0 toWRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofLRFU 0 toLRFU 5
RF CablesTable 4-17 lists the RF cable changes.
Table 4-17 RF cable changes
Cable ChangeType
Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
RF jumper To be reused DIN straightmaleconnector
Antennafeeder
DIN elbowmaleconnector
ANT_TX/RXA andANT_RXBports on theRFU
Inter-RFURF signalcable
To be reused QMA elbowmaleconnector
RX_OUTAport on theRFU
QMA elbowmaleconnector
RX_INBport on theRFU
4.10.2 Installing Power Cables for AC CabinetsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for variouscabinets when AC power is supplied.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
652
Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H
Input power cables for the APM30H connect the external power equipment to the input wiringterminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the APM30H.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables arepurchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
An AC-powered BTS3900A supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110V AC dual-live-wire power supplies. To support different types of power supply, the APM30Hneeds to use different input power cables, as shown in Table 4-18.
Table 4-18 Specifications of input power cables for the APM30H
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercables for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V AC three-phase power
L1wire
Brown OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l They need tobe preparedonsite.
l Black cablewith dualinsulationlayers andfour corewires
L2wire
Black OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
L3wire
Gray OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Nwire
Blue OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
653
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercables for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V ACsingle-phasepower
L wire Brown OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l They need tobe preparedonsite.
l Two wires (Land N), eachwith a singlecore and twoinsulationlayers
Nwire
Blue OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Input powercables for theAPM30Hsupplied with110 V AC dual-live-wire power
L1wire
Black OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l They need tobe preparedonsite.
l Three wires(L1, L2, andN), each witha single coreand twoinsulationlayers
L2wire
Red OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Nwire
White OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the APM30H.
1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.
2. Add OT terminals to both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cables for the APM30H, as shown in Figure 4-97, Figure 4-98, or Figure4-99.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover for the ACinput terminals, and open the protective cover.
2. Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting barfrom the L1, L2, and L3 terminals.
NOTE
When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110 V ACdual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.
3. Route the power cables into the cabinet along the left side of the cabinet interior, connecteach wire to the corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screwsto 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
654
4. Reinstall the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screw on the protectivecover to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).
Figure 4-97 Installing input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC three-phase)
(1) Short-circuiting bar
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
655
Figure 4-98 Installing input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC single-phase)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
656
Figure 4-99 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (110 V AC dual-live-wire)
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H
Power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H feed power from the APM30H to allcomponents in the TMC11H. You need to replace the connectors at both ends of the powercables from the APM30H to the TMC11H to reuse the power cables.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
657
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are
purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 4-19 lists the specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H.
Table 4-19 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H
Cable WireColor
One End The Other End Remarks
Input powercables fortheTMC11H
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector OT terminal(M6, 4 mm2 or0.006 in.2)
They can bereused and theirconnectors needto be replacedonsite.NEG
(-)wire
Blue OT terminal(M6, 4 mm2 or0.006 in.2)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC11H.1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to each end of the input power cables for the TMC11H according to the
specifications in Table 4-19. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the PowerCable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install input power cables for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 4-100.1. Remove the protective cover from the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.2. Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cables to the
DC output port LOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30H.3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminalsto 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover onto the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
658
Figure 4-100 Installing input power cables for the TMC11H
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to RFCsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from theAPM30H to RFCs.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
659
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are
purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 4-20 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to RFCs.
Table 4-20 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to RFCs
Cable WireColor
One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
DCDU-13Apower cables
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6, 25mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal(M6, 25 mm2 or0.039 in.2)
Cables arenewlydelivered.
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Power cablesbetweencascadedDCDU-13As
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6, 25mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal(M6, 25 mm2 or0.039 in.2)
Cables arenewlydelivered.
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Install input power cables for the RFC (between the APM30H and the DCDU-13A on the innerleft wall of the RFC), as shown in Figure 4-101.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC1 terminals on the EPU
in the APM30H.
NOTE
If two RFCs are configured, connect the input power cables for the second RFC to the RFC2 terminals onthe EPU.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-13A on the inner left wall of the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
660
Figure 4-101 Installing input power cables for the RFC
Step 2 Install power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As (between the left and right DCDU-13As),as shown in Figure 4-102.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the left DCDU-13A.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the right DCDU-13A.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
661
Figure 4-102 Installing power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Install Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200T
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from theAPM30H to the IBBS200T.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
662
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables arepurchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 4-21 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the BBS200T.
Table 4-21 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200T
Cable WireColor
One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Power cablesfor the TECin theIBBS200T
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector They can bereused and theirconnectors needto be replacedonsite.NEG
(-)wire
Blue
Power cablesfor thebatterycabinet
RTN(+)wire
Red OT terminal (M8, 35mm2 or 0.054 in.2)
OT terminal(M8, 35 mm2 or0.054 in.2)
They aredelivered andtheir connectorsneed to be addedonsite.NEG
(-)wire
Black
Procedure
Step 1 Add connectors to the power cables to be installed according to the specifications in Table4-21.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:
l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cablel Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable
Step 2 Install power cables for the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 4-103.1. Connect the OT terminals (M8) at one end of the power cables to the DC output terminals
near the BAT silkscreen on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box in theIBBS200T.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
663
Figure 4-103 Installing power cables for the battery cabinet
Step 3 Install power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 4-104.
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cables to the DC output port LOAD8on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the INPUT port nearthe FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
664
Figure 4-104 Installing power cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T
Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
NOTE
For easy maintenance of the power distribution box in the IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cables thatare routed in front of the power distribution box and do not bind these cables when routing them along the rightside of the IBBS200T interior.
Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
(Optional) Installing RRU Power CablesWhen an AC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables andmain power cables need to be installed onsite. RRU power cables feed power from the outdoordistribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the EPU in theAPM30H to the ODM.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
665
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The RRU power cables are
connected to the same positions and routed in the same way in a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).l The original RRU power cables can be reused only if they meet the power supply and length
requirements of the new RRUs.l The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the
RRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installationguide.
l The following table lists the specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables.
Table 4-22 Specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables
Cable Color One End The Other End Remarks
Mainpowercables
RTN(+)
Black Cord endterminal
OT terminal(M6)
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
RRUpowercables
RTN(+)
Black Cord endterminal
Depending onthe RRU port
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Add cord end terminals to RRU power cables on the ODM side according to the instructions inAssembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Use a T20 Torx screwdriver to loosen the six screws on the ODM06D-3 cover. Then open thecover, as shown in Figure 4-105.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
666
Figure 4-105 Opening the ODM06D-3 cover
Step 3 Prepare cables according to the cabling label on the protective cover.
Step 4 Install the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection box,RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable in sequence, as shown in Figure 4-106.1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cable clips.
NOTE
The screws on the cable clips can be adjusted to adapt to cables with different cross-sectional areas.
2. Partially loosen the PG connectors to route the cables through the PG connectors.3. Route the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection
box, RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable through the PG connectors insequence.
4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminals onto the terminal block.5. Use clips to secure the cables and tighten the screws on the clips to ensure that the clips
contact with the shield layers of the cables.6. Secure the PG connectors of the cables.
NOTICETighten the PG connectors to waterproof the device.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
667
Figure 4-106 Installing the cables
(1) Surge protection alarm cable (2) RRU power cables
(3) Main power cables (4) PGND cable for the surge protection box
Step 5 Close the ODM06D-3 cover and use a T20 Torx screwdriver to secure the six screws on thecover, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-107 Closing the ODM06D-3 cover
Step 6 Connect main power cables to the EPU in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
668
1. Add OT terminals to the main power cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC2 terminals on the EPUin the APM30H.
Figure 4-108 Installing the main power cables
Step 7 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 8 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 9 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
4.10.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC ScenariosThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for variouscabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
669
Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theRFC when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables arepurchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 4-23 lists the specifications of input power cables for the RFC.
Table 4-23 Specifications of input power cables for the RFC
Cable WireColor
One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercables for theRFC
(16 mm2 or0.025 in.2,two groups)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6,16 mm2 or 0.025in.2)
Depending onthe externalpowerequipment
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-) wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the RFC.
1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.
2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the RFC according to Table 1.For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install input power cables for the RFC, as shown in Figure 4-109.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-13A in the RFC.
2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
670
Figure 4-109 Installing input power cables for the RFC
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Input Power Cables for the TMC11H
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theTMC11H when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
671
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables arepurchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 4-24 lists the specifications of input power cables for the TMC11H.
Table 4-24 Input power cables for the TMC11H
Cable WireColor
One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercables for theTMC11H
(16 mm2 or0.025 in.2,one group)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6,16 mm2 or 0.025in.2)
Depending onthe externalpowerequipment
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-) wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC11H.1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the TMC11H according to Table
4-24. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install input power cables for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 4-110.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
672
Figure 4-110 Installing input power cables for the TMC11H
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
(Optional) Installing RRU Power CablesWhen a DC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables andmain power cables need to be installed onsite. RRU power cables feed power from the outdoordistribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the external powerequipment to the ODM.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
673
Contextl This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The RRU power cables are
connected to the same positions and routed in the same way in a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).l The original RRU power cables can be reused only if they meet the power supply and length
requirements of the new RRUs.l The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the
RRU. For details about how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the relatedRRU installation guide.
l The following table lists the specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables.
Table 4-25 Specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables
Cable Color One End The Other End Remarks
Mainpowercables
RTN(+)
Black Cord endterminal
Depending onthe externalpowerequipment
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
RRUpowercables
RTN(+)
Black Cord endterminal
Depending onthe RRU port
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Add cord end terminals to RRU power cables on the ODM side according to the instructions inAssembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Use a T20 Torx screwdriver to loosen the six screws on the ODM06D-3 cover. Then open thecover, as shown in Figure 4-111.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
674
Figure 4-111 Opening the ODM06D-3 cover
Step 3 Prepare cables according to the cabling label on the protective cover.
Step 4 Install the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection box,RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable in sequence, as shown in Figure 4-112.1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cable clips.
NOTE
The screws on the cable clips can be adjusted to adapt to cables with different cross-sectional areas.
2. Partially loosen the PG connectors to route the cables through the PG connectors.3. Route the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection
box, RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable through the PG connectors insequence.
4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminals onto the terminal block.5. Use clips to secure the cables and tighten the screws on the clips to ensure that the clips
contact with the shield layers of the cables.6. Secure the PG connectors of the cables.
NOTICETighten the PG connectors to waterproof the device.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
675
Figure 4-112 Installing the cables
(1) Surge protection alarm cable (2) RRU power cables
(3) Main power cables (4) PGND cable for the surge protection box
Step 5 Close the ODM06D-3 cover and use a T20 Torx screwdriver to secure the six screws on thecover, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-113 Closing the ODM06D-3 cover
Step 6 Connect the connectors at one end of RRU power cables to RRUs.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
676
Step 7 Connect main power cables to the external power equipment.
1. Add connectors to each end of the power cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.
2. Connect the cord end terminals at one end of power cables to the input ports on the ODM.
3. Connect the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.
Figure 4-114 Installing the main power cables
Step 8 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
4.10.4 Installing Transmission CablesThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing transmission cables betweena cabinet and the external transmission equipment.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
677
Installing E1/T1 CablesThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing E1/T1 cables.
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l When a TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of
E1/T1 cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30H that is shown in Figure4-115.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cables to the OUTSIDE ports on the UELP, as shown in Figure4-115.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
678
Figure 4-115 Installing E1/T1 cables
Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cables out of the cable hole on the bottom left side of thecabinet.
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing FE/GE Ethernet Cables
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE Ethernet cables.
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
679
l FE/GE Ethernet cables are shielded straight-through cables.l When a TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of
FE/GE Ethernet cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30H that is shownin Figure 4-117.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE Ethernet cables in a proper position within 1 m (3.28 ft) fromthe cable hole of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-116.1. Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE Ethernet cables, and strip a length of about
40 mm (1.57 in.) jacket from the cables to expose the shield layers2. Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through the
clip.3. Attach the ground clip to the shield layers of the FE/GE Ethernet cables and tighten the M4
screws on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (0.27 lbf·in.).
Figure 4-116 Installing the ground clip
Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) portnear the OUTSIDE silkscreen on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 4-117.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
680
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
Figure 4-117 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables
Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
681
Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic CablesThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables.
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is
labeled as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multimode optical
module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.l FE/GE fiber optic cables have an LC connector at one end and an FC, SC, or LC connector
at the other end.l SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on an LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, the two ports
cannot be used simultaneously.l SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, the two
ports cannot be used simultaneously.l This section uses the procedure for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H as
an example. The procedures for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H and aTMC11H are the same.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes maybecome abnormal. Therefore, you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical modulewithin 20 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 4-118.1. Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the corresponding
BBU board.2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.3. Lower the puller of the optical module.4. Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.5. Raise the puller of the optical module.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
682
Figure 4-118 Installing the optical module
Step 2 Insert the optical modules into the corresponding FE/GE optical ports, as shown in Figure4-119.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
Step 3 Stick temporary labels to the FE/GE fiber optic cables to be installed.
Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables into the optical module, as shown in Figure4-119.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
683
Figure 4-119 Installing FE/GE fiber optic cables
Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 6 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the FE/GE fiber optic cables with engineering labels. Fordetailed operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
4.10.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in ACScenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cablesbetween cabinets when AC power is supplied.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
684
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H.
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed
in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 4-26 lists the specifications of a monitoring signal cable betweentwo cabinets, which is installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
Table 4-26 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theAPM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 4-120.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
685
Figure 4-120 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200TThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T.
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured. The second BBU does not perform
the monitoring function. For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see MonitoringPrinciples.
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 4-27 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between twocabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
686
Table 4-27 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor thebatterycabinet(between theIBBS200TandAPM30H)
Bare wire Signal cabletransferterminal onthe frontdoor of theIBBS200T
Bare wire l Doorstatussensor intheAPM30H
l SMOKEport onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H
l IN2 porton the fanassemblyin theAPM30H
l APM30H/PMU/"TEM_BAT"
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 4-121.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
687
Figure 4-121 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the IBBS200T and APM30H),as shown in Figure 4-122.1. Connect one end of the cable to the signal junction terminal on the door of the IBBS200T.2. The cable has four pairs of wires at the other end, which are connected as follows:
l Connect the white and blue twisted pair cable to the IN2 port on the fan assembly in theAPM30H.
l Connect the white and brown twisted pair cable to the SMOKE port on the fan assemblyin the APM30H.
l Connect the white and orange twisted pair cable to the TEM_BAT port on the PMU inthe APM30H.
l Connect the white and green twisted pair cable to the door status sensor in the APM30H.Monitoring signal cables between the door status sensor and the GATE port on the PMUinside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the cabinets.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
688
Figure 4-122 Installing a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between theIBBS200T and APM30H)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed
in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 4-28 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between twocabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
689
Table 4-28 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin theTMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 4-123.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the
APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
690
Figure 4-123 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),as shown in Figure 4-124.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly in
the TMC11H.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the
RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
691
Figure 4-124 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC11H and RFC)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T+1 TMC11H.
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed
in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 4-29 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between twocabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
692
Table 4-29 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theAPM30H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC11Hand RFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin theTMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor a batterycabinet
Bare wire Signal cabletransferterminal onthe frontdoor of theIBBS200T
Bare wire l Doorstatussensor intheAPM30H
l SMOKEport onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H
l IN2 porton the fanassemblyin theAPM30H
l TEM_BAT porton thePMU intheAPM30H
To be reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
693
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 4-125.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in theAPM30H.
Figure 4-125 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the IBBS200T and APM30H),as shown in Figure 4-126.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the signal junction terminal on the door of the IBBS200T.
2. The cable has four pairs of wires at the other end, which are connected as follows:
l Connect the white and blue twisted pair cable to the IN2 port on the fan assembly in theAPM30H.
l Connect the white and brown twisted pair cable to the SMOKE port on the fan assemblyin the APM30H.
l Connect the white and orange twisted pair cable to the TEM_BAT port on the PMU inthe APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
694
l Connect the white and green twisted pair cable to the door status sensor in the APM30H.Monitoring signal cables between the door status sensor and the GATE port on the PMUinside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the cabinets.
Figure 4-126 Installing a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),as shown in Figure 4-127.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly in
the TMC11H.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
695
Figure 4-127 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC11H and RFC)
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
4.10.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48V DC Scenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cablesbetween cabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H.
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed
in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
696
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 4-30 lists the specifications of a monitoring signal cable betweentwo cabinets, which is installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
Table 4-30 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(betweenthe RFC andTMC11H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU in theTMC11H
To bereused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown inFigure 4-128.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the
TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
697
Figure 4-128 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC11H)
Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs.
ContextMonitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of thecabinets. Table 4-31 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets,which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
698
Table 4-31 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andTMC11H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theTMC11H
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theRFC andextensionTMC11H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin theextensionTMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown inFigure 4-129.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the
TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
699
Figure 4-129 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC11H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the RFC and extensionTMC11H), as shown in Figure 4-130.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
in the extension TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
700
Figure 4-130 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe RFC and extension TMC11H)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured. The second BBU does not perform
the monitoring function. For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see MonitoringPrinciples.
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 4-32 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between twocabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
701
Table 4-32 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenarioof 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs
Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(betweenthe RFC andTMC11H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU in theTMC11H
To bereused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweenthe RFC andextensionTMC11H)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefanassembly intheextensionTMC11H
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
To bereused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweentwo RFCs)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe rightRFC
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe left RFC
To bereused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown inFigure 4-131.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the
TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
702
Figure 4-131 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC11H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the RFC and extensionTMC11H), as shown in Figure 4-132.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the right
RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
in the extension TMC11H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
703
Figure 4-132 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe RFC and extension TMC11H)
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between two RFCs), as shownin Figure 4-133.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the left
RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the
right RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
704
Figure 4-133 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweentwo RFCs)
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
4.10.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal CablesThis section describes how to install inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or single-mode basestation.
Prerequisitesl The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.
l The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.
l The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable.
Optical modules can be divided into single- and multimode optical modules, which can bedistinguished as follows:
l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode opticalmodule is black or gray.
l The transmission mode is displayed as "SM" on the label of a single-mode optical moduleand "MM" on the label of a multimode optical module.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
705
There is a label on each optical module, which provides information such as the rate, wavelength,and transmission mode, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-134 Label on an optical module
(1) Rate (2) Wavelength (3) Transmission mode
Context
The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBUsignal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU SignalCable Connections.
Table 4-33 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected
InterconnectionMode
Installation Position
BBU 0 BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT M0 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_U
M1 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_L
HEI port on the WBBPf HEI port on the WBBPf
NOTE
BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the opticalmodules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
706
1. Lower the puller of the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the port.3. Raise the puller of the optical module.
Figure 4-135 Installing the optical module
Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 4-136.
Figure 4-136 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable
Step 3 Install one or two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT. The followingfigure shows the installation of two inter-BBU signal cables.
NOTE
l You need to install two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+UL mode.
l You need to install only one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+L or GL+Umode.
1. Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0.2. Connect the other end of the cables to the CI ports on the UMPT_U and UMPT_L in BBU
1.
Step 4 Install one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the WBBPf to the WBBPf, as shown in thefollowing figure. The inter-BBU signal cable is installed only to interconnect the WBBPf in aBBU to the WBBPf in another BBU.1. Connect one end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 0.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
707
NOTE
l When both BBUs are installed in an APM30H, install inter-BBU signal cables, as shown in Figure 4-137.When BBU 0 and BBU 1 are installed in an APM30H and a TMC11H, respectively, install inter-BBU signalcables, as shown in Figure 4-138.
l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the sametype as those on BBU 0.
l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1Aand 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1.
l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.
Figure 4-137 Installing inter-BBU signal cables (1)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
708
Figure 4-138 Installing inter-BBU signal cables (2)
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic patchcord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBUinterconnection signal cable before using cable ties to secure it. If another type of cable is usedas a BBU interconnection signal cable, directly use cable ties to secure it.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
4.10.8 Installing the RF JumperThe RF jumper transmits signals between the RFU and antenna system.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a cable cutter, PVC insulation tape, and an open-end wrench or torque wrench.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the RF jumper into the cabinet through the cable outlet in the cabinet according to one ofthe manners shown in Figure 4-139. Lay out the installed RF jumper according to the instructionsin Cabling Requirements.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
709
Figure 4-139 Routing of the RF jumper
Step 2 Install the RF jumper, as shown in Figure 4-141 and Figure 4-140.
NOTICEConnect each RF jumper securely to prevent RF signal leakage.
Figure 4-140 Installing RF jumpers for interconnected RFUs
NOTE
Inter-RFU RF signal cables have been installed in the cabinet before delivery. You only need to check whetherthe cables are securely connected.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
710
Figure 4-141 Installing RF jumpers for independent RFUs
1. Connect the DIN connector on the RF jumper to the ANT port on the RFU panel.2. Use a 32 mm (1.26 in.) open-end wrench or torque wrench to tighten the two DIN
connectors from bottom to top. Ensure that the tightening torque reaches 25 N·m to 35 N·m(221.27 lbf·in. to 309.78 lbf·in.).
Figure 4-142 Tightening the DIN connectors
Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumpers according to the instructions in Attaching the ColorRing.
Step 4 Connect the DIN straight male connector at the other end of the jumper to the connector on thefeeder.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
711
4.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical CablesCPRI electrical cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RFUs.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove dustproof bags from the connectors at both ends of the CPRI electrical cables.
Step 2 Insert the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables into the CPRI ports on thecorresponding board in the BBU.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D) HardwareDescription.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing CPRI Cables.
Step 3 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cables through the cable holes on the left side of thepower cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the correspondingRFUs, as shown in Figure 4-143.
Figure 4-143 Installing CPRI electrical cables
Step 4 Connect the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables to the CPRI0 ports on thepanels of the RFUs, as shown in Figure 4-143.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
712
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
NOTE
l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cables at the top of the DCDU-13A in the RFC or inthe base of the RFC.
l Lay out the cables according to the manners in Figure 4-143. Ensure that the cables are routed to the RFUsthrough the cable bridge above the RFUs.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
4.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic CablesCPRI fiber optic cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RRUs.
Contextl This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The CPRI fiber optic cables are
connected to the same positions and routed in the same way in a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is
labeled as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical
module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes maybecome abnormal. Therefore, you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical modulewithin 20 minutes.
For the details about the cable connections,l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base
Station Cables.l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing
CPRI Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 4-144.1. Lower the puller of the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP. Then insert
an optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on theRF module.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
713
NOTE
Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.
3. Raise the puller of the optical module.
Figure 4-144 Installing the optical module
Step 2 Install CPRI fiber optic cables, as shown in Figure 4-145 and Figure 4-146.1. Stick temporary labels to the CPRI fiber optic cables to be installed.2. Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors on the fiber optic cables.3. Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into
the optical modules in the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP, and then insert the DLC connectorslabeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module in the RF module.
NOTICEl When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout fiber optic
cables on the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.03 m (1.18in.), respectively.
l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX port on the BBU must be connected to theTX port on the RF module, and the RX port on the BBU must be connected to the RXport on the RF module.
Figure 4-145 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
714
Figure 4-146 Installing CPRI fiber optic cables
Step 3 Route CPRI fiber optic cables out of the cabinet from the cable hole on the left bottom. Fordetails about how to route the cables, see Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Replace the temporary labels on the CPRI fiber optic cables with engineering labels. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
4.11 Installation ChecklistAfter the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installationenvironment, and cable-related items.
Cabinet Installation ChecklistTable 4-34 describes the cabinet installation checklist.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
715
Table 4-34 Cabinet installation checklist
No. Item
1 The installation position of the cabinet strictly complies with the engineeringdesign.
2 The base is securely installed.
3 All the bolts, including those for electrical connections, are tightened. The springwashers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.
4 The cabinet is neat and clean.
5 The paint on the surface is satisfactory. The damaged paint is repaired. For details,see 3.14.3 Repainting.
6 Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.
Installation Environment Checklist
Table 4-35 describes the installation environment checklist.
Table 4-35 Installation environment checklist
No. Item
1 No excessive straps or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.
2 No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around the cabinet.
3 Antirust powder on the door of the cabinet is cleared.
Electrical Connection Checklist
Table 4-36 describes the electrical connection checklist.
Table 4-36 Electrical connection checklist
No. Item
1 All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters. Thereshould not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed.
2 The PGND cable is securely connected and the AC input power cable and cablesin the cabinet are correctly connected according to the electrical design of the powersystem. The screws are tightened. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not short-circuited.
3 The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off rather than coiled.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
716
No. Item
4 The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are securely solderedor crimped.
5 The bare wires and the terminal handles at the wiring terminals are coated with heatshrink tubing.
6 The flat washer and the spring washer are well mounted on all OT terminals.
7 The exterior of the battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.
8 The shell of the battery is clean without any leakage trace.
9 The wiring post on the battery stands properly without any damage, and the post isnot covered with any acid substances.
10 The pressure relief valve of the battery is not deformed, and no liquid leaks.
11 The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positiveand negative poles.
12 The voltage of the battery is normal.l The voltage of a 2 V battery cell ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.l The voltage of a 12 V battery cell ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.l The total voltage of the batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.
13 The circuit breakers for the batteries are set to OFF.
Cable Installation Checklist
Table 4-37 describes the cable installation checklist.
Table 4-37 Cable installation checklist
No. Item
1 All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are securelyconnected. All cable connectors at the bottom of the cabinet are securely installed.
2 The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and facethe same direction.
3 Different types of power cables are bound separately when being routed, forexample, the power cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber optic cables, and E1/T1/FE cables.
4 The layout of all cables facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion. Forexample, the maintenance transfer cable is bound to the outside of the BBU cableclaw, as shown in Figure 4-147.
5 Legible labels are attached to both ends of all cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
717
No. Item
6 The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are smoothwithout sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.2 in.) of theoutdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.
7 The port that no cable is connected to is properly protected.
8 The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid false connection that will causean abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).
Figure 4-147 Checking the maintenance transfer cable
Checklist for the Hardware Upgrade
Table 4-38 describes the checklist for the hardware upgrade.
Table 4-38 Checklist for the hardware upgrade
No.
Cabinet Item
1 APM30H orTMC11H
The vacant customer space in the cabinet has been configured withthe filler module.
2 APM30H orTMC11H
The ELU has been installed. For detailed operations, see 4.4.4Installing an ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
3 APM30H orTMC11H
The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 4.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
4 APM30H orTMC11H
The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 4.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
718
No.
Cabinet Item
5 APM30H orTMC11H
The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 4.4.8 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
6 APM30H orTMC11H
The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 4.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 4.9.1 Installing aBBU Case.
7 APM30H orTMC11H
The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 4.4.8 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
8 APM30H The input power cable for the APM30H has been replaced. Fordetailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cables for theAPM30H.
9 APM30H The power transfer cable for the APM30H has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 4.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
10 APM30H The PGND cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 4.4.5 Replacing the Power System.
11 APM30H The monitoring signal transfer cable and CMUEA-BBUmonitoring signal cable have been installed. For detailedoperations, see 4.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
12 TMC11H The CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable has been installed.For detailed operations, see 4.5.7 Installing Cables in theCabinet.
13 RFC The ELU assembly has been installed. For detailed operations, see4.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel. Ensurethat all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. Anincorrect or faulty ELU may cause problems in heat dissipationor monitoring.
14 RFC The monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor,monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, ELU signalcable, and monitoring signal cable for the fan have been installed.For detailed operations, see 4.6.6 Installing Cables in theCabinet.
15 RFC The input power cable for the RFC has been replaced. For detailedoperations, see Installing Power Cables from the APM30H toRFCs or Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC.
16 - The shield layer of the RRU power cable has been grounded. Fordetailed operations, see (Optional) Installing RRU PowerCables or (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
719
No.
Cabinet Item
17 IBBS200T The power cable for the storage batteries has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 4.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries andCables in the Battery Cabinet.
4.12 Powering On a Base StationThis section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supplyto the components in a cabinet.
Prerequisitesl Input power cables for the BTS3900A are correctly connected.
l The power supply to the BTS3900A meets the requirements of the power system.
l The external power supply to the BTS3900A has been shut off.
l All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.
l All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been set to OFF.
l All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T havebeen set to OFF.
l Switch on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T has been set to OFF.
l Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.
l Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.
Context
DANGERExercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves some high voltageoperations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact with the input voltage usinga damp object may be fatal.
NOTICEl Power on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it. If you power off a cabinet or
BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU formaintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
720
Table 4-39 Circuit breakers in BTS3900A base stations
BaseStation
Power Device(1) Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A(Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,DCDU-03C, or powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A or EPS 01Cl BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2
circuit breakers on the power distribution boxin an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU0 toRFU5 circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 (Thecircuit breakers control the power input to theBBU, fan assembly, and RFUs.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control thepower input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fanassembly, and customer transmissionequipment.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control thepower input to the BBU, fan assembly, andcustomer transmission equipment.)
BTS3900A(Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 orEPU03A-04,DCDU-11A,DCDU-11B,DCDU-11C, and powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02 orEPU03A-04
l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2circuit breakers on the power distribution boxin an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11A (SW0 to SW8 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,FAN 01B, and BBU 0 and BBU 1. The SW9circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA, and FAN 02B. TheSW9 circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11C (SW0 to SW5 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the transmissionequipment. SW6 to SW9 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to BBU 0 and BBU 1,EMUA, and FAN 02B.)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
721
BaseStation
Power Device(1) Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A(Ver.D)
EPU05A-02 orEPU05A-04,DCDU-12A,DCDU-12B,DCDU-12C, and powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02 orEPU05A-04
l BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers onthe power distribution box in an IBBS200D orIBBS200T
l Switch on the power distribution box in anIBBS700D or IBBS700T
NOTE
(1) In this section, EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 and EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 are shortened to EPU, EPS 01Aor EPS 01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.
ProcessThe following figure shows the power-on check process.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
722
Figure 4-148 Power-on check process
Procedurel Power on an AC base station.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
723
1. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply andthe ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.
2. Optional: If the base station is configured with a battery cabinet, set the BAT circuitbreaker on the EPU or EPS to ON and set the circuit breaker on the power distributionbox in the battery cabinet to ON. Otherwise, skip this substep.
3. Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and batterycabinet.
4. Set the circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS for the corresponding components to ON,and check the power supply status of each component.
Table 4-40 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU or EPS
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
APM30H PMU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
PSU l The power indicator is steady green.l The fault indicator is steady off.
Fanassembly
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
IBBS200DorIBBS200T
Fan or TECin the frontdoor
The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the RUNindicator on the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA isblinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1sand off for 1s).
IBBS700D Fan in thefront doorandCMUEA
The fan is working properly, and the RUN indicatoron the CMUEA is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
IBBS700T TEC andCMUF
The TEC is working properly, and the RUN indicatoron the CMUF is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
5. Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on each DCDU
in the RFC and TMC11H to ON. Skip this substep if there is no circuit breaker on theDCDU, such as the DCDU-12A, DCDU-12B, and DCDU-12C.
6. Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.7. Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
724
Table 4-41 Normal status of components in the cabinet
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
APM30H BBU l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and offfor 1s). The indicators indicating the status of theCPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.
TMC11H FAN 02A/FAN 02B/FAN 02D
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
RFC RFU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
FAN 01A/FAN 01B/FAN 01C
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
- RRU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, checkwhether the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.
NOTE
The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other indicators, seeBBU Hardware Description.
8. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
725
Table 4-42 Troubleshooting
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to allcomponents in thecabinet
Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit
breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.
Failure in the powersupply to a board inthe BBU
Check as follows:1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the
slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the statusof indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove theboard, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards ofthe same type, and check the status of the indicators.l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
726
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to othercomponents in thecabinet
Check as follows:1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skipthis step and go to step 2 if this component does not useany fuse terminal block.l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse accordingto the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, goto step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to thecomponent.l If the input power is normal, replace the component.l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connectedsecurely. If the power cable is not securelyconnected, turn off the circuit breaker for thecomponent (if there is no circuit breaker for thecomponent, remove the connector from the powerunit) and reconnect the power cable. If the powercable is securely connected, the protector (such ascircuit breaker or fuse) on the component may bedamaged. In this case, replace the damagedprotector. If the protector cannot be replaced,replace the upper-level power distributioncomponent.
l Power on a DC base station.
1. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply andthe ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.
2. Turn on the external power switch to power on the RFC cabinet. Power on theTMC11H if it is configured as a transmission cabinet.
3. Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the RFC to ON.Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as DCDU-12Aand DCDU-12B.
4. Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the TMC11Hto ON. Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such asDCDU-12C.
5. Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.6. Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
727
Table 4-43 Normal status of components in the cabinet
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
TMC11H BBU l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and offfor 1s).
FAN 02A/FAN 02B/FAN 02D
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
RFC RFU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
FAN 01A/FAN 01B/FAN 01C
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
- RRU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
7. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,
handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.
Table 4-44 Troubleshooting
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to allcomponents in thecabinet
Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit
breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
728
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to a board inthe BBU
Check as follows:1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the
slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the statusof indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove theboard, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards ofthe same type, and check the status of the indicators.l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.
Failure in the powersupply to othercomponents in thecabinet
Check as follows:1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skipthis step and go to step 2 if this component does not useany fuse terminal block.l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse accordingto the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, goto step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to thecomponent.l If the input power is normal, replace the component.l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connectedsecurely. If the power cable is not securelyconnected, turn off the circuit breaker for thecomponent (if there is no circuit breaker for thecomponent, remove the connector from the powerunit) and reconnect the power cable. If the powercable is securely connected, the protector (such ascircuit breaker or fuse) on the component may bedamaged. In this case, replace the damagedprotector. If the protector cannot be replaced,replace the upper-level power distributioncomponent.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
729
4.13 Subsequent OperationsThis section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgradedand checked.
4.13.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet DoorThe barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label on the cabinetdoor need to be replaced after the upgrade.
ContextThe front door of the cabinet has been replaced during restructuring of the APM30H andTMC11H cabinets. You only need to replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card,and power distribution label.
Procedure
Step 1 Stick the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to theAPM30H and TMC11H cabinets. Their positions are shown in Figure 4-149.
Figure 4-149 Positions of labels for the cabinet
(1) Barcode label (2) Qualification card (3) Power distribution label (4) Nameplate
Step 2 Replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label in the RFCand IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinets.1. Take out the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label
for the cabinet.2. Stick the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to
the same positions as the original labels in the cabinet.
----End
4.13.2 Sealing Cable HolesAfter all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable holes on the base.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
730
Procedure
Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet, asshown in the following figure.
Figure 4-150 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet
(1) Fireproof mud
Step 2 Seal the RF cable holes in the RFC, as shown in the following figure.
1. Route the cables through the corresponding cable holes, and install the cable outlet moduleon the bottom of the cabinet.
2. Use rubber caps to seal the unused cable holes in the cable outlet module.
3. Tighten the screw on the cable outlet module.
Figure 4-151 Sealing the cable holes in the RFC
(1) Cable holes for thepower cables
(2) Cable holes for CPRIelectrical cables
(3) Cable hole for themonitoring signal cable
(4) Cable hole for theequipotential cable
(5) Cable hole for themonitoring signal cable
(6) Screw - -
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
731
Step 3 Push the baffle plates on both sides of the base forwards until the baffle plates contact with thecables, and then tighten the screws on the baffle plates, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-152 Closing baffle plates of the cable holes on both sides of the base
Step 4 Push the baffle plate on the rear of the base forwards until the baffle plate contact with the cables,and then tighten the screw on the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-153 Closing the baffle plate of the cable hole on the rear of the base
Step 5 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
732
Figure 4-154 Sealing cable holes on the base
(1) Fireproof mud
Step 6 Tighten the two screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate, as shownin the following figure.
Figure 4-155 Closing the baffle plate of the cable hole on the rear of the base
----End
4.13.3 RepaintingThe paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept satisfactory. Therefore, any damaged paintmust be repaired.
Prerequisites
Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to Table 4-45.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
733
Table 4-45 Color codes
Applied to Color Huawei Code International Code
Cabinet RAL7035 YB026 RAL7035
Base 3010 light gray YB030 Pantone 422U
Procedure
Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, rub the area with sandpaperslightly to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in Figure 4-156.
Figure 4-156 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper
Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or dust from therubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with another clean cloth, as shown inFigure 4-157.
Figure 4-157 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
734
Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color.
Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the paint. Then applythe paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be observed, as shown in Figure 4-158.
NOTICEThe paint coating should be as thin as possible. No drops are allowed on the paint coating, andthe surface should be smooth.
Figure 4-158 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet
Step 5 Perform subsequent operations after the repaired paint coating is exposed in the air for 30minutes.
NOTE
The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the surrounding areas, withoutobvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no longer be distinguishable. In addition, thereshould be no paint peeled off.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
735
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with BreathableFilm) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A (withbreathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).
5.1 Introduction to UpgradeThis section describes configuration of enhanced cabinets after being upgraded and reuseprocedures.
5.2 Installation PreparationsThis chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It alsospecifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
5.3 Unpacking CheckUnpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
5.4 Restructuring the APM30This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30to be restructured.
5.5 Restructuring the TMCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC tobe restructured.
5.6 Restructuring the RFC CabinetThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFCcabinet to be restructured.
5.7 Restructuring the BBCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the BBC tobe restructured.
5.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
736
A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure propergrounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinetsto ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.
5.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their CablesThis chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting themodules to external devices.
5.10 Installing Cables Between Two CabinetsThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade.
5.11 Installation ChecklistAfter the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installationenvironment, and cable-related items.
5.12 Powering On a Base StationThis section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supplyto the components in a cabinet.
5.13 Subsequent OperationsThis section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgradedand checked.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
737
5.1 Introduction to UpgradeThis section describes configuration of enhanced cabinets after being upgraded and reuseprocedures.
5.1.1 Restructured Cabinets InteriorTo meet requirements in different outdoor environments, Huawei provides various cabinets forthe separated macro base station such as BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1) and distributed base stationsuch as DBS3900 (Ver.D_A1). The cabinets include the APM30 (Ver.D_A1), TMC(Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A), and BBC (Ver.D_A1), which provide different functions.
APM30 InteriorThe following figure shows the APM30 interior.
Figure 5-1 APM30 interior
The following table describes the components in the APM30.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
738
Table 5-1 Components in the APM30
No.
Component
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantityin aSingleCabinet
Description
1 Temperature sensor
Mandatory
1 It is located on the front door of the cabinet and reports theambient temperature outside the cabinet.
2 Magnet of adoor statussensor
Mandatory
1 The door status sensor reports the door status, whetheropen or closed.
3 Breathablefilm
Mandatory
1 It is located on the front door of the cabinet and used forheat exchanging and dissipation.
4 Filler panel Mandatory
1 It replaces the APM Power Monitor unit Interface Board(APMI) and is used as an air damper.
5 Fanassemblyon the top ofthe cabinetinterior
Mandatory
1 The fan assembly on the top of the cabinet interior consistsof the support, fan interface board, and fan. The support isnewly developed. The fan interface board and fan arereused.
6 CMUEAassembly
Mandatory
1 The Central Monitoring Unit type EA (CMUEA) assemblyconsists of the support, CMUEA, and electronic label unit(ELU).
7 EPU Mandatory
1 The EPU converts AC power to DC power and feeds theDC power into the devices in the cabinet. The EPU consistsof the EPU subrack, PMU, and PSUs.
8 BBU Mandatory
1 The BBU is installed in the 2 U space below the EPU,processing baseband signals.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
739
No.
Component
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantityin aSingleCabinet
Description
9 SLPU Mandatory
2 l To provide protection for trunk signals, a signallightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory andinstalled in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It isconfigured with the universal E1/T1 lightningprotection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightningprotection unit (UFLP).
l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPUis optional and installed in the 1 U space below theBBU. It is configured with two universal signallightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.
10 GATM Optional
2 The GSM Antenna and TMA Control module (GATM)reports the RET control alarm signals.
11 EMUA Optional
1 An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) monitorsthe environment in a cabinet and processes alarms. TheEMUA must be configured when more than 16 Booleanalarm inputs are required. It is installed in the 1 U spacebelow the BBU.
12 AC heater Optional
1 The AC heater ensures that components in the cabinet workwithin the acceptable temperature range when thesurrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heaterand an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1U space above the SOU.
13 SOU Optional
1 The SOU can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom ofthe cabinet, transferring AC power supply to the customerequipment.
TMC InteriorThere are two types of TMC:
l One type of TMC houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration A in thefollowing figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
740
l The other type of TMC houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, asshown in illustration B in the following figure.
Figure 5-2 TMC interior
The following table describes the components in the TMC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
741
Table 5-2 Components in the TMC
No.
Component
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantityin aSingleCabinet
Description
1 Temperature sensor
Mandatory
1 It is located on the front door of the cabinet and reports theambient temperature outside the cabinet.
2 Magnet of adoor statussensor
Mandatory
1 The door status sensor reports the door status, whetheropen or closed.
3 Breathablefilm
Mandatory
1 It is located on the front door of the cabinet and used forheat exchanging and dissipation.
4 Filler panel Mandatory
1 It is used as an air damper when replacing the APM PowerMonitor unit Interface Board (APMI).
5 Fanassemblyon the top ofthe cabinetinterior
Mandatory
1 The fan assembly on the top of the cabinet interior consistsof the support, fan interface board, and fan. The support isnewly developed. The fan interface board and fan arereused.
6 CMUEAassembly
Mandatory
1 The Central Monitoring Unit type EA (CMUEA) assemblyconsists of the support, CMUEA, and electronic label unit(ELU).
7 DCDU Mandatory
1 The direct current distribution unit (DCDU), such as theDCDU-12B and DCDU-12C, is 1 U high and provides tenDC power outputs for components in the TMC.
8 BBU Mandatory
1 It is a baseband processing unit.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
742
No.
Component
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantityin aSingleCabinet
Description
9 SLPU Mandatory
2 l To provide protection for trunk signals, a signallightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory andinstalled in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It isconfigured with the universal E1/T1 lightningprotection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightningprotection unit (UFLP).
l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPUis optional and installed in the 1 U space below theBBU. It is configured with two universal signallightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.
10 GATM Optional
2 The GSM Antenna and TMA Control module (GATM)reports the RET control signal alarms.
11 EMUA Optional
1 An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) monitorsthe environment in a cabinet and processes alarms. TheEMUA must be configured when more than 16 Booleanalarm inputs are required. It is installed in the 1 U spacebelow the BBU.
12 AC heater Optional
1 The AC heater ensures that components in the cabinet workwithin the acceptable temperature range when thesurrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heaterand an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1U space above the SOU.
RFC InteriorThe Radio Frequency Cabinet (RFC) is used by the BTS3900A and provides installation spacefor RFUs.
The following figure shows the RFC interior.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
743
Figure 5-3 RFC interior
The following table describes the components in the RFC.
Table 5-3 Components in the RFC
No. Module/Board
OptionalorMandatory
MaximumQuantityin a SingleCabinet
Description
1 CMUEAassembly
Mandatory
1 The Central Monitoring Unit type EA(CMUEA) assembly consists of the supportand CMUEA.
2 DCDU-13A
Mandatory
2 The DCDU-13A is a direct currentdistribution unit. It provides four 30 A and-48 V DC power outputs.
3 ELUassembly
Mandatory
1 The ELU assembly consists of a supportand an electronic label unit (ELU). TheELU automatically reports the cabinet type.
4 Fanassembly
Mandatory
2 A fan assembly dissipates heat from thecabinet. It contains two standalone fans.
5 RFUs Mandatory
6 Radio frequency units (RFUs) are used inmacro base stations. They performmodulation and demodulation of basebandsignals and RF signals, data processing,power amplifying, and VSWR test.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
744
BBC InteriorThe following figure shows the BBC interior.
Figure 5-4 BBC interior
The following table describes the components in the BBC.
Table 5-4 Components in the BBC
No. Module/Board
Optional orMandatory
MaximumQuantityin aSingleCabinet
Description
1 Junctionterminal forthe inputpower cableof the heatingfilm
Mandatory
1 The junction terminal provides the inputpower port for the heating film
2 Storagebattery
Mandatory
8 The storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
745
No. Module/Board
Optional orMandatory
MaximumQuantityin aSingleCabinet
Description
3 Negativepower inputterminal forthe storagebattery group
Mandatory
1 It feeds power into the battery cabinet.
4 Positivepower inputterminal forthe storagebattery group(positivewiringterminal forstoragebatteries)
Mandatory
1 It feeds power into the battery cabinet.
5 Circuitbreaker for thestoragebatteries
Mandatory
1 It controls whether to connect theexternal power supply to the storagebatteries.
6 Negativewiringterminal forstoragebatteries
Mandatory
1 -
5.1.2 Restructuring ProcessThis section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade from BTS3900A(with breathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).
Restructuring Process in AC ScenariosThe following figure shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site suppliedwith AC power.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
746
Figure 5-5 Restructuring process
Restructuring Process in DC ScenariosThe following figure shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site suppliedwith DC power.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
747
Figure 5-6 Restructuring process
5.2 Installation PreparationsThis chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It alsospecifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
5.2.1 Pre-upgrade CheckThis section describes the operations that must be taken before the hardware upgrade.
You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:
l Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properlybefore the upgrade.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
748
l Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need tocontact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.
5.2.2 Upgrade PreparationsThis section describes the preparations needed for the upgrade.
Table 5-5 lists the requirements on the current software version of the base station before theupgrade.
Table 5-5 Versions before the upgrade
Product Name Version before Upgrade
SingleRAN7.0 series V100R007C00SPC240 and later
SingleRAN6.0 series V100R004C00SPC190 and later
5.2.3 Document PreparationsThis section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.
l Before the installation, familiarize yourself with related information in the followingdocuments:
– BTS3900A GSM Hardware Description (with Breathable Film)
– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description
– BTS3900A&DBS3900 Post-Upgrade Hardware Description
– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide
– BTS3900A GSM Site Maintenance Guide (with Breathable Film)
– Safety Precautions
l During the installation, refer to the following document:
– Installation Reference
5.2.4 Tools and InstrumentsThis section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation.
Marker Phillips screwdriver (M3 toM6)
Flat-head screwdriver (M3 toM6)
Diagonal pliers
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
749
32 mm (1.26 in.)combination wrench
Socket wrench Torque wrench
Power cable crimping tool RJ45 crimping tool Cable cutter
Rubber mallet Soldering iron Wire stripper
Hammer drill (Φ16) Heat gun Level
Multimeter Measuring tape Vacuum cleaner
ESD wrist strap ESD gloves Torque screwdriver
Gloves - -
5.2.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite PersonnelOnsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsitepersonnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.
Before the installation, pay attention to the following items:
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
750
l The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with theproper installation and operation methods.
l The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installationenvironment. Generally, only three to five onsite personnel are necessary.
5.3 Unpacking CheckUnpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
ContextNOTE
When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:
l Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.
l Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweat-soaked gloves, or dirty gloves.
NOTICEl Powered on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.
If... Then...
The total number tallies with the packinglist
Go to Step 2.
The total number does not tally with thepacking list
Find out the cause and report any missingarticles to the local Huawei office.
Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case.
If... Then...
The exterior of the packing case is intact Go to Step 3.
The outer packing is severely damaged orsoaked
Find out the cause and report any missingarticles to the local Huawei office.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
751
If... Then...
The mark on the shockwatch label is red. Do not open the case. Claim compensationfrom the transportation company.
Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list.
If... Then...
Types and quantity of the article tally withthose on the packing list
Sign the Packing List with the customer.
There are any goods missing, incorrectlydelivered, or damaged
Send feedback to the local Huawei office.
CAUTIONTo protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep theunpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment,packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file thephotos.
----End
5.4 Restructuring the APM30This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30to be restructured.
5.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theAPM30
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the APM30.
Component Changes in the APM30The following figure shows component changes in the APM30.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
752
Figure 5-7 Components in the APM30
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 Front door To bereplaced
The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heatdissipation capacity of the cabinet.
2 APMI To beremoved
-
3 PMU To bereplaced
-
4 Fanassembly
To bereplaced
The fan assembly needs to be replaced to enhance theheat dissipation capacity.
5 PSU (AC/DC)
To bereplaced
The PSUs need to be replaced to enhance the powerdistribution capability.
6 AFMU To bereplaced
The AFMU needs to be replaced with a CMUEAassembly, which contains an ELU. The ELU reports thecabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
7 Door statussensor
To bereused
-
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
753
No. Component
Change Type
Description
8 Powersubrack(AC/DC)
To bereplaced
The power subrack (AC/DC) needs to be replaced withan EPU 05 to meet the power requirement of a largeconfiguration.
9 PDU To bereplaced
10 BBU3900 To bereused
-
11 GATM To beremoved
-
12 EMUA To bereused
The environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA)monitors the environment in a cabinet and processesalarms. The EMUA must be configured when more than16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. It is installed in the1 U space below the BBU.
13 Filler panel To bereplaced
-
- SLPU Added An SLPU can be added according to customerrequirements.
Cable Changes in the APM30Figure 5-8 lists the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the APM30.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
754
Figure 5-8 Equipotential cable and power cables in the APM30
No. Cable One End The Other End Change Type
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
Installation Position
P0 PGNDcable forthe frontdoor
OTterminal
Groundpoint onthe innerwall of theAPM30
OTterminal
Front doorof theAPM30
To beremoved
P1 GATMpowercable
OTterminal
LOAD0terminal onthe PDU intheAPM30
OTterminal
-48Vterminal onthe GATM
To beremoved
P2 GATMpowercable
OTterminal
LOAD1terminal onthe PDU intheAPM30
OTterminal
-48Vterminal onthe GATM
To beremoved
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
755
No. Cable One End The Other End Change Type
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
Installation Position
P3 EMUApowercable
OTterminal
LOAD3terminal onthe PDU intheAPM30
Cord endterminal
PWR1terminal onthe EMUA
To bereused
P4 AFMUpowercable
OTterminal
LOAD4terminal onthe PDU intheAPM30
3V3connector
PWR porton theHEUA
To beremoved
P5 BBUpowercable
OTterminal
LOAD5terminal onthe PDU intheAPM30
3V3connector
-48V porton the BBU
To bereplaced
P6 Powercable withthe transferterminal
Bare wire Transferterminal
OTterminal
ACOUTPUTterminal onthe EPU
To bereused
P7 Powercable foran ACheater
Bare wire ACOUTPUTterminal onthe PDU intheAPM30
Bare wire AC heater To bereused
The following figure shows the signal cable changes in the APM30.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
756
Figure 5-9 Signal cable changes in the APM30
No. Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S0 Environment monitoringsignal cablefor thepowercabinet
DB50 maleconnector
J1 port onthe APMI inthe APM30
DB50 maleconnector
COM porton the PMUin theAPM30
To beremoved
S1 APMI-PMUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
RS232/RS422 porton the PMU
RJ45connector
RS422 porton the APMIin theAPM30
To beremoved
S2 APMI-GATM1monitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM INport on theHEUA
RJ45connector
COM OUTport on theGATM inthe fanassembly ofthe APM30
To beremoved
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
757
No. Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
S3 GATM1-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM INport on theGATM1
RJ45connector
MON1 porton theUPEU in theBBU
To beremoved
S4 GATM0-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM INport on theGATM0
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU
To beremoved
S5 Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatussensor
2-pinconnector
TX+, TX-,RX+, andRX- on theAPMI in theAPM30
Bare wire Door statussensor
To bereused
S6 AFMUmonitoringsignal cable
DB15connector
J3 port onthe APMI inthe APM30
DB15connector
ALM porton theAFMU inthe APM30
To beremoved
S7 EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
DB9 maleconnector
RS485 porton theEMUA
RJ45connector
RS232/RS422 porton the PMU
To bereused
S8 GPS clocksignal cable
Type Nfemaleconnector
GPS surgeprotector
SMA maleconnector
GPS port onthe USCU inthe BBU
To bereused
S9 GPS jumper N50 straightmaleconnector
GPS surgeprotector
N50 straightmaleconnector
GPSantenna
To bereused
5.4.2 Replacing the Front DoorThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
758
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown inFigure 5-10.
Figure 5-10 Removing the equipotential cable for the cabinet door
Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor.1. Set the circuit breaker on the PDU panel controlling the AFMU to OFF.
l When the APM30 is applied to a distributed base station, SW2 is the circuit breaker forcontrolling the AFMU.
l When the APM30 is applied to a separated base station, SW4 is the circuit breaker forcontrolling the AFMU.
2. Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown in the followingfigure.
Figure 5-11 Removing the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
759
Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove two hinges on the cabinet door and then remove the cabinetdoor, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-12 Removing the front door
Step 5 Install the new front door.
NOTE
One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.
1. Install the new front door, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two hinges to 1.4N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on the inner wall.
Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and that the barcodenumber starts with 212102.l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Illustration 1 in the following
figure shows the position of the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of thecabinet.
l If there is no such a barcode label on the inner wall of the cabinet, record the number on thebarcode label that is stuck on the front door, and stick a label carrying the same number tothe corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Illustration 2 in the followingfigure shows the position of the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
760
Figure 5-13 Positions of the barcode labels
(1) Position of the barcode label on the inner wall of thecabinet
(2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of thecabinet
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.4.3 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Set the SW4 circuit breaker on the PDU to OFF. This circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fan assembly.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
761
NOTE
l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the DBS3900, the SW2 circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fans.
l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the BTS3900A, the SW4 circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fans.
Step 3 Remove the screws on the filler panel in the 1 U space below the fan assembly, and remove thefiller panel, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-14 Removing the filler panel
Step 4 Remove the fan assembly.
1. Label the cable between the fan assembly and the fan transfer board, and remove the cable.This cable needs to be reused. Attach temporary labels at one end of all cables beforeremoving them for recording cable connections.
2. Loosen the two captive screws on the tray holding the fan assembly, and use the handle onthe tray to pull the tray out of the cabinet.
CAUTIONWhen removing the fan assembly, do not touch any rotating fan to avoid injury of yourhands.
Step 5 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Installing a new fan assembly, as shown in the following figure.
1. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten the two screws on thefan assembly to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the new filler panel delivered with the new fan assembly on the 1 U space belowthe fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the filler panel.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
762
Figure 5-15 Installing the new fan assembly
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.4.4 Removing the APMIThis section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the APMI and installing thefiller panel.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove all cables from the APMI panel.
Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the APMI, and remove the APMI.
Step 4 Place the removed APMI in an ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Insert the filler panel in position, and secure the two captive screws on the filler panel to 0.6 N·m(5.31 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
763
The following figure shows how to replace the APMI with a filler panel.
Figure 5-16 Replacing the APMI
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.4.5 Replacing the AFMUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the AFMU with a CMUEAassembly.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove all cables from the AFMU panel.
Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on both sides of the AFMU, and remove theAFMU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
764
Step 4 Place the removed AFMU into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Take out the ELU and install it in the CMUEA assembly, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-17 Installing the ELU
Step 6 Pre-install cables on the CMUEA assembly.
1. Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU, as shown by a inthe following figure.
2. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly of the APM30 to theIFAN1 and IFAN2 ports at the rear of the CMUEA assembly, as shown by b in the followingfigure.
Figure 5-18 Pre-installing cables on the CMUEA assembly
Step 7 Align the CMUEA assembly with the positioning column at the rear part of the installationposition, and gently push the CMUEA assembly into position. Then, tighten the two captivescrews on the CMUEA assembly to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).The following figure shows how to replace the AFMU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
765
Figure 5-19 Replacing the AFMU
Step 8 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.4.6 Replacing the Power SystemThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power system.
PrerequisitesBefore replacing the power system, ensure that the entire base station has been powered off.
Contextl Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.l The following figure shows the power systems before and after the upgrade. A shows the
exterior of the power subrack without the cover before the upgrade. B shows the exteriorof the power subrack after the upgrade.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
766
Figure 5-20 Power systems before and after the upgrade
(1) PMU (2) PSU (3) PDU (4) Power subrack
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Instruct the element management system (EMS) administrator to block all the carriers of thisbase station.
Step 3 Power off the base station.
1. Set the Bat circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.
2. Shut off the external power for the APM30H.
Step 4 Remove all cables from the power system.
1. Remove all monitoring signal cables from the PMU.
2. Remove power cables for storage batteries from the BAT(+) and BAT(-) terminals on thewiring unit of the power subrack.
3. Remove all cables from the PDU panel. The cables include the PGND cable, AC inputpower cables, AC and DC output power cables, and AC and DC surge protection signalcables.
Step 5 Remove the power system.
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to loosen the screws on the ejector lever of the PMU or PSUpanel.
2. Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU or PSU out of the subrack and remove the PMUor PSU from the subrack, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
767
Figure 5-21 Removing the PMU or PSU
3. Remove the screws on both sides of the power subrack (AC/DC), and gently pull the power
subrack (AC/DC) out of the cabinet.4. Remove the screws on both sides of the PDU, and gently pull the PDU out of the cabinet.5. Place the removed AC or DC power subrack, PMU, PSUs, and PDU into the ESD box or
bag.
Step 6 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left side of thecabinet
NOTE
If the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC (35.6oF to37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperature alarms.
1. Remove the guide rails in the positions shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-22 Removing the guide rails
2. Remove the guide rail on the left side of the position where the power subrack is originally
installed, as shown by a in the following figure. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve thescrews.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
768
3. Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mountingbar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton paddingcontacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in the following figure.
4. Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 6.2 to secure the guide rails attached withwindproof cotton padding, and tighten the screws to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown by cin the following figure.
Figure 5-23 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the innerleft side of the cabinet
5. Remove the first and second M6 screws on the upper left side of the cabinet, and then use
them to secure the windproof cotton padding in the original place, and tighten the screwsto 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
769
Figure 5-24 Installing windproof cotton padding on the upper left side of the cabinet
Step 7 Install the windproof cotton padding on the inner back side of the cabinet.1. Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton
padding for about 3 cm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in the following figure.2. Place the windproof cotton padding on the surface of the rail and push it towards the back
of the cabinet, and completely strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproofcotton padding on back of the cabinet. These operation is shown by b in the followingfigure.
Figure 5-25 Installing windproof cotton padding at the back side of the cabinet
Step 8 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet. If there areother modules installed at the bottom of the cabinet, skip this step.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
770
1. Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cottonpadding for about 3 cm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in the following figure.
2. Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completelystrip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of thecabinet. These operations are shown by b and c in the following figure.
Figure 5-26 Installing windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet
Step 9 Install the mounting part attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of thecabinet.
NOTE
If the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC (35.6oF to37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperature alarms.
1. Remove the M6 screw at the bottom of the right mounting bar.2. Place the windproof cotton padding next to the inner right wall of the cabinet, use two M6
screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as shown in the followingfigure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
771
Figure 5-27 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet
Step 10 Install the new power system.1. Add six floating nuts to the mounting bars for securing the power system. The following
figure shows the positions.
Figure 5-28 Installing floating nuts
2. Place the new power system in the installation position and gently push it into the cabinet
along the guide rails. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven M6x12 panel screws to2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
772
3. Use M6x12 screws to secure the PGND cable for the new power system to the ground bar.The recommended torque is 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
----End
5.4.7 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-TeeThis section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.
Contextl The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured along with DRFUs. When DRFUs are removed,
the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.
l If the BTS3900A has two GATMs, remove the upper one before the lower one.
Procedurel Remove the GATM.
1. Remove the connector on the power cable for the GATM from the LOAD0 terminalon the PDU to power off the GATM.
2. Remove the monitoring signal cable from the GATM panel.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the PGND cable for the GATM. Then use awrench to remove the RF jumper from the GATM.
4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, and removethe GATM. Reinstall the removed screws on their original positions on the mountingbar, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-29 Removing the GATM
l Remove the Bias-Tee.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
773
1. Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable, and PGND cable from theBias-Tee.
2. Remove the Bias-Tee.
----End
5.4.8 Installing the Filler Module and Filler PanelIn the APM30 and TMC, the filler module must be installed in the vacant customer space,preventing the heat reflux in the empty space.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver.
Procedurel Install the filler module.
1. Install the filler module in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to thesecure the filler module to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-30 Installing the filler module
l Install the filler panel.1. Install the filler panel in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to the
secure the filler panel to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-31 Installing the filler panel
----End
5.4.9 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30 afterrestructuring the APM30.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
774
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextThe following table describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 5-6 Power cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable One End The Other End Description
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEApower cable
EPC6connector
PWR port onthe CMUEA
3V3connector
LOAD2 porton the EPU
A cable isnewlydelivered.
EMUApower cable
EPC4connector
LOAD5 porton the EPU
Cord endterminal
PWR1terminal onthe EMUA
To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.
BBU powercable
EPC4connector
LOAD0 orLOAD1 porton the EPU
3V3connector
-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU
A cable isnewlydelivered.
The following table describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 5-7 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable One End The Other End Description
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector Installation Position
Monitoringsignal cablefor the fanassembly
4-pinconnector
IFAN1 andIFAN2 portson thetransferboard for thefan assembly
4-pinconnector
CMUEA To be reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
775
Cable One End The Other End Description
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector Installation Position
Monitoringsignaltransfercable for thefan in thefront door
4-pinconnector
Transferterminal onthe front doorof theAPM30
4-pinconnector
FAN_EXT0andFAN_EXT1ports on theCMUEA
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensorin theAPM30
2-pinconnector
GATE porton the PMU
Bare wire Door statussensor
To be reused
CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEA
RJ45connector
MON1 porton the UPEUin the BBU
The cable isnewlydelivered.
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU RJ45connector
ELU port onthe CMUEA
The cable isnewlydelivered.
PMU-CMUEAmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thePMU
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEA
The cable isnewlydelivered.
EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
DB9 maleconnector
RS485 porton theEMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on thePMU
To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.
Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor nearthe frontdoor
5-pinconnector
Temperaturesensor nearthe left innerwall and thefront door
4-pinconnector
TEM port onthe CMUEA
To be reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
776
Cable One End The Other End Description
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector Installation Position
Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor nearthe airexhaust vent
5-pinconnector
Temperaturesensor nearthe airexhaust ventthat is at thetop right sideof the cabinet
4-pinconnector
TEMP2 porton theCMUEA
To be reused
Procedurel Remove related cables in the cabinet.
Remove related cables in the cabinet according to the cable changes in 5.4.1 InformationYou Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30. Skip this step if you have removedthese cables when replacing related modules.
l Install power cables in the APM30.1. Install the power cable for the 8-pin transfer terminal, as shown by P0 in Figure
5-32.
a. Connect one end of the cable to the AC OUTPUT port on the EPU.
b. No operation is required for the other end of the cable because it has already beenconnected to the 8-pin transfer terminal.
2. Install the CMUEA power cable, as shown by P1 in Figure 5-32.
a. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD2 port on the panel of the EPU.
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable for the fan assemblyto the LOAD2 port on the EPU.
c. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the CMUEA, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws on the 3V3connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).
3. Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 5-32.
a. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD0 port on the panel of the EPU.
b. Add the removed EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable. Fordetailed operations, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
c. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V porton the UPEU in the BBU, and connect the EPC4 connector at the other end tothe LOAD0 port on the panel of the EPU.
4. Optional: Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P3 in Figure 5-32.
a. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD5 port on the panel of the EPU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
777
b. Add a connector to each end of the power cable and you can use the EPC4connector removed in 4.1. For detailed operations, see Assembling the Cord EndTerminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and thePower Cable.
c. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD5 porton the EPU.
d. Connect the cord end terminal at the other end of the power cable to the PWR1port on the EMUA.
Figure 5-32 Installing power cables in the APM30
5. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind them.
6. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the APM30.
1. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S1 in Figure5-33.
a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to theGATE port on the PMU.
b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the door status sensor.
2. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S2 in Figure 5-33.
a. Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
778
b. Connect the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU port on the fanassembly.
3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door, as shown by S3 inFigure 5-32.
NOTICEBind the interconnected monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front doorto the cable bridge on the front door to prevent the cabinet door from extruding theinterconnection terminal.
a. Connect one end of the cable to the transfer terminal on the monitoring signalcable that comes out of the front door.
b. Connect the other end of the cable to the FAN_EXT0 and FAN_EXT1 ports onthe CMUEA.
4. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly in the front door, as shown byS4 in Figure 5-32.
a. Connect one end of the cable to the IFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the CMUEA.b. Connect the other end of the cable to the transfer board in the fan assembly.
5. Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 5-33.
a. Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_INport on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1port on the UPEU in the BBU.
6. Install the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S6 in Figure 5-33.
a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signalcable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoringsignal cable to the COM_IN port on the PMU.
7. Optional: Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S7 in Figure5-33.
a. Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the EMUA monitoring signalcable to the RS485 port on the EMUA.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the EMUA monitoring signalcable to the COM_OUT port on the PMU.
8. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown by S8 inFigure 5-33.
a. Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5-pin straight socket of the temperature sensor on the left side of the cabinet.
b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEM port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly.
9. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent,as shown by S9 in Figure 5-33.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
779
a. Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5-pin straight socket of the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent that is onthe right side of the fan assembly.
b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEMP2 port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly.
Figure 5-33 Installing signal cables in the APM30
10. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind them.11. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
5.5 Restructuring the TMCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC tobe restructured.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
780
5.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMCThis section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the TMC.
Component Changes in the TMC
There are three types of TMCs:
l When a TMC serves as a transmission cabinet, it only provides space for the transmissionequipment and a DCDU-03A is installed in it. Illustration A in the following figure showsthis type of TMC.
l When a TMC serves as the power cabinet of the DBS3900, the TMC is supplied with -48V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-03B are installed in it. Illustration B in thefollowing figure shows this type of TMC.
l When a TMC serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, the TMC is supplied with -48V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-06A are installed in it. Illustration C in thefollowing figure shows this type of TMC.
Figure 5-34 Components in the TMC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
781
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 Front door To bereplaced
The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heatdissipation capacity.
2 Fanassembly
To bereplaced
The fan assembly needs to be replaced to enhance theheat dissipation capacity.
3 DCDU To bereplaced
l When the TMC serves as a transmission cabinet, theDCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12C.
l When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of theDBS3900, the DCDU needs to be replaced with aDCDU-12B.
l When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of theBTS3900A, the DCDU needs to be replaced with aDCDU-12C.
4 Door statussensor
To bereused
-
5 BBU3900 To bereused
-
6 GATM To beremoved
-
7 EMUA To bereused
-
8 AC heater To bereused
-
Cable Changes in the TMCCable connections in TMCs vary according to the configurations of TMCs. The following figureshows the cable changes in the TMC serving as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
782
Figure 5-35 Equipotential cable and power cables in the TMC
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
P0 Equipotential cableforgroundingof thefront door
OTterminal
Groundpoint onthe frontdoor
OTterminal
Groundpoint in theinnerlower leftside of thecabinet
To beremoved
P1 AFMUpowercable
- - - - To beremoved
P2 BBUpowercable
OTterminal
l BBUterminal on theDCDU-06A
l LOAD6terminal on theDCDU-03A
l LOAD6terminal on theDCDU-03B
3V3connector
-48V porton theUPEU inthe BBU
To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
783
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
P3 EMUApowercable
OTterminal
l SPARE3terminal on theDCDU-06A
l LOAD7terminal on theDCDU-03A
l LOAD7terminal on theDCDU-03B
Cord endterminal
PWR1terminalon theEMUA
To bereused
P4 GATMpowercable
OTterminal
Load0 porton thePDU in theTMC
OTterminal
-48V porton theGATM
To bereplaced
Figure 5-36 shows the signal cable changes in the TMC that houses the BBU3900 and is suppliedwith -48 V DC power.
Figure 5-36 Signal cable changes in the TMC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
784
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
S1 Monitoring signalcable forthe fan inthe frontdoor
4-pinconnector
Transferbox on theinner leftwall nearthe frontdoor of theTMC
4-pinconnector
FAN_EXT port ontheCMUA
To bereplaced
S2 AFMUmonitoring signalcable
- - - - To beremoved
S3 EMUAmonitoring signalcable
DB9 maleconnector
RS-485port on theEMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUT port ontheCMUA
To bereused
S4 GPS clocksignalcable
SMA maleconnector
GPS porton theUSCU inthe BBU
Type Nfemaleconnector
GPS surgeprotector
To bereused
S5 GPSjumper
N50straightmaleconnector
GPS surgeprotector
N50straightmaleconnector
GPSantenna
To bereused
S6 GATM-BBUmonitoring signalcable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theGATM inthe TMC
RJ45connector
COM_OUT port onthe BBUin theTMC
To beremoved
5.5.2 Replacing the Front DoorThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
785
ContextThe TMC and APM30s have the same front door. This section describes the procedure forreplacing the cabinet door, using the APM30 as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown inFigure 5-37.
Figure 5-37 Removing the equipotential cable for the cabinet door
Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor.1. Set the circuit breaker on the PDU panel controlling the AFMU to OFF.
l When the APM30 is applied to a distributed base station, SW2 is the circuit breaker forcontrolling the AFMU.
l When the APM30 is applied to a separated base station, SW4 is the circuit breaker forcontrolling the AFMU.
2. Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown in the followingfigure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
786
Figure 5-38 Removing the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor
Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove two hinges on the cabinet door and then remove the cabinetdoor, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-39 Removing the front door
Step 5 Install the new front door.
NOTE
One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.
1. Install the new front door, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two hinges to 1.4N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on the inner wall.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
787
Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and that the barcodenumber starts with 212102.
l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Illustration 1 in the followingfigure shows the position of the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of thecabinet.
l If there is no such a barcode label on the inner wall of the cabinet, record the number on thebarcode label that is stuck on the front door, and stick a label carrying the same number tothe corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Illustration 2 in the followingfigure shows the position of the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.
Figure 5-40 Positions of the barcode labels
(1) Position of the barcode label on the inner wall of thecabinet
(2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of thecabinet
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.5.3 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
This section describes the procedure for replacing the fan assembly in an APM30 as an example.The fan assembly used in a TMC is the same as that used in an APM30.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
788
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Set the circuit breaker corresponding to the fans on the DCDU to OFF to power off the fans.l When the TMC11 or TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-06A, the SW3 circuit breaker
controls the power supply to the fans.l When the TMC11 or TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-03A or DCDU-03B, the SW0
circuit breaker controls the power supply to the fans.
Step 3 Remove the screws on the filler panel in the 1 U space below the fan assembly, and remove thefiller panel, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-41 Removing the filler panel
Step 4 Remove the fan assembly.1. Label the cable between the fan assembly and the fan transfer board, and remove the cable.
This cable needs to be reused. Attach temporary labels at one end of all cables beforeremoving them for recording cable connections.
2. Loosen the two captive screws on the tray holding the fan assembly, and use the handle onthe tray to pull the tray out of the cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
789
CAUTIONWhen removing the fan assembly, do not touch any rotating fan to avoid injury of yourhands.
Step 5 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Installing a new fan assembly, as shown in the following figure.
1. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten the two screws on thefan assembly to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the new filler panel delivered with the new fan assembly on the 1 U space belowthe fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the filler panel.
Figure 5-42 Installing the new fan assembly
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.5.4 Removing the APMIThis section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the APMI and installing thefiller panel.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
790
ContextThis section describes the procedure for removing the APMI in an APM30 as an example. TheAPMI used in a TMC is the same as that used in an APM30.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove all cables from the APMI panel.
Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the APMI, and remove the APMI.
Step 4 Place the removed APMI in an ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Gently push the filler panel in position, and secure the two screws on the filler panel to 2 N·m(17.70 lbf·in.).The following figure shows how to replace the APMI with a filler panel.
Figure 5-43 Replacing the APMI
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.5.5 Replacing the AFMUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the AFMU with a CMUEAassembly.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
791
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
This section describes the procedure for replacing the AFMU in an APM30 as an example. TheAFMU used in a TMC is the same as that used in an APM30.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove all cables from the AFMU panel.
Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on both sides of the AFMU, and remove theAFMU.
Step 4 Place the removed AFMU into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Take out the ELU and install it in the CMUEA assembly, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-44 Installing the ELU
Step 6 Pre-install cables on the CMUEA assembly.
1. Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU, as shown by a inthe following figure.
2. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly of the APM30 to theIFAN1 and IFAN2 ports at the rear of the CMUEA assembly, as shown by b in the followingfigure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
792
Figure 5-45 Pre-installing cables on the CMUEA assembly
Step 7 Align the CMUEA assembly with the positioning column at the rear part of the installationposition, and gently push the CMUEA assembly into position. Then, tighten the two captivescrews on the CMUEA assembly to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).The following figure shows how to replace the AFMU.
Figure 5-46 Replacing the AFMU
Step 8 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
793
5.5.6 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-03A, DCDU-03B,or DCDU-06A.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.
Context
TMCs can be configured with different models of DCDUs, which include the DCDU-03A,DCDU-03B, and DCDU-06A. The DCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12B orDCDU-12C during the upgrade.
l When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, replace the DCDU with aDCDU-12C.
l When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of the DBS3900, replace the DCDU with aDCDU-12B.
l When the TMC serves as a transmission cabinet of the BTS3900A or DBS3900, replacethe DCDU with a DCDU-12C.
This section describes the procedure for replacing the DCDU-03B with a DCDU-12B. Othermodels of DCDUs are removed and installed in the same way.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Shut off the external power supply to the power off the DCDU-03B.
NOTE
l If a DCDU-03A is configured, you can turn the SW6 circuit breaker on the PDU in the APM30 to OFF topower off the DCDU-03A.
l If a DCDU-06A configured, shut off the external power supply to power off the DCDU-06A.
Step 3 Remove the DCDU-03B, as shown in the following figure.
1. Remove all connectors from the DCDU-03B panel.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminalblock from the DCDU-03B, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
794
3. Remove the input power cables and equipotential cable for the DCDU-03B from theterminals.
4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-03B,and gently pull the DCDU-03B out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Figure 5-47 Removing the DCDU-03B
Step 4 Place the DCDU-03B and protective cover into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install the DCDU-12C.
1. Hold the DCDU-12C with both hands and slide the DCDU-12C into the cabinet until themounting ears on the DCDU-12C contact the columns.
2. Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12C to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
795
Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.5.7 Installing the Filler Module and Filler PanelIn the APM30 and TMC, the filler module must be installed in the vacant customer space,preventing the heat reflux in the empty space.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver.
Procedurel Install the filler module.
1. Install the filler module in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to thesecure the filler module to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-48 Installing the filler module
l Install the filler panel.
1. Install the filler panel in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to thesecure the filler panel to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-49 Installing the filler panel
----End
5.5.8 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC afterrestructuring the TMC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
796
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 5-8 describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 5-8 Power cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable One End The Other End Description
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEApower cable
EPC4connector
PWR port onthe CMUEA
3V3connector
LOAD9 porton theDCDU-12C
A cable isnewlydelivered.
BBU powercable
EPC4connector
LOAD6 orLOAD7 porton theDCDU-12Cin the TMC
3V3connector
-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU ofthe TMC
The cable isnewlydelivered.
EMUApower cable
EPC4connector
LOAD8 porton theDCDU-12C
Cord endterminal
PWR1terminal onthe EMUA
To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.
Table 5-9 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 5-9 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable One End The Other End Description
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
Monitoringsignal cablefor the fanassembly
4-pinconnector
IFAN1 andIFAN2 portson thetransferboard for thefan assembly
4-pinconnector
4-pinconnectorthat comesout of theCMUEA
To be reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
797
Cable One End The Other End Description
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
Monitoringsignaltransfercable for thefan in thefront door
4-pinconnector
Transferterminal onthe frontdoor of theTMC
4-pinconnector
EFAN1 andEFAN2 portson theCMUEA
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensor
Bare wire GATE porton the fanassembly
Bare wire Door statussensor
To be reused
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assembly
RJ45connector
ELU port onthe CMUEA
The cable isnewlydelivered.
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU RJ45connector
ELU port onthe fanassembly
The cable isnewlydelivered.
EMUAmonitoringsignal cable
DB9 maleconnector
RS485 porton theEMUA
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on thefan assembly
To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.
Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor nearthe frontdoor
5-pinconnector
Temperaturesensor nearthe left innerwall and thefront door
4-pinconnector
TEMP1 porton theCMUEA
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor nearthe airexhaust vent
5-pinconnector
Temperaturesensor nearthe airexhaust ventthat is at thetop right sideof the cabinet
4-pinconnector
TEMP2 porton theCMUEA
To be reused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
798
Procedurel Remove related cables in the cabinet.
Remove related cables in the cabinet according to the cable changes in 5.5.1 InformationYou Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC. Skip this step if you have removedthese cables when replacing related modules.
l Install power cables in the TMC.1. Install the CMUEA power cable, as shown by P1 in Figure 5-50.
a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable for the fan assemblyto the LOAD9 port on the DCDU-12C.
b. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the CMUEA, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws on the 3V3connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).
2. Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 5-50. If no BBUis installed in this cabinet, skip this step.
a. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to theinstructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b. Connect the EPC4connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 orLOAD7 port on the DCDU-12C.
c. Connect the 3V3 power connector at the other end of the power cable to the -48Vport on the UPEU in the BBU.
3. Optional: Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P3 in Figure 5-50.
a. Replace the OT terminal at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4connector, as described in Table 5-8. For details about how to replace theterminals, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD8 porton the DCDU-12C.
c. Connect the cord end terminal at the other end of the power cable to the PWR1port on the EMUA.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
799
Figure 5-50 Installing power cables in the TMC
4. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind them.
5. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the TMC.1. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S1 in Figure
5-51.
a. Cut off the 2-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable, and stripthe jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.
b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on theCMUEA.
2. Optional: Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S2 inFigure 5-51. If no BBU is installed in this cabinet, skip this step.
a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to theCOM_IN port on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door, as shown by S3 inFigure 5-50.
a. Connect one end of the cable to the transfer terminal on the monitoring signalcable that comes out of the front door.
b. Connect the other end of the cable to the EFAN1 and EFAN2 ports on theCMUEA.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
800
4. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly in the TMC, as shown by S4in Figure 5-50.
a. Connect the other end of the cable to the IFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the transferboard in the fan assembly.
b. Connect the other end of the cable to the 4-pin terminal that comes out of theCMUEA.
5. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 5-51.
a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the port on the topof the ELU.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the ELU porton the fan assembly.
6. Optional: Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S6 in Figure5-51.
a. Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the signal cable to the RS485 porton the EMUA.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.
7. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent,as shown by S7 in Figure 5-51.
a. Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5-pin straight socket of the temperature sensor on the left side of the cabinet.
b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEMP1 port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly.
8. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown by S8 inFigure 5-51.
a. Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5-pin straight socket of the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent that is onthe right side of the fan assembly.
b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEMP2 port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
801
Figure 5-51 Installing signal cables in the TMC
9. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind them.10. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
5.6 Restructuring the RFC CabinetThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFCcabinet to be restructured.
5.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFCThis section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the RFC.
Component Changes in the RFCFigure 5-52 shows component changes in the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
802
Figure 5-52 Components in the RFC
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 FMUA To bereplaced
The FMUA needs to be replaced with a CMUEAassembly.
2 DCDU-02 To bereplaced
The DCDU-02 needs to be replaced with a DCDU-13Ato enhance the power distribution capacity.
3 Filler panel To bereplaced
The filler panel needs to be replaced with an ELUassembly. The ELU reports the cabinet typeautomatically. It needs to be added to facilitatetroubleshooting.
4 Door statussensor
To bereused
-
5 Fan To bereused
-
6 Temperature sensor
To bereused
-
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
803
Cable Changes in the RFCFigure 5-53 shows the power cable changes in the RFC.
Figure 5-53 Power cables in the RFC
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
P1 to P6 RFUpowercables
Parallelterminal
RFU0terminalon theDCDU-02
- - To bereplaced
P7 FMUApowercable
Parallelterminal
FMUAterminalon theDCDU-02
3V3connector
PWR porton theFMUA
To bereplaced
Figure 5-54 shows the signal cable changes in the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
804
Figure 5-54 Signal cable changes in the RFC
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
S1 DCDU-FMUAmonitoring signalcable
Cord endterminal
TEM_HUMARRESTER
RJ45connector
SPD ALMport on theDCDU-02
To bereplaced
S2 and S3 FMUA-FANmonitoring signalcable
4-pinconnector
FAN porton theFMUA
- FAN unit To bereplaced
S4 Monitoring signalcable forthe doorstatussensor
2-pinconnector
GATEport on theCMUA
Bare wire Doorstatussensor
To bereused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
805
No. Cable Connector at OneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connector at theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ChangeType
S5 Monitoring signalcable forthetemperature sensor inthe RFC
4-pinconnector
TEM porton the fanassemblyin the RFC
Temperature sensor
Air intakevent at thebottom ofthe RFC
To bereplaced
5.6.2 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.
Prerequisitesl The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves,
a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.l The FMUA is removed, and the fan assembly stops working.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fan assembly,and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shown in the followingfigure.
Step 3 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown in the followingfigure. The recommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
806
Figure 5-55 Replacing the fan assembly in the RFC
Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler PanelThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the FMUA assembly andfiller panel.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Turn the FMUA circuit breaker on the left of the DCDU-02 panel to OFF.
Step 3 Record the cable connections on the FMUA panel, and remove all cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
807
Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the FMUA, and gentlypull the FMUA out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, andremove the filler panel.
Step 6 Place the removed FMUA assembly and filler panel into ESD boxes or bags.
Step 7 Place the CMUEA assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Usea torque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.
Figure 5-56 Installing the CMUEA assembly
Step 8 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, and gentlypull the filler panel out of the cabinet.
Step 9 Place the ELU assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use atorque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
808
Figure 5-57 Installing the ELU assembly
Step 10 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-02 with aDCDU-13A.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Instruct the M2000/U2000 administrator to block all the carriers of this base station.
Step 3 Turn all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU-02 to OFF to power off the fan assembly andRFUs.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
809
Step 4 Power off the DCDU-02.l In AC scenarios, turn the SW8 and SW9 circuit breakers on the PDU in the APM30H to
OFF.l In DC scenarios, shut off the external power supply.
Step 5 Remove the two DCDU-02 units on the left and right, as shown in the following figure.1. Record the position of connectors on the DCDU-02, and remove the connectors.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminals
on the DCDU-02.3. Remove the input power cables and PGND cable from the DCDU-02.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-02, and
gently pull the DCDU-02 out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Figure 5-58 Removing the DCDU-02 units
Step 6 Place the removed DCDU-02 units and protective covers in ESD boxes or bags.
Step 7 Place the DCDU-13A in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use a torquescrewdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the followingfigure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
810
Figure 5-59 Installing the DCDU-13A
Step 8 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the RFU.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or ESDgloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.
Contextl RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU
V2, MRFU V2a, and WRFU.l RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU
V2, MRFU V2a WRFU, and LRFU.l RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU
V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU.l If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) or WRFUa is not faulty, disable its maximum output
power locking for TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.l Replacing an RFU interrupts services carried by the RFU.l Replacing an RFU takes about 6 to 10 minutes.l The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured along with DRFUs. When DRFUs are removed,
the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be removed. For details about how to remove theGATM and Bias-Tee, see 4.4.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.
l A handle is used during the replacement. The handle is placed on the lower left side of thedocument holder on the cabinet door, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
811
Figure 5-60 Position of the handle
NOTE
The handle is only for pulling an RFU outwards horizontally.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If a replaced RFU is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking for TXchannels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
NOTE
l If a replaced RFU is faulty, its maximum output power locking for TX channels does not need to bedisabled.
l If the maximum output power has not been set for the RFU, the maximum output power for TX channelsis the maximum transmit power of the hardware.
1. Check the maximum output power has been locked for TX channels of the new RFU, andrecord the result.l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet
number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU. Run theDSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number,and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum output power forTX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has been locked.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query thecabinet number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU.Run the DSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number,slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximumoutput power for TX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power hasbeen locked.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site MaintenanceTerminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-clickLock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Query Config tab. On the displayed tab page,select the target RFU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
812
If... Then...
The maximum output power has beenlocked for TX channels
Go to Step 1.2.
The maximum output power has not beenlocked for TX channels
Go to 2.
NOTE
The maximum output power of some RFUs cannot be queried by running the DSP TXBRANCHcommand. If the value of the maximum output power invalid in the query result for an RFU, the RFUdoes not support the maximum output power locking.
2. Set the maximum output power of the RFU to 0 to disable the maximum output powerlocking.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable themaximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to resetthe RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum outputpower of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disablethe maximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command toreset the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximumoutput power of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site MaintenanceTerminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-clickLock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Config tab. On the displayed tab page, setthe parameters to disable the maximum output power locking for TX channels, and clickSet. Reset the RFU to make the configuration take effect.
NOTE
If there is more than one RFU, reset the TX channels of each RFU separately. If RFUs are cascaded,perform the operations from the lowest-level RFU to the highest-level RFU to minimize the impacton services carried by the RFUs.
Step 2 Ask the administrator of element management system (EMS) to block the RFU.
l On the NodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the eNodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the BSC, run the SET GTRXADMSTAT command and set ADMSTAT to LOCK toblock all carriers of the RFU.
NOTE
l Block the RFU before replacing the module or separately replacing the RF jumper.
l If RFU to be replaced works in multiple modes, block the RFU in all modes it supports.
l An RFU working in GSM mode cannot be blocked, and therefore you can block only the carriers ofthe RFU in GSM mode.
Step 3 Verify that TX channels of the RFU are disabled. In this case, the ACT indicator on the RFUpanel is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).
Step 4 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
813
NOTE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, to preventelectrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 5 Remove the RFU to be replaced.1. Set the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to OFF to power off
the RFU.2. Label the power cable for the RFU to be replaced, and disconnect the cable.3. Label the RF jumper for the RFU to be replaced, loosen the DIN 7/16 male elbow connector
on the RF jumper, and disconnect the RF jumper.4. Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the cable.5. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws at the four corners of the RFU, and then
pull the RFU handle to move the RFU outwards 50 mm (1.97 in.) to 100 mm (3.94 in.), asshown in Figure 5-61. Hold the RFU with one hand, and remove the RFU from the cabinetwith the other hand.
CAUTIONThe RFU is heavy. Therefore, handle it with caution.
6. Place the handle in its original position.
Figure 5-61 Removing the RFU
Step 6 Install the new RFU.1. Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the rails until it snaps into place.2. Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners on the RFU panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.) to
secure the RFU to the subrack.3. Reconnect power cable and RF jumper to the RFU panel.4. Use a wrench to tighten the connector on the jumper and feeder to 25 N·m to 35 N·m (221.25
lbf·in. to 309.75 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
814
Figure 5-62 Tightening the connector on the jumper and feeder
(1) Feeder (2) Jumper
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
5.6.6 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC after yourestructure the RFC.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.
ContextTable 5-10 describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 5-10 Power cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
CMUEApower cable
EPC4connector
LOAD3 porton the leftDCDU-13A
3V3connector
PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe RFC
The cable isnewlydelivered.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
815
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Power cablebetweenDCDU-13As
OT terminal(M6)
RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals onthe leftDCDU-13Ain the RFC
OT terminal RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals onthe rightDCDU-13Ain the RFC
The cable isnewlydelivered.
RFU powercable
EPC4connector
One of theLOAD0 toLOAD2ports on bothDCDU-13As
3V3connector
PWR port onone of RFU 0to RFU 5
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Table 5-11 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 5-11 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensor
Bare wire GATE porton the fanassembly
Bare wire Door statussensor
To be reused
ELU signalcable
RJ45connector
ELU port onthe CMUEA
RJ45connector
ELU port onthe ELUassembly
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in theRFC
4-pinconnector
TEM port onthe CMUEA
Temperaturesensor
Air intakevent at thebottom of theRFC
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Surgeprotectionalarm cablefor theDCDU
Bare wire IN0 and IN1ports on theCMUEA
Bare wire DC ALARMport on theDCDU-13A
The cable isnewlydelivered.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
816
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Monitoringsignal cablefor the leftfan
- Cabledeliveredwith the fan
Bare wire EFAN1 andEFAN2 portson theCMUEAassembly
The cable isdeliveredwith the newfanassembly.
Monitoringsignal cablefor the rightfan
- Cabledeliveredwith the fan
4-pinconnector
Transferterminal forthe CMUEAassembly
The cable isdeliveredwith the newfanassembly.
Procedurel Install power cables in the RFC.
1. Install the CMUEA power cable, as shown by P1 in Figure 5-63.
a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD3 porton the left DCDU-13A.
b. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the CMUEA.
2. Optional: Install the power cable between DCDU-13As, as shown by P2 in Figure5-63. Skip this step in DC scenarios.
a. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals on the left DCDU-13A in the RFC.
b. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) andNEG(-) terminals on the right DCDU-13A in the RFC.
3. Install the RFU power cables, as shown by P3 to P8 in Figure 5-63.
a. For RFU 0 to RFU 2, connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cableto one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the left DCDU-13A.
b. For RFU 3 to RFU 5, connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cableto one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the right DCDU-13A.
c. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the RFU.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
817
Figure 5-63 Installing power cables in the RFC
4. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind them.
5. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
l Install signal cables in the RFC.
1. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 5-64.
a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the ELU port onthe ELU assembly.
b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the ELU porton the CMUEA.
2. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure5-64.
a. Cut off the 2-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable, and stripa length of 8 mm (0.31 in.) jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.
b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on theCMUEA.
3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown by S3 inFigure 5-64.
a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to thetemperature sensor near the air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.
b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEM port on the CMUEA.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
818
4. Install the surge protection alarm cable for the left DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 inFigure 5-64.
a. Connect one end of the cable to the DC ALARM port on the DCDU-13A.
b. Connect the other end of the cable to the IN1 port on the CMUEA.
5. Install the surge protection alarm cable for the right DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 inFigure 5-64.
a. Connect one end of the cable to the DC ALARM port on the DCDU-13A.
b. Connect the other end of the cable to the IN0 port on the CMUEA.
6. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan, as shown by S5 in Figure 5-64.
a. Connect the cables that come out of the left fan assembly to the EFAN1 andEFAN2 ports on the CMUEA.
b. Connect the cables that come out of the right fan assembly to the 4-pin terminalsthat come out of the CMUEA. Those 4-pin terminals have been connected to theIFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the rear of the CMUEA.
Figure 5-64 Installing signal cables in the RFC
7. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind them.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
819
8. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
5.7 Restructuring the BBCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the BBC tobe restructured.
5.7.1 Information You Need to Known Before Reconstructing theBBC
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the BBC.
Component Changes in the BBCThe following figure shows component changes in the BBC.
Figure 5-65 Components in the BBC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
820
No. Component
Change Type
Description
1 Inputwiringterminal forthe inputpowercable forthe heatingfilm
To bereused
-
2 Storagebattery
To bereused
-
3, 4, and6
Wiringterminalsfor powercables forstoragebatteries
To bereplaced
The wiring terminals on the storage batteries need to bereplaced for installing cables with a cross-sectional areaof 35 mm 2 (0.54 in.2).
5 Circuitbreaker forthe storagebatterygroup
To bereplaced
The circuit breaker for the storage battery group needs tobe replaced for inputting larger power.
Cable Changes in the BBCThe following figure shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the BBC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
821
Figure 5-66 Equipotential cable and power cables in the battery cabinet
No. Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
P0 PGNDcable forthe frontdoor
OTterminal(M6)
Groundpoint onthe frontdoor
OTterminal(M6)
Groundpoint onthe rack
To bereused
P1 RTN(+)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries
OTterminal(M8)
Wiringterminalfor storagebatteries
OTterminal(M6)
Positivewiring bar
To bereplaced
P2 NEG(-)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries
OTterminal(M8)
Wiringterminalfor storagebatteries
OTterminal(M6)
Negativewiring bar
To bereplaced
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
822
No. Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
P3 RTN(+)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries
OTterminal(M8)
Wiringterminalfor storagebatteries
OTterminal(M6)
Positivewiring bar
To bereplaced
P4 NEG(-)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries
OTterminal(M8)
Wiringterminalfor storagebatteries
OTterminal(M6)
Negativewiring bar
To bereplaced
P5 Powercable forthe heatingfilm
- Heatingfilm
OTterminal(M6)
Transferterminal
To bereused
P6 and P7 Powercablebetweenthe wiringterminaland circuitbreaker onthe storagebatteries
OTterminal(M6)
Wiringterminalfor storagebatteries
OTterminal(M8)
Circuitbreaker
To bereplaced
The following figure shows signal cable changes in the cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
823
Figure 5-67 Signal cable changes in the battery cabinet
No. Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector
InstallationPosition
Connector
InstallationPosition
S0 Monitoring signalcable forthe doorstatussensor
Bare wire Transferterminalfor thesignalcable
Cord endterminal
Doorstatussensor
To bereused
S1 Monitoring signalcable forthetemperature sensor inthe batterycabinet
2-pinconnector
BAT_TEM1 port onthe APMI
OTterminal
Cablebridge onthe leftside of theupperstoragebatterycompartment
To bereused
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
824
5.7.2 Replacing the Wiring Terminals and Circuit BreakersThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the wiring terminals andcircuit breakers.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
DANGERWhen replacing batteries, prevent short circuits or reverse connections between the positive andnegative poles of the storage batteries. All tools used for installation must be insulated to preventthe batteries from burning and ensure personal safety.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Power off the battery cabinet.
1. Optional: Set the AC OUT circuit breaker on the PDU panel in the APM30H to OFF topower off the heating film in the battery cabinet. Skip this step if the battery cabinet is notconfigured with a heating film.
2. Set the circuit breaker for the storage battery group on the inner right wall of the batterycabinet to OFF.
3. Set the BAT circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.
Step 3 Remove the storage batteries.
1. Use temporary labels to mark the input power cables for the positive and negative poles onthe storage batteries and the copper bars between the storage batteries, and remove the inputpower cables and copper bars.
2. Use a screwdriver to loosen the screws on the baffle plate and then remove the baffle plate.
3. Pull the storage batteries until one-third of the length is out, remove the screws on the polesof the storage batteries, and then remove the input power cables for the storage batterygroup and the copper bars between the storage batteries.
4. Use both hands to remove the storage batteries at this layer and put them at a proper place.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
825
NOTE
l Remove the baffle plate and storage batteries layer by layer from top down. After removing thebaffle plate at a layer, you must remove all storage batteries at the layer before removing thebaffle plate at the lower layer.
l Use both hands to hold each storage battery to avoid falling.
l When placing the storage batteries outdoors, do not expose them to the sunlight.
Step 4 Remove all the power cables from the wiring terminals and circuit breakers.
Step 5 Remove the wiring terminals and circuit breakers, as shown in Figure 5-68.1. Open the cover for the wiring terminals, remove the screw and then the wiring terminals.2. Remove the two screws on the circuit breakers and then the circuit breakers. Reserve the
two M4 screws, spring washers, and flat washers for future use.
Figure 5-68 Removing the wiring terminals and circuit breakers
3. Place the removed wiring terminals and circuit breakers into the ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Install the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers, as shown in the following figure.1. Attach the new wiring terminals to the positions of the removed ones in sequence, and use
one M4 screw to secure each wiring terminal.2. Attach the new circuit breakers to the positions of the removed ones, and use the two M4
screws reserved in Step 5.2 to secure the circuit breakers.3. Install power cables between the wiring terminals and circuit breakers.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
826
Figure 5-69 Installing the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers
Step 7 Connect power cables to the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers, as shown in the followingfigure.
Figure 5-70 Connecting power cables to the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers
(1) Negative terminal forthe upper storage batteries
(2) Positive terminal forthe upper storage batteries
(3) Negative terminal forthe lower storage batteries
(4) Positive terminal forthe lower storage batteries
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
827
----End
5.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing storage batteries and cablesin the battery cabinet after you restructure the battery cabinet.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
DANGERWhen replacing batteries, prevent short circuits or reverse connections between the positive andnegative poles of the storage batteries. All tools used for installation must be insulated to preventthe batteries from burning and ensure personal safety.
ContextTable 5-12 describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 5-12 Power cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
Power cablefor theheating filmin the batterycabinet
- Heating film OT terminal(M6)
Transferterminal
To be reused
RTN(+)cable for theupperstoragebatteries
OT terminal(M6)
Storagebattery
OT terminal(M8)
Wiringterminal forstoragebatteries
The cable isnewlydelivered.
NEG(-)cable for theupperstoragebatteries
OT terminal(M6)
Storagebattery
OT terminal(M8)
Wiringterminal forstoragebatteries
The cable isnewlydelivered.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
828
Cable Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
Description
RTN(+)cable for thelowerstoragebatteries
OT terminal(M6)
Storagebattery
OT terminal(M8)
Wiringterminal forstoragebatteries
The cable isnewlydelivered.
NEG(-)cable for thelowerstoragebatteries
OT terminal(M6)
Storagebattery
OT terminal(M8)
Wiringterminal forstoragebatteries
The cable isnewlydelivered.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Install the storage batteries.1. Install the storage batteries from bottom up and from left to right.2. Remove the covers from the wiring terminals of the storage batteries, and install copper
bars between the poles of neighboring storage batteries for series connection.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
829
Figure 5-71 Installing the storage batteries
Step 3 Install the power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-72 Installing the power cables for the storage batteries
Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
830
5.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential CableA PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure propergrounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinetsto ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.
Prerequisites
The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a cable cutter, and a multi-purposecrimping tool.
Context
The principles for grounding a BTS3900A are as follows:
l The upper and lower cabinets must be connected through an equipotential cable.
l The lower cabinets are connected to the RFC through an equipotential cable.
l The RFC is connected to the ground busbar through a PGND cable.
The principles for grounding a DBS3900 are as follows:
l The upper and lower cabinets must be connected through an equipotential cable.
l The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to otherlower cabinets through equipotential cables.
l The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to anexternal ground bar through a PGND cable.
The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable.
Table 5-13 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable
Cable Cross-Sectional Area ofthe Core Wire and Size ofthe OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
Equipotentialcable
OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or0.025 in.2)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the PGND cable and equipotential cable.
1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
2. Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling theOT Terminal and the Power Cable.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
831
Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 5-74.1. Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar on the inner wall of the RFC, and
then use spring washers and screws to secure the OT terminals of the PGND cable.
NOTE
When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as shown inthe following figure.
Figure 5-73 Installing an OT terminal correctly
2. Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the external ground copper bar, as shown in
the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
832
Figure 5-74 Installing a PGND cable
(1) Ground bar in the cabinet (2) PGND cable (3) Onsite ground bar
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
833
5.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their CablesThis chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting themodules to external devices.
5.9.1 Installing a BBU CaseThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in anAPM30 or TMC.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and a torque screwdriver.
Context
When two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30, the BBUis installed in the APM30. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC.
l When a second BBU is installed in the APM30, it is recommended that the second BBUbe installed right above or below the original BBU without removing the guide rails.
Figure 5-75 shows the positions for installing BBU cases in an APM30 and a TMC.
Figure 5-75 Positions for installing BBU cases
Procedure
Step 1 Record the electronic serial number (ESN) on the BBU case and report it to the base stationcommissioning personnel. For details, see Obtaining the ESN.
Step 2 Install cable claws on the BBU, as shown in Figure 5-76.
1. Align the two cable claws with the holes on both sides of the BBU case.
2. Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
834
Figure 5-76 Installing cable claws on the BBU case
Step 3 Install the BBU case, as shown in Figure 5-77.
1. Place the BBU on the guide rails and gently push the BBU case into the cabinet.
2. Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ear on each side of the BBU case to 2 N·m(17.70 lbf·in.).
Figure 5-77 Installing a BBU case
Step 4 Install the BBU power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 5-78.
1. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructionsin Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
CAUTIONEnsure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connectedto the BBU first and then to the EPU. The operation in the reverse sequence may causepersonal injury or component damage.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
835
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connectormust be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
2. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.
3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on theEPU in the APM30.
NOTE
Figure 5-78 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30. When the BBU case is installed in a TMC, the cableconnections are the same.
Figure 5-78 Installing the BBU power cable in AC scenarios
Step 5 Install the BBU power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 5-79.
1. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructionsin Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
CAUTIONEnsure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connectedto the BBU first and then to the EPU. The operation in the reverse sequence may causepersonal injury or component damage.
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connectormust be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
2. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.
3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD8 port on theDCDU-12C in the TMC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
836
CAUTIONEnsure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connected to theBBU first and then to the DCDU. The operation in the reverse sequence may cause personalinjury or component damage.
NOTE
Figure 5-79 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC. When the BBU case is installed in an extensionTMC, the cable connections are the same.
Figure 5-79 Installing the BBU power cable in DC scenarios
Step 6 Install inter-BBU signal cables. For details, see 3.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU SignalCables.
Step 7 Install the transmission cables. For details, see 3.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables.
----End
5.9.2 Installing the BBU ComponentsThis section describes how to install the boards into the BBU and SLPU.
Context
NOTE
This chapter only describes the procedure for installing components in the BBU. For details about the slotswhere the BBU components are installed, see the BBU configuration information.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
837
CAUTIONTake correct ESD prevention measures, such as wearing an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, toavoid static damage to boards, modules, and electronic components.
Operation Rulesl When moving a board, hold the board with both hands, as shown in Figure 5-80.
Figure 5-80 Incorrect and correct operations for moving a board
l When installing a board, hold the front panel with one hand and support the edge of the
board with the other hand to insert it into the slot. Do not use only one hand to hold theboard or apply pressure to the edge of the board. Figure 5-81 shows correct and incorrectoperations.
Figure 5-81 Incorrect and correct operations for supporting a board for installation
l When inserting a board into a slot, keep the board on the same plane as the slot. Do not
bend the board or insert it at an angle. Figure 5-82 shows correct and incorrect operations.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
838
Figure 5-82 Incorrect and correct operations for inserting a board
CAUTIONl Exercise cautions when holding and placing boards to avoid collision or scratches. Do not
stack or deform boards after they are unpacked.l When inserting a board, ensure that it does not collide with the subrack and is properly
installed.
Installing the boards into the BBUFigure 5-83 uses the WMPT and UPEU as examples to illustrate how to install boards in theBBU.
1. Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the fillerpanels from the slots.
2. If there are ejector levers on the panel, raise them.3. Gently slide the board into the slot.4. If there are ejector levers on the panel, close them.5. Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
839
Figure 5-83 Installing the boards into the BBU
Installing the boards into the SLPUFigure 5-84 uses the UELP as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the SLPU.
1. Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the fillerpanels from the slots.
2. Gently slide the board into the slot.3. Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).
Figure 5-84 Installing the boards into the SLPU
5.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the outdoor distributionmodule 06D-2 (shortened to ODM) and outdoor fiber distribution 06 (shortened to OFD) on thetop or side of a cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
840
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a Phillips
screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nosepliers.
Contextl An ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed on one side of a single cabinet, or two
ODM or OFD mounting frames can be installed on one side of stacked cabinets or bothsides of a single cabinet. The ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed depending onsite space and the number of ODMs or OFDs to be installed.
l An ODM/OFD mounting frame or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are preferentiallyinstalled on the right side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets. If an ODM/OFD mountingframe or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are installed on the left side of a single cabinetor stacked cabinets, only one ODM or OFD can be installed one ODM/OFD mountingframe.
Figure 5-85 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with six or less RRUs configured)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
841
Figure 5-86 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with 7 to 12 RRUs configured)
Procedurel Installing a mounting frame or two mounting frames on one side of a single cabinet
or mounting frames or both sides of a single cabinet1. Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following
figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
842
Figure 5-87 Installing a mounting kit on the top
2. Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use a
torque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.
Figure 5-88 Installing a mounting kit on the top
3. Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use two
M6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 N·m(344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
843
Figure 5-89 Securing an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to one side of the cabinet
4. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/
OFD06 mounting frame to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-90 Tightening an attachment plate on an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame(1)
5. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the back of the cabinet base
to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
844
Figure 5-91 Tightening an attachment plate on an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame(2)
6. Optional: If two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames need to be installed on bothsides of a single cabinet, the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed onthe other side of the cabinet according to Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5.
l Installing mounting frames on one side of stacked cabinets
1. Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the followingfigure.
Figure 5-92 Installing a mounting kit on the top
2. Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use atorque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
845
Figure 5-93 Installing a mounting kit on the top
3. Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use twoM6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 N·m(344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-94 Securing an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to one side of the cabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
846
4. Use two M6x14 screws to secure the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on
the installed ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame.5. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/
OFD06 mounting frame to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-95 Tightening the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame and itsattachment plate (1)
6. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the back of the cabinet base
to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
847
Figure 5-96 Tightening the second attachment plate
l Installing the ODM06D or OFD06
1. Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D or OFD06 to 1.2N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
848
Figure 5-97 Installing mounting ears
2. Place the ODM06D or OFD06 on the bulges of pre-securing parts on the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the right side of the cabinet, theODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on one side or in the middle of the mounting frame.
l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the left side of the cabinet, the ODM06Dor OFD06 can be installed only in the middle of the mounting frame.
Figure 5-98 Pre-securing the ODM06D or OFD06
(1) Pre-securing part
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
849
3. Use four M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D or OFD06 onto the ODM06D/OFD06
mounting frame to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.). This is a recommended tightening torque.
Figure 5-99 Securing the ODM06D or OFD06
----End
5.9.4 (Optional) Installing the Filler ModuleIn an APM30H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.B), filler modules must be installed in the vacantcustomer space to prevent heat reflux in the empty space. If the vacant space in an APM30H(Ver.C)/TMC11H(Ver.C) has been occupied by filler modules, skip this section.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the filler module in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to the secure thefiller module to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 5-100.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
850
Figure 5-100 Installing the filler module
----End
5.9.5 Installing the SLPUDuring the upgrade, if there is no vacant slot for installing a UELP or UFLP in the BBU case,an SLPU needs to be configured.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and ESD gloves are available.
Context
The following figure shows the recommended position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 orAPM30H.
l When the SLPU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that SLPU be installed inthe top 1 U space in the APM30H.
l When the SLPU is installed in the APM30, it is recommended that SLPU be installed inthe 1 U space below the BBU in the APM30.
Figure 5-101 Position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 or APM30H
(1) Recommended position for installing the SLPU inan APM30
(2) Recommended position for installing the SLPU inan APM30H
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
851
Procedure
Step 1 Install cable claws on both sides of the SLPU case, and move the mounting ear on each side onehole backwards. Use four M4 screws to secure the mounting ears to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), asshown in Figure 5-102.
Figure 5-102 Installing a cable claw
Step 2 Slide the SLPU into the cabinet, and then use a screwdriver to tighten the two M6 screws on themounting ears of the SLPU to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 5-103.
Figure 5-103 Installing the SLPU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
852
Step 3 Install the surge protection transfer cable, as shown in Figure 5-104.
NOTE
The following figure shows the connection of an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable and an E1/T1 cable inGSM mode. For the transmission cable connections in other modes, see "Transmission Cable Connections" inBTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description or DBS3900 Hardware Description.
Figure 5-104 Installing a surge protection transfer cable
(1) T1: E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable (1) T2: E1/T1 cable
Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
5.10 Installing Cables Between Two CabinetsThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade.
5.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two CabinetsThis section describes the changes of power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables,transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade from BTS3900A (with breathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).
Power Cables, PGND Cables, and Equipotential CablesTable 5-14 lists the changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
853
Table 5-14 Changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theAPM30 (inACscenarios)
To bereplaced(newcables needto bepreparedonsite)
- - - - OTterminal(M6)
ACINPUT porton theEPU
Depending ontheexternalequipment
Externalpowerequipment
Inputpowercablefor theTMC(in ACscenarios)
To bereused.Theconnector atoneendneedsto bereplaced.
- - - - EPC4connector
LOAD7 porton theEPU
OTterminal (M6,4 mm2
or0.006in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-12C
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
854
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theTMC(in DCscenarios)
To bereplaced(newcables needto bepreparedonsite)
- - - - OTterminal(M6)
Externalpowerequipment
OTterminal (M6,25mm2 or0.039in.2)
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-12C
Inputpowercablefor theRFC(in DCscenarios)
To bereplaced(newcables needto bepreparedonsite)
- - - - Dependingon theexternalequipment
Dependingon theexternalequipment
OTterminal (M6,a groupofcableswith across-sectional areaof 35mm2
[0.054in2] ortwogroupsofcableswith across-sectional areaof 16mm2
[0.025in2])
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-13Ain theRFC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
855
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Inputpowercablefor theRFC(in ACscenarios)
To bereplaced
- - - - OTterminal(M6)
RFC1terminal ontheEPUin theAPM30
OTterminal
RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-13Ain theRFC
RRUpowercable
Added
- - - - EPC5orEPC4connector
One ofLOAD0 toLOAD8 portson theDCDU-12B
Depending ontheexternalequipment
PWRport ontheRRU
Powercablefor theheaterin theTMC
To bereused
Barewire
8-pintransferterminal ontheinnerleftwallof theAPM30
Barewire
8-pintransferterminal ontheinnerleftwallof theTMC
- - - -
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
856
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
Powercablesfor thebatterycabinet
To bereplaced(newcables needto bepreparedonsite)
OTterminal (M8,35mm2
or0.054in.2)
BATterminal ontheEPUin theAPM30
OTterminal (M8,35mm2 or0.054in.2)
Wiringterminal forthestoragebatteries intheBBC
Powercablefor theheating filmin thebatterycabinet
To bereplaced(newcables needto bepreparedonsite)
- 8-pinwiringterminal intheAPM30
- Junctionterminal fortheinputpowercableof theheating filmin theBBC
Equipotential cable
To bereused
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin theuppercabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin thelowercabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin theuppercabinet
OTterminal (M6)
Ground barin thelowercabinet
PGNDcable
To bereused
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin thecabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Groundbusbaroutside thecabinet
OTterminal(M6)
Ground barin thecabinet
OTterminal (M6)
Groundbusbaroutside thecabinet
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
857
NOTE
(1) The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length requirementsof the new RRU.
Signal CablesTable 5-15 lists the signal cable changes.
Table 5-15 Signal cables changes
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
APMI-BBUmonitoringsignalcable
Tobereused
RJ45connector
COM_INport ontheAPMIin theAPM30
RJ45connector
MON1 porton theUPEUin theBBUin theAPM30
RJ45connector
COM_INport ontheCMUEA intheAPM30
RJ45connector
MON1 porton theUPEUin theBBUin theAPM30
FMUA-BBUmonitoringsignalcable
Tobereplaced
RJ45connector
COM_INport ontheFMUA intheRFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEUin theBBUin theAPM30
RJ45connector
COM_INport ontheCMUEAassembly intheRFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEUin theBBUin theAPM30
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
858
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
BBUinterconnectioncable
Tobereused
DLCconnector
One ofthe M0to M4portson theUCIUin theBBU
DLCconnector
l CIport ontheUMPTintheBBU
l S0port ontheUCIUintheBBU
DLCconnector
One ofthe M0to M4portson theUCIUin theBBU
DLCconnector
l CIport ontheUMPTintheBBU
l S0port ontheUCIUintheBBU
BBUalarmcable
Tobereused
RJ45connector
EXT_ALM0orEXT_ALM1port ontheUPEUorUEIUin theBBU
RJ45connector
Externalalarmdevice
RJ45connector
EXT_ALM0orEXT_ALM1port ontheUPEUorUEIUin theBBU
RJ45connector
Externalalarmdevice
Cablebetweentwocombined basestations
Tobereused
DB15maleconnector
GCKport ontheUCIUin theBBU
MD36orDB15maleconnector
DGLUb porton theDCTB
DB15maleconnector
GCKport ontheUCIUin theBBU
MD36orDB15maleconnector
DGLUb porton theDCTB
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
859
Cable ChangeType
Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
ConnectoratOneEnd
InstallationPosition
Connectorat theOtherEnd
InstallationPosition
External drycontactmonitoringsignalcable
Tobereused
Barewire
SLPU Dependingon theexternalequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
Barewire
SLPU Dependingon theexternalequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
Transmission Cables and CPRI Electrical CablesTable 5-16 lists the changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables.
Table 5-16 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI electrical cables
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
E1/T1cable
To bereused
DB26 maleconnector
OUTSIDE porton the UELP
Depending onthe externalequipment
Externaltransmissionequipment
FE/GEEthernet cable
To bereused
RJ45 connector FE electricalport near theOUTSIDEsilkscreen onthe UFLP
RJ45 connector Router that isconnected tothe BSC
FE/GEfiberopticcable
To bereused
LC connector l FE opticalport on theGTMU,WMPT,UMPT, orUTRP inthe BBU
l FE opticalport on theLMPT orUMPT inthe BBU
l FCconnector
l SCconnector
l LCconnector
Router that isconnected tothe BSC
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
860
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
E1/T1surgeprotectiontransfercable
To bereused
DB25connector
INSIDE porton the UELP
DB26connector
E1/T1 port onthe GTMU,WMPT/UMPT,or UTRP in theBBU
FE/GEsurgeprotectiontransfercable
To bereused
RJ45 connector l FEelectricalport on theGTMU,WMPT, orUMPT inthe BBU
l FEelectricalport on theLMPT orUMPT inthe BBU
RJ45 connector FE electricalport in theINSIDE part onthe UFLP in theSLPU
Interconnection cablebetween FEopticalports
To bereused
LC connector FE optical porton the GTMU,WMPT/UMPT, orLMPT/UMPTin the BBU
LC connector FE optical porton the WMPT/UMPT, LMPT/UMPT, orGTMU in theBBU
Interconnection cablebetween FEelectrical ports
To bereused
RJ45 connector FE electricalport on theGTMU,WMPT/UMPT, orLMPT/UMPTin the BBU
RJ45 connector FE electricalport on theWMPT/UMPT,LMPT/UMPT,or GTMU in theBBU
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
861
Cable Change Type
Connector atOne End
InstallationPosition
Connector atthe Other End
InstallationPosition
CPRIelectrical cable
To bereused
SFP20 maleconnector
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5ports on theGTMU inthe BBU
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5 (orCPRI0 toCPRI2)ports on theWBBP inthe BBU
l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5ports on theLBBP in theBBU
SFP20 maleconnector
l CPRI0 orCPRI1 porton one ofMRFU 0 toMRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofGRFU 0 toGRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofWRFU 0 toWRFU 5
l CPRI0 porton one ofLRFU 0 toLRFU 5
RF CablesTable 5-17 lists the RF cable changes.
Table 5-17 RF cables changes
Cable ChangeType
Connectorat One End
Installation Position
Connectorat the OtherEnd
Installation Position
RF jumper To be reused DIN straightmaleconnector
Antennafeeder
DIN elbowmaleconnector
ANT_TX/RXA andANT_RXBports on theRFU
Inter-RFURF signalcable
To be reused QMA elbowmaleconnector
RX_OUTAport on theRFU
QMA elbowmaleconnector
RX_INBport on theRFU
5.10.2 Installing Power Cables for AC CabinetsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for variouscabinets when AC power is supplied.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
862
Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30
Input power cables for the APM30 connect the external power equipment to the input wiringterminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the APM30.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables arepurchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
An AC-powered BTS3900A supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110V AC dual-live-wire power supplies. To support different types of power supply, the APM30needs to use different input power cables, as shown in Table 5-18.
Table 5-18 Specifications of input power cables for the APM30
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercables for theAPM30supplied with220 V AC three-phase power
L1wire
Brown OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l They need tobe preparedonsite.
l Black cablewith dualinsulationlayers andfour corewires
L2wire
Black OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
L3wire
Gray OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Nwire
Blue OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
863
Cable Color One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercables for theAPM30supplied with220 V ACsingle-phasepower
L wire Brown OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l They need tobe preparedonsite.
l Two wires (Land N), eachwith a singlecore and twoinsulationlayers
Nwire
Blue OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Input powercables for theAPM30supplied with110 V AC dual-live-wire power
L1wire
Black OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
l They need tobe preparedonsite.
l Three wires(L1, L2, andN), each witha single coreand twoinsulationlayers
L2wire
Red OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Nwire
White OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)
Dependingon theexternalequipment
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the APM30.
1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.
2. Add OT terminals to both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cables for the APM30, as shown in Figure 5-105, Figure 5-106, orFigure 5-107.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover for the ACinput terminals, and open the protective cover.
2. Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting barfrom the L1, L2, and L3 terminals.
NOTE
When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110 V ACdual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.
3. Route the power cables into the cabinet along the left side of the cabinet interior, connecteach wire to the corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screwsto 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
864
4. Reinstall the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screw on the protectivecover to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).
Figure 5-105 Installing input power cables for the APM30 on the EPU side (220 V AC three-phase)
(1) Short-circuiting bar
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
865
Figure 5-106 Installing input power cables for the APM30 on the EPU side (220 V AC single-phase)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
866
Figure 5-107 Installing the input power cable for the APM30 on the EPU side (110 V AC dual-live-wire)
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30 to the TMC
Power cables from the APM30 to the TMC feed power from the APM30 to all components inthe TMC. You need to replace the connectors at both ends of the power cables from the APM30to the TMC to reuse the power cables.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
867
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables arepurchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 5-19 lists the specifications of the power cables from the APM30 to the TMC.
Table 5-19 Specifications of power cables from the APM30 to the TMC
Cable WireColor
One End The Other End Remarks
Input powercables forthe TMC
RTN(+)wire
Black EPC4 connector OT terminal(M6, 4 mm2 or0.006 in.2)
They can bereused and theirconnectors needto be replacedonsite.NEG
(-)wire
Blue OT terminal (M6,4 mm2 or 0.006 in.2)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC.1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to each end of the input power cables for the TMC according to the
specifications in Table 5-19. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the PowerCable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cables for the TMC, as shown in Figure 5-108.1. Remove the protective cover from the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.2. Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cables to the
DC output port LOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30.3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC, and tighten the screws on the OT terminals to4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover onto the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
868
Figure 5-108 Installing input power cables for the TMC
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30 to RFCs
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from the APM30to RFCs.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
869
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables arepurchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 5-20 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30 to RFCs.
Table 5-20 Specifications of power cables from the APM30 to RFCs
Cable WireColor
One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
DCDU-13Apower cables
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6, 25mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal(M6, 25 mm2 or0.039 in.2)
Cables arenewlydelivered.
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Power cablesbetweencascadedDCDU-13As
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6, 25mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal(M6, 25 mm2 or0.039 in.2)
Cables arenewlydelivered.
NEG(-)wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Install input power cables for the RFC (between the APM30 and the DCDU-13A on the innerleft wall of the RFC), as shown in Figure 5-109.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC1 terminals on the EPU
in the APM30.
NOTE
If two RFCs are configured, connect the input power cables for the second RFC to the RFC2 terminals onthe EPU.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-13A in the RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
870
Figure 5-109 Installing input power cables for the RFC
Step 2 Install power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As (between the left and right DCDU-13As),as shown in Figure 5-110.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the left DCDU-13A.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the right DCDU-13A.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
871
Figure 5-110 Installing power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30 to the BBCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from the APM30to the BBC.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
872
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables arepurchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 5-21 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30 to the BBC.
Table 5-21 Specifications of power cables from the APM30 to the BBC
Cable WireColor
One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Power cablesfor thebatterycabinet
RTN(+)wire
Red OT terminal (M8, 35mm2 or 0.054 in.2)
OT terminal(M8, 35 mm2 or0.054 in.2)
They aredelivered andtheir connectorsneed to be addedonsite.NEG
(-)wire
Black
Procedure
Step 1 Add connectors to the power cables to be installed according to the specifications in the precedingtable.1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors at each end of the cables by performing the following operations:
l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cablel Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable
Step 2 Install power cables for the BBC, as shown in Figure 5-111.1. Connect the OT terminals (M8) at one end of the power cables to the DC output terminals
near the BAT silkscreen on the right side of the EPU in the APM30.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the right side of the BBC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
873
Figure 5-111 Installing power cables for the battery cabinet
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
(Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables
When an AC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables andmain power cables need to be installed onsite. RRU power cables feed power from the outdoordistribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the EPU in theAPM30H to the ODM.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
874
Contextl This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The RRU power cables are
connected to the same positions and routed in the same way in a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).l The original RRU power cables can be reused only if they meet the power supply and length
requirements of the new RRUs.l The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the
RRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installationguide.
l The following table lists the specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables.
Table 5-22 Specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables
Cable Color One End The Other End Remarks
Mainpowercables
RTN(+)
Black Cord endterminal
OT terminal(M6)
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
RRUpowercables
RTN(+)
Black Cord endterminal
Depending onthe RRU port
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Add cord end terminals to RRU power cables on the ODM side according to the instructions inAssembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Use a T20 Torx screwdriver to loosen the six screws on the ODM06D-3 cover. Then open thecover, as shown in Figure 5-112.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
875
Figure 5-112 Opening the ODM06D-3 cover
Step 3 Prepare cables according to the cabling label on the protective cover.
Step 4 Install the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection box,RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable in sequence, as shown in Figure 5-113.1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cable clips.
NOTE
The screws on the cable clips can be adjusted to adapt to cables with different cross-sectional areas.
2. Partially loosen the PG connectors to route the cables through the PG connectors.3. Route the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection
box, RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable through the PG connectors insequence.
4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminals onto the terminal block.5. Use clips to secure the cables and tighten the screws on the clips to ensure that the clips
contact with the shield layers of the cables.6. Secure the PG connectors of the cables.
NOTICETighten the PG connectors to waterproof the device.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
876
Figure 5-113 Installing the cables
(1) Surge protection alarm cable (2) RRU power cables
(3) Main power cables (4) PGND cable for the surge protection box
Step 5 Close the ODM06D-3 cover and use a T20 Torx screwdriver to secure the six screws on thecover, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-114 Closing the ODM06D-3 cover
Step 6 Connect main power cables to the EPU in the APM30H.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
877
1. Add OT terminals to the main power cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC2 terminals on the EPUin the APM30H.
Figure 5-115 Installing the main power cables
Step 7 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 8 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 9 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
5.10.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC ScenariosThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for variouscabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
878
Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theRFC when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables arepurchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 5-23 lists the specifications of input power cables for the RFC.
Table 5-23 Specifications of input power cables for the RFC
Cable WireColor
One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercables for theRFC
(16 mm2 or0.025 in.2,two groups)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6,16 mm2 or 0.025in.2)
Depending onthe externalpowerequipment
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-) wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the RFC.
1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.
2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the RFC according to Table 1.For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install input power cables for the RFC, as shown in Figure 5-116.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-13A in the RFC.
2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
879
Figure 5-116 Installing input power cables for the RFC
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Input Power Cables for the TMC
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theTMC when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
880
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables arepurchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Table 5-24 lists the specifications of input power cables for the TMC.
Table 5-24 Specifications of input power cables for the TMC
Cable WireColor
One End The OtherEnd
Remarks
Input powercables for theTMC
(16 mm2 or0.025 in.2,one group)
RTN(+)wire
Black OT terminal (M6,16 mm2 or 0.025in.2)
Depending onthe externalpowerequipment
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-) wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC.1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the TMC according to Table
5-24. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cables for the TMC, as shown in Figure 5-117.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC.2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
881
Figure 5-117 Installing input power cables for the TMC
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
(Optional) Installing RRU Power CablesWhen a DC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables andmain power cables need to be installed onsite. RRU power cables feed power from the outdoordistribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the external powerequipment to the ODM.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
882
Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.
Contextl This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The RRU power cables are
connected to the same positions and routed in the same way in a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).l The original RRU power cables can be reused only if they meet the power supply and length
requirements of the new RRUs.l The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the
RRU. For details about how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the relatedRRU installation guide.
l The following table lists the specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables.
Table 5-25 Specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables
Cable Color One End The Other End Remarks
Mainpowercables
RTN(+)
Black Cord endterminal
Depending onthe externalpowerequipment
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
RRUpowercables
RTN(+)
Black Cord endterminal
Depending onthe RRU port
They need to beprepared onsite.
NEG(-)
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Add cord end terminals to RRU power cables on the ODM side according to the instructions inAssembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Use a T20 Torx screwdriver to loosen the six screws on the ODM06D-3 cover. Then open thecover, as shown in Figure 5-118.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
883
Figure 5-118 Opening the ODM06D-3 cover
Step 3 Prepare cables according to the cabling label on the protective cover.
Step 4 Install the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection box,RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable in sequence, as shown in Figure 5-119.1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cable clips.
NOTE
The screws on the cable clips can be adjusted to adapt to cables with different cross-sectional areas.
2. Partially loosen the PG connectors to route the cables through the PG connectors.3. Route the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection
box, RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable through the PG connectors insequence.
4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminals onto the terminal block.5. Use clips to secure the cables and tighten the screws on the clips to ensure that the clips
contact with the shield layers of the cables.6. Secure the PG connectors of the cables.
NOTICETighten the PG connectors to waterproof the device.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
884
Figure 5-119 Installing the cables
(1) Surge protection alarm cable (2) RRU power cables
(3) Main power cables (4) PGND cable for the surge protection box
Step 5 Close the ODM06D-3 cover and use a T20 Torx screwdriver to secure the six screws on thecover, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-120 Closing the ODM06D-3 cover
Step 6 Connect the connectors at one end of RRU power cables to RRUs.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
885
Step 7 Connect main power cables to the external power equipment.
1. Add connectors to each end of the power cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.
2. Connect the cord end terminals at one end of power cables to the input ports on the ODM.
3. Connect the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.
Figure 5-121 Installing the main power cables
Step 8 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.
Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
5.10.4 Installing Transmission CablesThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing transmission cables betweena cabinet and the external transmission equipment.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
886
Installing E1/T1 CablesThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing E1/T1 cables.
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l When a TMC uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of E1/
T1 cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30 that is shown in Figure5-122.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cables to the OUTSIDE ports on the UELP, as shown in Figure5-122.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
887
Figure 5-122 Installing E1/T1 cables
Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cables out of the cable hole on the bottom left side of thecabinet.
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing FE/GE Ethernet Cables
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE Ethernet cables.
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
888
l FE/GE Ethernet cables are shielded straight-through cables.l When a TMC uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of FE/
GE Ethernet cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30 that is shown inFigure 5-124.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE Ethernet cables in a proper position within 1 m (3.28 ft) fromthe cable hole of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 5-123.1. Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE Ethernet cables, and strip a length of about
40 mm (1.57 in.) jacket from the cables to expose the shield layers2. Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through the
clip.3. Attach the ground clip to the shield layers of the FE/GE Ethernet cables and tighten the M4
screws on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (0.27 lbf·in.).
Figure 5-123 Installing the ground clip
Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) portnear the OUTSIDE silkscreen on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 5-124.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
889
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
Figure 5-124 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables
Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic CablesThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
890
Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is
labeled as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multimode optical
module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.l FE/GE fiber optic cables have an LC connector at one end and an FC, SC, or LC connector
at the other end.l SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on an LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, the two ports
cannot be used simultaneously.l SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, the two
ports cannot be used simultaneously.l This section uses the procedure for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H as
an example. The procedures for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H and aTMC11H are the same.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes maybecome abnormal. Therefore, you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical modulewithin 20 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 5-125.1. Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the corresponding
BBU board.2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.3. Lower the puller of the optical module.4. Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.5. Raise the puller of the optical module.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
891
Figure 5-125 Installing the optical module
Step 2 Insert the optical modules into the corresponding FE/GE optical ports, as shown in Figure5-126.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.
Step 3 Stick temporary labels to the FE/GE fiber optic cables to be installed.
Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables into the optical module, as shown in Figure5-126.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
892
Figure 5-126 Installing FE/GE fiber optic cables
Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 6 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the FE/GE fiber optic cables with engineering labels. Fordetailed operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
5.10.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in ACScenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cablesbetween cabinets when AC power is supplied.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
893
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30.
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed
in the APM30 or TMC. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function. Forthe monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 5-26 lists the specifications of a monitoring signal cable betweentwo cabinets, which is installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
Table 5-26 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theAPM30
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30), as shown inthe following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the
APM30.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
894
Figure 5-127 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30)
Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC.
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed
in the APM30 or TMC. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function. Forthe monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 5-27 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between twocabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
895
Table 5-27 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theAPM30
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in thebatterycabinet
OT terminal Temperaturesensor in theBBC
2-pinconnector
TEM_BATport on thePMU in theAPM30
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30), as shown byillustration 1 in the following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the
APM30.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the battery cabinet (between theBBC and APM30), as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.1. Connect the 2-pin connector at one end of the power cable to the TEM_BAT port on the
PMU in the APM30.2. Connect the temperature sensor at one end of the cable to the cable bridge at the upper left
side of BBC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
896
Figure 5-128 Installing a monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the batterycabinet (between the BBC and APM30)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 TMCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 TMC.
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed
in the APM30 or TMC. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function. Forthe monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. The following table lists the specifications of monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
897
Table 5-28 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30+1 TMC
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theAPM30
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC andRFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the TMC
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30), as shown byillustration 1 in the following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the
APM30.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC and RFC), asshown by illustration 2 in the following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the TMC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the
RFC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
898
Figure 5-129 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC and RFC)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMC.
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed
in the APM30 or TMC. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function. Forthe monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 5-29 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between twocabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
899
Table 5-29 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMC
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theAPM30
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC andRFC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the TMC
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in thebatterycabinet
OT terminal Temperaturesensor in theBBC
2-pinconnector
TEM_BATport on thePMU in theAPM30
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30), as shown byillustration 1 in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in theAPM30.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC and RFC), asshown by illustration 2 in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the TMC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the RFC.
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the battery cabinet (between theBBC and APM30), as shown by illustration 3 in the following figure.
1. Connect the temperature sensor at one end of the cable to the cable bridge at the upper leftside of BBC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the TEM_BAT port on the PMU in the APM30.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
900
Figure 5-130 Installing monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMC
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
5.10.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48V DC Scenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cablesbetween cabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
901
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed
in the APM30 or TMC. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function. Forthe monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 5-30 lists the specifications of a monitoring signal cable betweentwo cabinets, which is installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
Table 5-30 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 TMC
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(betweenthe RFC andTMC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU in theTMC
To bereused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC), as shown inFigure 5-131.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the TMC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
902
Figure 5-131 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC)
Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMCsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMCs.
ContextMonitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of thecabinets. Table 5-31 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets,which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
903
Table 5-31 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+2 TMCs
Cable One End The Other End Remarks
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andTMC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin the TMC
To be reused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theRFC andextensionTMC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefan assemblyin theextensionTMC
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC), as shown byillustration 1 in the following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the TMC.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the RFC and extensionTMC), as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the extension
TMC.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
904
Figure 5-132 Installing monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+2 TMCs
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMCsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMCs.
Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured. The second BBU does not perform
the monitoring function. For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see MonitoringPrinciples.
l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 5-32 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between twocabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
905
Table 5-32 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenarioof 2 RFCs+2 TMCs
Cable One End The Other End ChangeType
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(betweenthe RFC andTMC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
RJ45connector
MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU in theTMC
To bereused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweenthe RFC andextensionTMC)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on thefanassembly intheextensionTMC
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC
To bereused
Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweentwo RFCs)
RJ45connector
COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe rightRFC
RJ45connector
COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe left RFC
To bereused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC), as shown byillustration 1 in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the TMC.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the RFC and extensionTMC), as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the rightRFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assemblyin the extension TMC.
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between two RFCs), as shownby illustration 3 in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
906
1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the leftRFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in theright RFC.
Figure 5-133 Installing monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of2 RFCs+2 TMCs
Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.
----End
5.10.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal CablesThis section describes how to install inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or single-mode basestation.
Prerequisitesl The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.l The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.l The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable.
Optical modules can be divided into single- and multimode optical modules, which can bedistinguished as follows:
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
907
l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode opticalmodule is black or gray.
l The transmission mode is displayed as "SM" on the label of a single-mode optical moduleand "MM" on the label of a multimode optical module.
There is a label on each optical module, which provides information such as the rate, wavelength,and transmission mode, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-134 Label on an optical module
(1) Rate (2) Wavelength (3) Transmission mode
Context
The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBUsignal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU SignalCable Connections.
Table 5-33 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected
InterconnectionMode
Installation Position
BBU 0 BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT M0 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_U
M1 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_L
HEI port on the WBBPf HEI port on the WBBPf
NOTE
BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20minutes.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
908
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the opticalmodules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.
1. Lower the puller of the optical module.
2. Insert the optical module into the port.
3. Raise the puller of the optical module.
Figure 5-135 Installing the optical module
Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 5-136.
Figure 5-136 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable
Step 3 Install one or two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT. The followingfigure shows the installation of two inter-BBU signal cables.
NOTE
l You need to install two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+UL mode.
l You need to install only one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+L or GL+Umode.
1. Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0.
2. Connect the other end of the cables to the CI ports on the UMPT_U and UMPT_L in BBU1.
Step 4 Install one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the WBBPf to the WBBPf, as shown in thefollowing figure. The inter-BBU signal cable is installed only to interconnect the WBBPf in aBBU to the WBBPf in another BBU.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 0.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
909
NOTE
l When both BBUs are installed in an APM30, install inter-BBU signal cables, as shown in Figure 5-137.When BBU 0 and BBU 1 are installed in an APM30 and a TMC, respectively, install inter-BBU signalcables, as shown in Figure 5-138.
l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the sametype as those on BBU 0.
l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1Aand 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1.
l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.
Figure 5-137 Installing inter-BBU signal cables (1)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
910
Figure 5-138 Installing inter-BBU signal cables (2)
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic patchcord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBUinterconnection signal cable before using cable ties to secure it. If another type of cable is usedas a BBU interconnection signal cable, directly use cable ties to secure it.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
5.10.8 Installing the RF JumperThe RF jumper transmits signals between the RFU and antenna system.
PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a cable cutter, PVC insulation tape, and an open-end wrench or torque wrench.
ProcedureStep 1 Route the RF jumper into the cabinet through the cable outlet in the cabinet according to one of
the manners shown in Figure 5-139. Lay out the installed RF jumper according to the instructionsin Cabling Requirements.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
911
Figure 5-139 Routing of the RF jumper
Step 2 Install the RF jumper, as shown in Figure 5-141 and Figure 5-140.
NOTICEConnect each RF jumper securely to prevent RF signal leakage.
Figure 5-140 Installing RF jumpers for interconnected RFUs
NOTE
Inter-RFU RF signal cables have been installed in the cabinet before delivery. You only need to check whetherthe cables are securely connected.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
912
Figure 5-141 Installing RF jumpers for independent RFUs
1. Connect the DIN connector on the RF jumper to the ANT port on the RFU panel.2. Use a 32 mm (1.26 in.) open-end wrench or torque wrench to tighten the two DIN
connectors from bottom to top. Ensure that the tightening torque reaches 25 N·m to 35 N·m(221.27 lbf·in. to 309.78 lbf·in.).
Figure 5-142 Tightening the DIN connectors
Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumpers according to the instructions in Attaching the ColorRing.
Step 4 Connect the DIN straight male connector at the other end of the jumper to the connector on thefeeder.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
913
5.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical CablesCPRI electrical cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RFUs.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove dustproof bags from the connectors at both ends of the CPRI electrical cables.
Step 2 Insert the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables into the CPRI ports on thecorresponding board in the BBU.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,
l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D) HardwareDescription.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing CPRI Cables.
Step 3 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cables through the cable holes on the left side of thepower cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the correspondingRFUs, as shown in Figure 5-143.
Figure 5-143 Installing CPRI electrical cables
Step 4 Connect the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables to the CPRI0 ports on thepanels of the RFUs, as shown in Figure 5-143.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
914
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.
NOTE
l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cables at the top of the DCDU-13A in the RFC or inthe base of the RFC.
l Lay out the cables according to the manners in Figure 5-143. Ensure that the cables are routed to the RFUsthrough the cable bridge above the RFUs.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
5.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic CablesCPRI fiber optic cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RRUs.
Contextl This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The CPRI fiber optic cables are
connected to the same positions and routed in the same way in a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is
labeled as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical
module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
NOTICEThe performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes maybecome abnormal. Therefore, you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical modulewithin 20 minutes.
For the details about the cable connections,l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base
Station Cables.l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing
CPRI Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 5-144.1. Lower the puller of the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP. Then insert
an optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on theRF module.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
915
NOTE
Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.
3. Raise the puller of the optical module.
Figure 5-144 Installing the optical module
Step 2 Install CPRI fiber optic cables, as shown in Figure 5-145 and Figure 5-146.1. Stick temporary labels to the CPRI fiber optic cables to be installed.2. Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors on the fiber optic cables.3. Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into
the optical modules in the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP, and then insert the DLC connectorslabeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module in the RF module.
NOTICEl When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout fiber optic
cables on the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.03 m (1.18in.), respectively.
l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX port on the BBU must be connected to theTX port on the RF module, and the RX port on the BBU must be connected to the RXport on the RF module.
Figure 5-145 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
916
Figure 5-146 Installing CPRI fiber optic cables
Step 3 Route CPRI fiber optic cables out of the cabinet from the cable hole on the left bottom. Fordetails about how to route the cables, see Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Replace the temporary labels on the CPRI fiber optic cables with engineering labels. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
5.11 Installation ChecklistAfter the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installationenvironment, and cable-related items.
Cabinet Installation ChecklistTable 5-34 describes the cabinet installation checklist.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
917
Table 5-34 Cabinet installation checklist
No. Item
1 The installation position of the cabinet strictly complies with the engineeringdesign.
2 The base is securely installed.
3 All the bolts, including those for electrical connections, are tightened. The springwashers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.
4 The cabinet is neat and clean.
5 The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired. For details, see3.14.3 Repainting.
6 Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.
Installation Environment Checklist
Table 5-35 describes the installation environment checklist.
Table 5-35 Installation environment checklist
No. Item
1 No excessive straps or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.
2 No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around the cabinet.
3 Antirust powder on the cabinet door is cleared.
Electrical Connection Checklist
Table 5-36 describes the electrical connection checklist.
Table 5-36 Electrical connection checklist
No. Item
1 All self-made PGND cables are copper-based and have proper core diameters. Thereshould not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed.
2 The PGND cable is securely connected and the AC input power cable and cablesin the cabinet are correctly connected according to the electrical design of the powersystem. The screws are tightened. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not short-circuited.
3 The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off rather than coiled.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
918
No. Item
4 The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are securely solderedor crimped.
5 The bare wires and the terminal handles at the wiring terminals are coated with heatshrink tubing.
6 The flat washer and the spring washer are well mounted on all OT terminals, andthe OT terminals are intact and contact with the wiring terminals properly.
7 The exterior of the storage battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.
8 The shell of the storage battery is clean without any leakage trace.
9 The wiring post on the storage battery stands properly without any damage, and thepost is not covered with any acid substances.
10 The pressure relief valve of the battery is not deformed, and no liquid leaks.
11 The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positiveand negative poles.
12 The voltage of the storage battery is normal.l The voltage of a 2 V storage battery cell ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.l The voltage of a 12 V storage battery cell ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.l The total voltage of the storage batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.
13 The circuit breakers for the storage batteries are set to OFF.
Cable Installation Checklist
Table 5-37 describes the cable installation checklist.
Table 5-37 Cable installation checklist
No. Item
1 All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are securelyconnected. All cable connectors at the bottom of the cabinet are securely installed.
2 The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and facethe same direction.
3 Different types of cables are bound separately when being routed, for example, thepower cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber optic cables, and E1/T1/FE cables.
4 The layout of all cables facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion. Forexample, the maintenance transfer cable is bound to the outside of the BBU cableclaw, as shown in Figure 5-147.
5 All the labels at both ends of the cables are legible.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
919
No. Item
6 The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are smoothwithout sharp edges. An extra length of 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.2 in.) of theoutdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.
7 Any unused port is properly protected.
8 The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid false connection that will causean abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).
Figure 5-147 Checking the maintenance transfer cable
Checklist for the Hardware Upgrade
Table 5-38 describes the checklist for the hardware upgrade.
Table 5-38 Checklist for the hardware upgrade
No.
Cabinet Item
1 APM30 or TMC The vacant customer space in the cabinet has been configured withthe filler module.
2 APM30 or TMC The ELU has been installed. For detailed operations, see 5.4.5Replacing the AFMU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
3 APM30 or TMC The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
4 APM30 or TMC The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
920
No.
Cabinet Item
5 APM30 or TMC The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 5.4.9 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
6 APM30 or TMC The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 5.9.1 Installing aBBU Case.
7 APM30 or TMC The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 5.4.9 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.
8 APM30 The input power cable for the APM30 has been replaced. Fordetailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cables for theAPM30.
9 APM30 The power transfer cable for the APM30 has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
10 APM30 The PGND cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 5.4.6 Replacing the Power System.
11 APM30 The monitoring signal transfer cable and CMUEA-BBUmonitoring signal cable have been installed. For detailedoperations, see 5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
12 TMC The CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable has been installed.For detailed operations, see 5.5.8 Installing Cables in theCabinet.
13 RFC The ELU assembly has been installed. For detailed operations, see4.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel. Ensurethat all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. Anincorrect or faulty ELU may cause problems in heat dissipationor monitoring.
14 RFC The monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor,monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, ELU signalcable, and monitoring signal cable for the fan have been installed.For detailed operations, see 4.6.6 Installing Cables in theCabinet.
15 RFC The input power cable for the RFC has been replaced. For detailedoperations, see Installing Power Cables from the APM30 toRFCs or Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC.
16 - The shield layer of the RRU power cable has been grounded. Fordetailed operations, see (Optional) Installing RRU PowerCables or (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
921
No.
Cabinet Item
17 BBC The power cable for the storage batteries has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 5.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries andCables in the Battery Cabinet.
5.12 Powering On a Base StationThis section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supplyto the components in a cabinet.
Prerequisitesl Input power cables for the BTS3900A are correctly connected.
l The power supply to the BTS3900A meets the requirements of the power system.
l The external power supply to the BTS3900A has been shut off.
l All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.
l All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been set to OFF.
l All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T havebeen set to OFF.
l Switch on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T has been set to OFF.
l Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.
l Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.
Context
DANGERExercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves some high voltageoperations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact with the input voltage usinga damp object may be fatal.
NOTICEl Power on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it. If you power off a cabinet or
BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU formaintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
922
Table 5-39 Circuit breakers in BTS3900A base stations
BaseStation
Power Device(1) Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A(Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,DCDU-03C, or powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A or EPS 01Cl BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2
circuit breakers on the power distribution boxin an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU0 toRFU5 circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 (Thecircuit breakers control the power input to theBBU, fan assembly, and RFUs.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control thepower input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fanassembly, and customer transmissionequipment.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control thepower input to the BBU, fan assembly, andcustomer transmission equipment.)
BTS3900A(Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 orEPU03A-04,DCDU-11A,DCDU-11B,DCDU-11C, and powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02 orEPU03A-04
l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2circuit breakers on the power distribution boxin an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11A (SW0 to SW8 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,FAN 01B, and BBU 0 and BBU 1. The SW9circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA, and FAN 02B. TheSW9 circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11C (SW0 to SW5 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the transmissionequipment. SW6 to SW9 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to BBU 0 and BBU 1,EMUA, and FAN 02B.)
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
923
BaseStation
Power Device(1) Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A(Ver.D)
EPU05A-02 orEPU05A-04,DCDU-12A,DCDU-12B,DCDU-12C, and powerdistribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02 orEPU05A-04
l BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers onthe power distribution box in an IBBS200D orIBBS200T
l Switch on the power distribution box in anIBBS700D or IBBS700T
NOTE
(1) In this section, EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 and EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 are shortened to EPU, EPS 01Aor EPS 01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.
ProcessThe following figure shows the power-on check process.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
924
Figure 5-148 Power-on check process
Procedurel Power on an AC base station.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
925
1. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply andthe ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.
2. Optional: If the base station is configured with a battery cabinet, set the BAT circuitbreaker on the EPU or EPS to ON and set the circuit breaker on the power distributionbox in the battery cabinet to ON. Otherwise, skip this substep.
3. Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and batterycabinet.
4. Set the circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS for the corresponding components to ON,and check the power supply status of each component.
Table 5-40 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU or EPS
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
APM30H PMU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
PSU l The power indicator is steady green.l The fault indicator is steady off.
Fanassembly
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
IBBS200DorIBBS200T
Fan or TECin the frontdoor
The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the RUNindicator on the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA isblinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1sand off for 1s).
IBBS700D Fan in thefront doorandCMUEA
The fan is working properly, and the RUN indicatoron the CMUEA is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
IBBS700T TEC andCMUF
The TEC is working properly, and the RUN indicatoron the CMUF is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
5. Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on each DCDU
in the RFC and TMC11H to ON. Skip this substep if there is no circuit breaker on theDCDU, such as the DCDU-12A, DCDU-12B, and DCDU-12C.
6. Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.7. Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
926
Table 5-41 Normal status of components in the cabinet
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
APM30H BBU l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and offfor 1s). The indicators indicating the status of theCPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.
TMC11H FAN 02A/FAN 02B/FAN 02D
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
RFC RFU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
FAN 01A/FAN 01B/FAN 01C
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
- RRU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, checkwhether the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.
NOTE
The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other indicators, seeBBU Hardware Description.
8. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
927
Table 5-42 Troubleshooting
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to allcomponents in thecabinet
Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit
breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.
Failure in the powersupply to a board inthe BBU
Check as follows:1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the
slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the statusof indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove theboard, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards ofthe same type, and check the status of the indicators.l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
928
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to othercomponents in thecabinet
Check as follows:1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skipthis step and go to step 2 if this component does not useany fuse terminal block.l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse accordingto the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, goto step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to thecomponent.l If the input power is normal, replace the component.l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connectedsecurely. If the power cable is not securelyconnected, turn off the circuit breaker for thecomponent (if there is no circuit breaker for thecomponent, remove the connector from the powerunit) and reconnect the power cable. If the powercable is securely connected, the protector (such ascircuit breaker or fuse) on the component may bedamaged. In this case, replace the damagedprotector. If the protector cannot be replaced,replace the upper-level power distributioncomponent.
l Power on a DC base station.
1. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply andthe ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.
2. Turn on the external power switch to power on the RFC cabinet. Power on theTMC11H if it is configured as a transmission cabinet.
3. Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the RFC to ON.Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as DCDU-12Aand DCDU-12B.
4. Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the TMC11Hto ON. Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such asDCDU-12C.
5. Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.6. Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
929
Table 5-43 Normal status of components in the cabinet
Cabinet Component
Normal Power Supply Status
TMC11H BBU l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and offfor 1s).
FAN 02A/FAN 02B/FAN 02D
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
Fan in thefront door
The fan is working properly.
RFC RFU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
FAN 01A/FAN 01B/FAN 01C
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
- RRU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
7. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,
handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.
Table 5-44 Troubleshooting
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to allcomponents in thecabinet
Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit
breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
930
Failure Type Handling Measure
Failure in the powersupply to a board inthe BBU
Check as follows:1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the
slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the statusof indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove theboard, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards ofthe same type, and check the status of the indicators.l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.
Failure in the powersupply to othercomponents in thecabinet
Check as follows:1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skipthis step and go to step 2 if this component does not useany fuse terminal block.l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse accordingto the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, goto step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to thecomponent.l If the input power is normal, replace the component.l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connectedsecurely. If the power cable is not securelyconnected, turn off the circuit breaker for thecomponent (if there is no circuit breaker for thecomponent, remove the connector from the powerunit) and reconnect the power cable. If the powercable is securely connected, the protector (such ascircuit breaker or fuse) on the component may bedamaged. In this case, replace the damagedprotector. If the protector cannot be replaced,replace the upper-level power distributioncomponent.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
931
5.13 Subsequent OperationsThis section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgradedand checked.
5.13.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet DoorThe barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label on the cabinetdoor need to be replaced after the upgrade.
ContextThe front door of the cabinet has been replaced during restructuring of the APM30H andTMC11H cabinets. You only need to replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card,and power distribution label.
Procedure
Step 1 Stick the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to theAPM30H and TMC11H cabinets. Their positions are shown in Figure 5-149.
Figure 5-149 Positions of labels for the cabinet
(1) Barcode label (2) Qualification card (3) Power distribution label (4) Nameplate
Step 2 Replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label in the RFCand IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinets.1. Take out the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label
for the cabinet.2. Stick the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to
the same positions as the original labels in the cabinet.
----End
5.13.2 Sealing Cable HolesAfter all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable holes on the base.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
932
Procedure
Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet, asshown in the following figure.
Figure 5-150 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet
(1) Fireproof mud
Step 2 Seal the RF cable holes in the RFC, as shown in the following figure.
1. Route the cables through the corresponding cable holes, and install the cable outlet moduleon the bottom of the cabinet.
2. Use rubber caps to seal the unused cable holes in the cable outlet module.
3. Tighten the screw on the cable outlet module.
Figure 5-151 Sealing the cable holes in the RFC
(1) Cable holes for thepower cables
(2) Cable holes for CPRIelectrical cables
(3) Cable hole for themonitoring signal cable
(4) Cable hole for theequipotential cable
(5) Cable hole for themonitoring signal cable
(6) Screw - -
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
933
Step 3 Push the baffle plates on both sides of the base forwards until the baffle plates contact with thecables, and then tighten the screws on the baffle plates, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-152 Closing baffle plates of the cable holes on both sides of the base
Step 4 Push the baffle plate on the rear of the base forwards until the baffle plate contact with the cables,and then tighten the screw on the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-153 Closing the baffle plate of the cable hole on the rear of the base
Step 5 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base, as shown in the following figure.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
934
Figure 5-154 Sealing cable holes on the base
(1) Fireproof mud
Step 6 Tighten the two screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate, as shownin the following figure.
Figure 5-155 Closing the baffle plate of the cable hole on the rear of the base
----End
5.13.3 RepaintingThe paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept satisfactory. Therefore, any damaged paintmust be repaired.
Prerequisites
Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to Table 5-45.
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
935
Table 5-45 Color codes
Applied to Color Huawei Code International Code
Cabinet RAL7035 YB026 RAL7035
Base 3010 light gray YB030 Pantone 422U
Procedure
Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, rub the area with sandpaperslightly to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in Figure 5-156.
Figure 5-156 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper
Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or dust from therubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with another clean cloth, as shown inFigure 5-157.
Figure 5-157 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
936
Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color.
Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the paint. Then applythe paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be observed, as shown in Figure 5-158.
NOTICEThe paint coating should be as thin as possible. No drops are allowed on the paint coating, andthe surface should be smooth.
Figure 5-158 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet
Step 5 Perform subsequent operations after the repaired paint coating is exposed in the air for 30minutes.
NOTE
The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the surrounding areas, withoutobvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no longer be distinguishable. In addition, thereshould be no paint peeled off.
----End
BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
937